Ghost(writ)ing on the Web as a Travel Writer Transcript

Download (PDF, 257KB)

This week we’re going to be talking about ghostwriting, specifically in the arena of travel writing. Now, have you guys ever come across a piece of writing in the past that was ghostwritten? Perhaps it was something that was written by a celebrity or it had a byline at the top of the book that was so-and-so with somebody else?

I think it’s the kind of thing that we know about in popular culture but we don’t always think about it happening in the world of travel. This is both a fun and lucrative and untapped area of travel writing. That’s why I’m excited to talk to you guys about it today.

This is going to be really more of an overview because there’s a lot that goes into doing the actual writing or ghostwriting. I’m going to talk about the process, but I’m also going to talk about how to get clients. I’m going to talk about what are the opportunities for ghostwriting in the travel world. This is going to be kind of a one-on-one type session. So if people want more, then we can look at going more deeply into this at a later month.

We’re going to start by talking about why do you even want to go into ghostwriting in the first place? Often many of us writers have spent years developing our own voice and our own style and are very happy to have finally found it. So why would you want to do somebody else’s voice and how does that pay really compare to other opportunities?

Then I’m going to look at more than a couple different types of businesses that can benefit from ghostwriting that I recommend that you start reaching out to. Then I’m going to talk about the process of how you reach out to them and also how to set up the procedures for that collaboration. Like so many freelance writing client relationships, the less that you leave to chance, the more of a long-term success opportunity you have with your clients.

I’ve mentioned this a couple times here and there, but it’s particularly apropos to what we’re talking about today. Before I was freelance writer I worked at a major university and I actually was brought in originally as a ghostwriter. I did a couple other things in my job: we also did events, I did a little bit of graphic design, but what I primarily did, and also everybody else in my area, was that we wrote things that came out under the signature or the academic version of one of the bylines. Under the signature of the president of the university I did a big project for the chairmen, we did things that came from the provost and the deans. So I actually had the opportunity to be trained and work in house in a setting where a lot of ghostwriting is being done.

That’s one of the reasons why when I got into travel writing I started looking for these opportunities. The thing is that I mentioned in the newsletter and the blog post about today’s webinar is that these are very easy contracts to close. Part of that is because when you reach out to somebody about ghostwriting their blog for them, first of all, they probably have a blog that they’ve been neglecting, so they obviously understand the importance of a blog, they tried to do it at some point and it just sort of fell off.

They know that they should be doing it and they’re not and they probably have a little bit of guilt or anxiety about that. The other thing is that the type of companies that I’m going to tell you to get for this are really people who understand that having their voice and their expertise shared with their clients and their prospective future clients is a big boon for their business. The people who get back to you about these types of gigs tend to be pretty ready to say yes. It’s just a matter of hammering out those details.

Let’s talk more about that. I’ve got a couple quotes that I’ve pulled for you guys from some different sources. None of them are particularly about travel ghostwriting and that’s good, because it’s a field that’s not overcrowded. There’s a lot of opportunity and interestingly, I came from food writing myself and I know some of you, maybe not some of you on the call today, but a lot of you who might be listening at home later, also do food writing or travel or something combined. There’s interestingly been a lot of discussion around ghostwriting in the food writing space.

Less so than in travel. Part of that I think is because it even happens with food blogging. If you look at the food blogosphere so to say, that really matured a lot faster than the travel blogosphere in terms of monetization. There were bloggers who got book deals very early on who went on to open restaurants who now do workshops.

I was just checking out a food writer and photographer that I really like and she has a workshop coming up in Brooklyn very soon and she’s charging $125 just to spend a few hours of the day with her. They really matured faster in terms of blog to business than the travel space.

It’s very similar with food writing and the cookbook ghostwriting area. Also a little bit in terms of the magazine writing, in terms of article that appear in magazines but they say they’re by the chef and these are their recipes and these are their stories growing up, but those are most often ghostwritten. We’ll talk about some ways to do some similar things in travel as well.

I want to share with you some from the horse’s mouths, words from people who are out there ghostwriting today. I can tell you about my own experiences, but it’s really good to see varying people’s opinions on this because ghostwriting is a huge field with so many different niches of ghostwriting beyond travel versus food or politics. There’s so many different formats that your travel writing can take.

Something I say a lot when I’m advising people to look into setting up ghostblogging contracts with companies is that it’s actually probably going to be some of the most interesting writing they get to do. In terms of having the latitude to really tell stories, to do narrative, to do it at a word count that you want rather than a word count that’s dictated by what the magazine can manage to fit or the budget to pay you. It really gives you, this type of writing, the opportunity to dig into storytelling, which is something I know a lot of you want to do.

One of the articles that I was reading, somebody said something that, “Some of the best and most rewarding writing that I’ve done has been ghost. In my case anyway, the lack of a byline allows my normally rather obnoxious ego to take a nap. You don’t have to worry about taking the public criticism of your content; you just write.”

For anybody who has a personal blog, especially a large personal blog, this probably really hits home. When you are writing to your audience, especially if you have a blog that’s open to comments or generally you’re in a space where you’re in a lot of Facebook groups and there’s a lot of opportunity for people to talk about the content that you put up, there’s a lot of psychological stuff that goes into your posts. Whereas when you ghostwrite you have complete freedom to just focus on the content on hand. To just focus on putting the words together, describing the experiences.

The other thing of course, is the money. We all are here because we want to earn more from our travel writing and hopefully earn more in an easier way that we’re already doing right now.

One of the things about ghostwriting is that it’s not just better paid than many other opportunities, but the pay is easier to earn. I can tell you my own hourly rates about this, but I’ve got a great quote in here that I want to share with you. This comes from an article, I believe it’s in Writers’ Digest, that was written by somebody that I’m going to tell you about in a little bit that’s really just made a killing ghostwriting generally. I have some great books on it.

This quote, which is from Marcia Layton Turner, who’s a freelance book ghostwriter specifically, says, “I ghostwrite for a number of reasons, not the least of which is the steady stream of revenue. I also find that most cases ghostwriting is easier than authoring a book myself because there is less research to be done. The client/author is generally responsible with proving background material or for pointing me in the right direction.”

This is really key. We can talk about hourly rates and we can talk about the fixed rate of pay for a lot of these things, but it’s really important to remember, when you are both setting up these gigs and also quoting them, that ghostwriting should be easier than doing it yourself. Because somebody else should be giving you the ideas and direction.

That can also make ghostwriting really attractive in terms of if you have a lot of work that you’re doing or you really have to do a lot of strategy, coming up with a lot of ideas and you really have a lot of responsibility on your plate in that way, and you’re looking for a place to just sit down and do the writing. Ghostwriting can also offer you that opportunity.

Let’s look a little bit at the rates. I mentioned that this quote was from someone that I wanted to tell you about and her name in Kelly James-Enger. She’s got this lovely blog, Dollars and Deadlines, which has been around just for ages, I think for probably more than 10 years now. She used to be a big freelance writer for women’s magazines. She would write for magazines like Marie Claire or Elle. She would write a lot about fitness, she also became a personal trainer. She essentially opted out of these one-dollar, two-dollar-a-word-style publications to move into ghostwriting a couple years ago.

Here’s somebody doing what essentially we all want to do. Somebody writing for the big New York magazines, her byline is on newsstands every month, she’s getting paid several dollars for every single word that she writes, and she has chosen to opt out of that to do ghostwriting. Part of it has to do with that other quote that I shared with you about ghostwriting being easier in so many ways.

Part of it also has to do with the hourly rate. This comes from the Writer’s Digest article that Kelly James-Enger had written on ghostwriting, which is quite long and covers a lot of the same bases that we’re going to talk about today, but it’s also similar to this webinar; it’s a bit general. She does on her website go into a lot more detail and she also has a book on it. So of you want to dive more into ghostwriting I recommend checking out her book and her website.

Here’s some of the rates that she has. These are for books that are in similar spaces of writing to those she used to write about: health, business, nutrition, fitness. She has received $20,000 for one book and that works out to .33 per word. If you think about it, she used to be writing $1/$2 a word for magazine articles, but there was a lot of back and forth, both in terms of the time spent corresponding with editors as well as the rewrites required for each of those pieces, which drives that actual hourly rate, even thought it’s a dollar to two dollars a word down quite a bit. In this case, she as the ghostwriter has a lot of trust put into her that she essentially can unilaterally do a lot of this writing.

Also with the kind of book-length works that she’s looking at, you can get a lot of extra words in there that they don’t scrutinize so closely as they would for a magazine article for a big New York publisher. If you look at that same per-word rate as a 500-word blog post, then you might be at $165. I know for a lot of you that would be a great jump up from what you’re receiving now for blog posts.

Another project that she worked on was a business book that was 40,000 words and for that one she had a .38/word rate, which would be $109 for a 500-word blog post. She had another one—and this is important, I’m going to talk about this a little bit later—are the different types of ghostwriting in terms of whether the client has provided some writing in the first place. Kelly’s given two different examples of that. I want to show you how that plays out in terms of the rate that you receive.

One of them here she had a memoir that the book had been written already but needed reworking. For that she got .22 a word, which would work out to about $110 for a blog post. If you think about it, I’m sure a lot of you have been in the position where—In fact somebody who was at one of our recent retreats is doing this for About.com—where you’ve been in the position where you have a client where they have a lot of old blog content perhaps, that they want you to rewrite. Or other types of articles of that nature.

In this case, $110 for 500 words is a lot more than most of you are getting for rewriting work. That’s because of the premium that ghostwriting fetches. Another example that she gave here is that she wrote another book where the client wrote part of it and she wrote the rest. In that case she got about .31 a word, which would work out to $155 for a 500 word blog post.

One of the things that you may have noticed from when I was talking about my days at the university, and also is evident in Kelly’s examples here, is that the people whose names are on these books or in the case of what were talking about, tour companies, the person who is theoretically running the show has so much on their plate. The stark reality that matters is that that person is rarely doing all of the things that people think they’re doing.

This is actually from a New York Times article that’s on ghostwriting in the food world, which is very interesting and I recommend that you check it out. But in this case somebody is a recipe developer for Rachael Ray who works in her television show as well as her magazine and cookbooks said that, “The team behind the face is invaluable. How many times can one person invent a new quick pasta dish?”

Obviously this is very apropos to Rachael Ray, but the thing is that is comes down also to people who run tour companies or who do travel planning. I used to say this a lot: that I wrote all about Italy, only Italy for years and years. I got out of that because I had gotten to the point where I couldn’t say how to order a cappuccino or a latte that wasn’t an American latte at an espresso bar one more time. I didn’t have any new ways to say the same thing.

This is one of the reasons that a lot of small business owners, they may have started blogs and they may have not continued with them because since they aren’t writers and it’s their job every day to talk to clients all day all the time, they feel like they don’t have anything left to say on this topic.

Our job as the ghostwriter is to help them find those words. Something that I heard, I believe it was either in university when I studied literature or perhaps sometime in the writing class, but I couldn’t find a specific quote, but I wanted to share it with you. It’s that “the job of the writer is to make things that everybody feels and everybody knows but they don’t know the words for to put that down on paper.”

I think that applies especially in fiction and often in poetry, but that really has a lot to do with the work of the ghostwriter. We want to find things that our client thinks, knows, feels, what have you, and translate them in a way that that person thinks is magic. This is the thing that I know can make it a little hard if you want to get into ghostwriting: It seems like that process from taking something out of somebody else’s head somehow – we’ll talk about how – and turning it into something on the paper than they never possibly could have said seems a bit magical. The thing is, we want that to seem magical to the client. We want it to look like something that they just don’t understand.

In a way, it is magic. It takes a lot of psychology and knowledge of the industry and what not, but just because it looks like that to non-writers doesn’t mean it needs to look like that to you.

Let’s get into this. I also wanted to say, by the way, that we’ve used these examples of people in different industries and part of the reason that I wanted to show you how pervasive ghostwriting is, generally across the board in other industries, is to show you the breadth of the types of people in the travel industry that you can reach out to for ghostwriting.

Kelly James-Enger, who I’ve mentioned before, had said that, and this is pulled from the article in Writer’s Digest, “What you might not know is that most authors who hire ghostwriters aren’t big egos or household names. Instead they’re professionals (think physicians, attorneys, financial advisors) who want to publish books to attract clients and establish themselves as experts in their field, but lack the time and/or ability to actually write the manuscripts.”

She’s zeroed in on physicians, attorneys and financial advisors here, but we’re going to look at what the types of people with those needs in the travel writing space. You probably are familiar with quite a number of these types of organization and types of people, but you just might not thought of them as potential ghostwriting targets.

There are three basic groups that I want to look at here. The first is tour companies. I’ve just put a couple on here because these are ones I wanted to give you some examples for, but the types of tours out there, they’re just, it’s mind boggling now how many tours there are. I’ve been sharing this quote a lot lately, but I’ll bore you with it one more time. It’s that the tourism activities market is just blowing up. As you may have seen, AirBnB has moved into the tourism activities market with their Experiences. Viator has recently become a huge name in the market. The tourism activities market just in the U.S. alone is estimated to have 60,000 businesses that are valued at $20 billion or more.

Just the tour businesses that are that size, or even the ones smaller, that alone is more clients than the whole pack of us that are listening to this webinar would ever need in an entire lifetime. So the tour market alone is just enormous. The thing is that tour companies tend to start small. They tend to be started by an individual, maybe a couple, maybe a partnership that’s not a couple, who have an interest in something, see a gap in the market (as in that other people are interested in this thing but nobody’s giving a tour about it). Then they start small.

Maybe they give a tour one Saturday a month, then they’re doing it every Saturday. Then they’re doing it Saturday and Sunday. Then it’s Friday, Saturday and Sunday. Now they’ve quit their jobs because they’re getting requests on other days from private groups and they have to set up a company where they can do it sometimes and they can hire other guides to do it for them other times.

These tend to be companies that, if not now, then once upon a time, were driven by the skill, the panache, the expertise of that person who started the company. These are really great, really ripe targets for this type of work because of that.

Also, because what they are doing, as in what they’re doing as their product, which is tours, inherently has both a lot of stories and also a lot of questions that consumers have. “Why should I book this tour? What happens if it rains? What kind of shoes do I need? Should I eat something beforehand?” There are so many questions that customers have.

With tour companies, particularly because they’re so customer-intense – as in you have, not just so many customers that are coming in and out every day, but so many customers that interact very directly with somebody from the company who are getting questions. Questions or FAQ’s (Frequently asked questions (are a fantastic place to start with ghostblogging for these types of companies.

Quite simply, they’re easy to capture, to polish up, to put out there and to answer for prospects before they come in. This is a very easy sell to tour company owners. Where do you get the questions is the next question you might have. But the thing is that in almost any case, the people who are interacting, who are having questions from customers, are doing so in a way that can be very easily recorded.

Either it’s people who are in some sort of, not call center, but who work in the office for the company and they answer calls, or better yet, it’s over emails so the responses to the questions are already written up and all you need to do is polish them. Or the questions are happening with a tour guide who might be very easy to record. All of these sources of text, so to say, once text is written down, can very easily become blog posts.

Furthermore, like I said, the expertise of the person who started the company is a very specific selling point for the tour company. That’s also easily captured because tour guides you can get somebody to record a tour. You can take an hour or an hour and a half tour and pull easily 50 blog posts out of just one recorded tour in terms of anecdotes that are little interesting snippets of the history of the place where they’re leading the tour or the back-story of a place that they stop if it’s a food tour. Or descriptions say of different types of Italian hams in a place that they visit on a food tour.

There’s so many different little easily compactable and selectable and dice-able stories that happen on tours that this is both an easy place to start and one of the ones that I recommend in terms of if you’re looking for a very long-term collaboration. There’s just so much to do and the ROI is very easily demonstrated for the business owners. In the case of a tour company, it’s not at all uncommon for somebody to be looking through the website and clicking through the blog post in a very direct path to book a tour.

This is the kind of thing where, opposed to a lot of different types of content marketing where they might be exposed to different mentions of the company in various places and then in a new browser session go to book, it’s very common because this is an activity that people book quickly. It’s sort of a low spend as far as hospitality spent on somebody’s vacation goes. It’s a very easily trackable process.

A couple other options here: I mention outdoor adventure tours and this is largely because during the Travel Content Con, there was somebody that was specializing in this. I have looked at quite a few of these recently and one of the companies that we looked at—and this isn’t the first time I’ve seen this—was essentially using their blog as a dumping ground for customer testimonials.

That’s bad for two reasons. Because the testimonials should be somewhere where people who are looking for testimonials or who are about to book would be looking. Whether they’re looking for testimonials or they could be influenced by testimonials at that time. Testimonials would be much better served in a different location.

Second of all, when somebody goes to a company’s blog, they’re looking for more curated information. One of the things that can really work for a lot of these different types of companies that we’re going to look at but is especially good for tour companies, is a case-study style blog post where you might say—and I’m using the outdoor adventure tours here because it had some good examples—you might have some people who are afraid of rafting or skydiving or something who come into it feeling like they aren’t sure.

You can take the testimonial and rewrite it as a case study of how people in the tour company that you’re writing for helped this person to then have that great experience and wrap up the blog post with the testimonial. These are posts that don’t have to be very long. They can be 300-500 words depending on how long the testimonials are. You as the writer can write them very fast. This is another type of blog post that you can do from the voice of the company owner.

Rather than saying, “So-and-so wanted to go on blah blah tour and wasn’t sure,” and writing it all in this very third person kind of way that case studies are often written, you write it in the first person and you say, “When so and so called me…” because you’re writing as the company owner “…about rafting with their family because it was their wife’s favorite thing to do when she was small, he told me that he personally had never been rafting and was afraid of it and wanted to make sure we went on some docile rapids. Over the course of planning the private trip for this family we were able to work out a path that showcased this natural attraction and that scenic viewpoint while still keeping in the boundaries of what my client’s husband was OK doing.”

Then you include the testimonial from the husband saying that he never knew he would enjoy it, this was the best experience he’s ever had with his family and he plans to come back every year.

That’s how you can take another type of text that’s already written, which is a customer testimonial, and still turn it into a first-person story.

One question that often comes up with ghostwriting is, “You don’t know what was said on that phone call or you don’t know exactly what the exchange between those people was so how can you write it up? This is the same question we have when writing articles. “What if I didn’t take notes on what the barista said to me about the coffee and I just kind of have some general notes but I don’t have his exact words? Can I still call it a quote from him?”

There’s various was to do that in journalism, but when you’re ghostwriting a blog for a company, as long as a company owner signs off on it or the person you’re ghostwriting for, it’s totally fine to put words in their mouth and to essentially make things that you don’t have first hand knowledge of into a proper narrative arc, into an interesting story.

Let’s look at the next subsection of organization that you can do ghostblogging for as a travel writer. These are brick and mortar travel locations. We think a lot about boutique hotels because when we go on press trips we are often either visiting them or staying in them. I can’t tell you how many site visits where they kind of parade you around a hotel and tell you about all of the square-footage of the ballroom and the amenities and the spa I personally have been on, but these are really great options for us as ghost travel writers.

Because all these venues are competing in this incredibly crowded marketplace whether they’re wedding venues or hotels or attractions. For them both to stand out once someone is interested in them and particularly to stand out for people who don’t even know about them and can’t find them, a blog is an incredibly valuable asset to show the expertise of the staff as well as the unique opportunities and amenities of the location.

Especially with hotels, but also with venues and attractions, you can ghostwrite as more than one person. This is kind of an interesting trick. Rather than just ghostwriting as the owner, let’s say we’re talking about a wedding venue that’s a dude ranch. Rather than just ghostwriting as the owner, who has had this property for four generations, you can also ghostwrite as his wedding planner and you can also ghostwrite as his wrangler, who helps the bride and groom get on the horses for their adventurous wedding photo shoots. You can ghostwrite for more than one person in one business.

What’s very cool about that on the one hand is that it’s fun for you as the writer because you get to play with different voices. It’s kind of like you get to be an actor-writer in a way. On the other hand it also gives more depth to the company’s blog because it looks like more people are involved in the customer-facing aspects of the business. And they are! They are involved with the customers who actually show up on site, but now you’re making those people accessible to people who haven’t yet been to the venue.

It also shows that the company has a lot going on. When you’re ghostwriting as just one person, or when you have a blog even that’s not bylined by anybody and it’s just the corporate tone, the reader is interacting with one person. They’re interacting whether it’s in the corporate tone or with the actual owner of the company and they don’t know what the size of the company is. They don’t know how established it is. But when you’re giving multiple voices in that blog, it creates this community feeling that from a psychological perspective can be very powerful at calling people in in terms of them wanting to be part of something.

Here are a couple opportunities, especially for types of blog posts that you can do for these things. I put wedding venues on here because I cannot even tell you how many wedding locations are just springing up out of nothing in tiny communities all over the place. When I used to write for a lot of travel trade magazines I was often looking up meeting venues in places that were very rural locations where I thought, “I’ll be surprised if I can find anything halfway decent besides the Springhill Inn and Suites hotel.”

But there was just an enormous number and variety of people who were opening up formerly not used or only privately used venues for weddings. Part of that is because it’s a big business. So when you’re blogging for wedding venues, it’s also a great monetary opportunity for you because they really do charge enough and you can go on their websites and check how much they charge. They definitely charge enough to pay you to be doing their blog. And when you’re ghostblogging either as the owner of the venue or a wedding planner, it’s so important for brides who are coming in to feel like they really have a connection to a place.

That voice, that personal voice rather than a company voice on the blog is a huge step toward doing that. But then what should you be writing about? When you have a wedding venue blog, which is first person as opposed to third person, that gives you the opportunity to take those case-study style posts that I was talking about and put them into a fact.

For instance, in this case with the wedding venue, you could talk about how somebody wanted to plan their wedding and it had a unique challenge. Maybe she was going to have more people or she really wanted to have the wedding in one part, the reception in one part, and the dinner in another part and they were quite far away. Then you can talk about how you met that challenge using horse-drawn carriages and all these different things.

What happens, how you sell to the client, is that by showing these case studies, you’re showing potential bookers, potential clients, what they could do. Also how you work with them to customize things.

I used to have a lot of venues tell me, if I would ask them what they do for a tour—this is less so in the wedding area and more just in terms of attractions—what they do with the group on a private tour, they would always tell me, “Whatever you want,” or “They’re all completely customized.” I used to get this from so many museums.

OK, fine, I understand that you customize it, but I need some example that I can tell people in this article I’m writing about what they’re going to see on your tour. You need to tell me something.

That’s the same feeling that a lot of customers, especially with weddings. You have perhaps on Instagram or Pinterest or whatever, your own personal look book of what you’re thinking of, but you don’t know if that’s possible or what’s possible or how flexible the venue is at the place you’re looking at. So having those sort of case studies for a wedding venue is a huge selling point. Like I said, they totally have the money for you.

With weddings, as well as boutique hotels and also with attractions, there’s another type of really great blog post that I recommend pursuing, which is the back-story blog post. This is the kind of thing where you take a tiny, tiny seemingly insignificant detail in the site, in the physical space, and talk about how it got to be there.

Perhaps it’s n interesting sculpture or other interesting architectural element. Or perhaps it’s the furniture, which was sourced from somebody’s grandmother and so on and so forth. But you take, essentially, a snapshot, a tiny slice of something in the physical space and dig really deep into its history.

This is also called an object lesson. This is the kind of thing that works much better as a first person blog post than as a third-person blog post because when you write as the owner saying, “When we found out that we were going to get this property it was very sudden and we weren’t prepared to fill it with all this furniture, so my wife’s mother said, ‘Well, let me talk to our great aunt because I know she has all of these antiques that she is probably going to get rid of at some point. Maybe she’ll just give it to us early.’”

And you can essentially just go through the story of how something in the venue came to be. These stories don’t have to be completely complex and incredibly narrative, they just need to be giving personality and life and three-dimensions to the venue.

With boutique hotels, these are often in historic spaces where the stories might not be specifically those of the current owner, but perhaps they’re stories of the past owner or people who used the space for different purposes before. You can still do that story in the first person voice of the present owner.

With stories, the way to get them from the owners or the staff members is either by hopping on a quick easy phone call and interviewing them the same way you would interview the people for any article that you would be doing, or you can also, similar to with the tour guides, have them record themselves when they’re telling these stories to other guests. There’s a lot of different ways that you can source these stories.

Another thing that I put on here under attractions, I specifically put especially small and quirky ones and I wanted to qualify that a little bit. When we think of attractions we tend to think about one of two things. Three things. We think of major landmarks, for instance here in NY we have the Statue of Liberty and the Empire State Building. We think of natural attractions in terms of Mount Rushmore, the Grand Canyon. Then we think of theme park sort of attractions. Something in a Harry Potter World kind of thing.

But there’s a lot of attractions that people visit or have interest in that really don’t get so much attention from travel writers, especially travel writers who are doing content marketing. These are often things that are very rich with stories. It might be a pottery workshop that has since the 1930’s hosted some of the country’s top potters in residence or has perhaps been in the same family for four generations and now the four different siblings of this generation each have a different pottery style.

Or it could be a historic home. In that case there are often tours going that you can record to get great stories from very easily. But with attractions, it can often be very useful to take this multi-ghostwritten author approach. Some blog posts might be from the guest-relations coordinator. Some blog posts might be from one of the tour guides. Some blog posts might be from the group activities planner. This multi-author ghostwritten approach can be a lot more fun for you as the writer, but it also has the added benefit that you can charge a premium for it.

As I mentioned in the blog post and the newsletter that led into today’s call, there’s a lot of things about ghostwriting that you can charge a premium for. One of them is when you aren’t allowed to mention that that person is your client. Another one is if they want to buy exclusive rights to the words. Another one is, and this is a great options to add because it’s fun for you and it’s a lot more useful as well for businesses of a certain size, is this multi-author ghostwritten blogs. That’s definitely something that I recommend that you guys look in to.

The last category that I want to talk about in terms of companies you should approach are travel planners. So there are different people, and when I say people I mean organizations, but there’s several different types of companies in this arena. Like the other lists, this is not a complete list. I wanted to start by talking about reward travel planners. Award travel bookers.

Largely because a lot of them already have their own websites so it’s a really good way for you guys to go and see the type of content that a company that does travel booking of some sort should have on its blog in order to entice customers.

Award travel blogs are this area of the travel industry that is so far ahead of most travel blogs in terms of monetization, and I mention this often. Similar to many travel blogs, they talk about destinations, they do reviews, they do trip reports, they do round-up posts, they do travel tips, but then they also do a lot of monetization of the service variety. That is often award travel booking.

What award travel booking is means that, say you have accumulated points for years and years and years that you want to use on your honeymoon and you want to get first class round trip tickets for you and your significant other to the Maldives. You want to stay in an over-water villa. This is the Maldives dream. I did this on my own honeymoon and I got food poisoning in India and didn’t really see any of it, but it’s the Maldives dream.

Say that’s something that you’ve always thought of, you have your points, you go to book it and you look on Delta and it’s going to cost you half a million points each for those flights. You say, “Oh my god, I don’t have that many points! Why did I think this was possible? I saved all those points for years! What am I going to do?”

These award travel bookers, what they’ll do is you tell them all the points you have and what you want to do and they have an incredible amount of knowledge in terms of exactly which flights have how many award seats. That you need to book this flight on Delta through Air France rather than directly through Delta because it will only cost 1/3 the number of miles. All of things they just have at the tip of their fingers. They’ll charge you $100 a person and it’ll take them five minutes to book those flights for you.

They have the monetization completely down and they’ve built up these enormous blogs to funnel business to them through this expertise. One who has quite a lot of people writing for him and also a large amount of destination content that’s not around travel bogging is The Points Guy, also referred to as TPG. But another really great one that I recommend is by Gary Leff. Another one is Million Mile Secrets.

Those three are really some of the bigger travel bloggers out there who all have concierge businesses that I recommend you check out to see the breadth of the type of blog posts that can be done for people who have various types of travel booking businesses. But there’s several other types of travel booking businesses.

One that I mention a lot, because these are a really great target for ghostwriting, is the sort of subset out there known as concierge travel planners. This is always a term that kind of confuses people who aren’t familiar with the group, so I want to explain it in a little bit.

Somebody who is a concierge travel planner acts as a concierge sort of in the same way that a hotel would, except not on demand all the time. If you think about the concierge at the hotel, they’re somebody who has a lot of information about different activities, the best person to go to if you need your shoe fixed when you’re on your vacation, the person who can get you theatre tickets, who can get you restaurant reservations, all of these things. Who can recommend a driver to you if you’re in India and you need to be driven around for the day.

These concierges in hotels are very similar to concierge travel planners in terms of the different types of knowledge that they have. However, concierge travel planners tend to do more or less in one go often through a couple different phone calls with the client, the entire trip plan for clients. Usually it’s individuals, sometimes it’s groups, but essentially these are people who plan trips for people of a certain income level who can pay for those things.

Sometimes they’re really not as expensive as you think. They’re charging similar to the award travel bookers; they’re charging a flat fee for the conversation and then they take a commission off of the things that they book for you. These people trade on their expertise, on their personality and on more or less their black book. I looked at this in one of the other calls, but they’re often a bit reluctant to share the things in their black book, but if that’s the case, there are still a lot of things that you can do in terms of ghostblogging for them.

You can have them talk about experiences that they’ve had in the region, you can do something more along the lines of not exactly an itinerary, but them talking about their perfect day in a place and not name exact venues, but talk about how they would go to this garden and then they would have this sort of pasta for lunch and then they would have a gelato of this flavor in this season because that’s the best time to get this flavor and they would check out the Uffizi at this time of day because that’s when there are fewer people, things like that.

These people really trade on their personality and their recommendations. So they’re a very good place to start, a good target group. However, and I’m going to mention this a little bit when we talk about the process, is that you need to have either a very high level of expertise as a ghostwriter or a lot of experience in the place where they operate.

Concierge travel planners tend to have a specific geographic are of expertise, whether that’s the English countryside or there’re some travel planners that are adventurous even though they’re high end. So Banff National Park in British Columbia, but they typically have a certain geographic area where their M.O. is that they know everybody and all of the best things.

You can start looking for things that match up to geographic areas you know well and reaching out to that.

Another subset of travel planners is group tour operators. There is an astounding diversity of group tours out there right now. I don’t just mean by age or by interest group. There are group tours that are operated by banks, there are group tours that are operated by alumni groups. AFAR does group tours, there are so many types of group tours. There are a lot of companies that specialize specifically in group tours.

A lot of the different types of blog posts can apply to blogging or ghostblogging for group tour operators. Also the technique of blogging as multiple people so you can blog as different tour guides as opposed to just the company owner.

But another thing with group tours is that there are often a lot of questions. This is the same with the award travel bookers and the concierge travel planners of course, but traveling in a group inherently has more uncertainty than when you have a specific itinerary that’s designed just for you, which is the case for the other two. Those sort of customer service FAQ-style blog posts can really do very well with the group travel operators as well.

With travel agents, this is an interesting thing. I’m sure some of you have been in the situation where you’re on a press trip sort of thing, which is called a FAM trip or familiarization trip, and you’re on it not just with writers but you’re on it with travel agents. Travel agents tend to take a lot of trips themselves to check out places, to see the hotel, to figure out which are the best rooms, what they want to recommend to their people.

One of the things with travel agents is that a very good type of post that you can do for them is the type of trip report post or the “hidden gems I uncovered here” type post. Similar to what I talked about with the weddings, this is the kind of the thing that by showing some examples of what you have in your repertoire, you’re showing potential customers what the options are for them, while at the same time inviting them to come and discuss with you what would work best for them specifically.

I’ve talked a lot about ghostblogging because it’s easy to get into, especially if you’ve had your own blog in the past and have some expertise in blogging, but I want to point out that we talked a lot earlier about ghostwriting books because books tend to be a more well-known field, but there’s so many different types of ghostwriting in travel that you can do.

I’ve mentioned apps on here because this is something that I’ve seen a lot of companies getting into, but in terms of ghostwriting, one of the big ones is often newsletters. Many companies, especially small companies, really like to have that come out under the signature of the business owner. But you also have to think, “how do people get on the list to get these newsletters in the first place?” Sure, it’s past customers, but what about people who aren’t customers yet? You can also ghostwrite books or email series to get people to sign up for the newsletter in the first place.

Then of course there’s the area of books, which can be authority or vanity. A vanity book would be the kind of thing that a hotel or wedding venue or an attraction might have on site, on venue, which is talking all about the place itself. Whereas an authority book would be more written by a concierge travel planner about the region that they’re familiar with in terms of travel tips that establishes them as an authority in that area.

Other things that are more or less blogging but not on one’s own blog that are also authority building are articles of medium length which you can do using the same blog posts that you’re already writing for people. Then social media posts; this is another one. I always caution you to be quite careful about getting into social media writing or social media posting for companies just in terms of the time involved, but if you’re already doing ghostblogging, it’s a very easy, large squidge sideways to pull some text out of there to put into a social media post for your client.

Another one is trade magazine articles. This is one of these areas where I mentioned earlier that Rachael Ray has her own magazine and a lot of those are “written by her” whereas they’re actually written by other people. There are a lot of the trade magazines that we looked at that aren’t really open to freelancers because they’re written for free by people who work in the industry for exposure.

For them they’re happy to have that exposure because they’re not professional writers, but the interesting Catch-22 here is because they’re not professional writers they’re not very good. So a lot of the time they will have professional writers ghostwrite those pieces that they’re having published for exposure. So that’s another thing you can get into as well: writing for magazines as a ghostwriter under the pen name of the people who run these travel companies.

I want to talk a little bit about the process. How you break in is very similar to what we’ve talked about in other types of blogging, especially those of you who caught the webinar a few weeks back about how to sell blogging as a service. You’d be pitching these people cold. I don’t think I’ve ever seen in travel this kind of thing advertised for you to be ghostwriting for a company owner because they don’t want their competition to know they’re using ghostwriters. So you’d be cold pitching the owner as you would with other blogging gigs, but your prospect list needs to be quite focused around companies that would benefit from ghostblogging.

Meaning that the personality of the company is important as a selling point to prospective customers. Particularly ones that already have blogs or newsletters if you want to that route, in place. Because the process of getting that set up for a small company can take a very long time even if you’re doing it in the off season if they haven’t already started down that road.

As I mentioned, authority in the field that the company operates in or in ghostwriting, you can go one or the other, so if you have a background in ghostwriting or blogging you can kind of move sideways into some different things, but I really recommend for your first gig that you approach like this, to take companies that specialize in the same things that you specialize with or your prospect list.

I mentioned that we’d get into this and there are really three levels of ghostwriting. Similarly in editing you’ll see people talk about structural edits, developmental edits, line edits. There are a lot of different types of editing, and that’s very similar to the different levels in ghostwriting. It’s important to note here, that you should be charging differently for different things. Oddly, it doesn’t just go up or go down, the middle should actually be the least expensive part.

If somebody fashions themselves a writer and has a 1,700-word stream of consciousness, sentences aren’t complete, beginnings of sentences are in lowercase. I say this by personal experience; this isn’t just me making things up. Things that they think are blog posts that they want you to polish up for them or rewrite, that can actually end up taking you much, much longer than just writing a good post in the first place.

Part of that is because the idea that started that piece of ineffectual writing is inherently flawed. This is the same problem that comes up and that I’ve no doubt talked to several of you who are on the call about, where when you start to pitch an article idea to an editor, and they look at that pitch, we often end up not discussing the words of the pitch at all because the idea isn’t right for the magazine. It’s not narrow enough, it doesn’t have a good enough time peg, it needs to be in a different format, something like this.

If somebody has a bunch of things that they’ve written and they want to write it and give it to you, I recommend declining that. You’re much less likely to generate blog posts that are effective in their aim – which is to get people to book whether it’s an attraction or a travel planning session or a tour – if the ideas aren’t generated in the most effective way in the first place.

What I really recommend is this second category. I’ve sort of edited it to say it’s less their ideas and your words than collaborated ideas and your words or ideas that have their input. Because the last category on here – Your ideas and their words, kind of the reverse of their ideas and words – inherently is a little tricky because two things can happen.

If you are essentially coming up with the ideas and writing the blog posts with a very high degree of autonomy, there can either be a lot of micro-management, which makes your hourly rate go down, or lack of micro-management, which makes the end result not so palatable to the client. Both of these are slightly dangerous things. You can manage the process, but I’ve always found the happiest medium to be where there’s some collaboration in terms of the vein of the ideas, how they’re sourced, perhaps a shared list that you work from together, and then you write the words based on that and based on their style.

I’ve done this both in travel and also I ghostwrote a blog on freelancing for several years as I mentioned at the university. I’ve always found that when there’s that bit of input, a buy-in, an ownership – but not too much – from the person who gets the author credit, they tend to be much happier with the end result because they think it was their idea even if you’re managing it and really changing their idea to really be in line with what will resonate with people.

In that vein, like I said, the most important thing that makes the different between their ideas and words, their ideas with your words, or your ideas and words, is the division of labor and the process. It’s really important in your discussions, but particularly in your proposal on your contract, to be excruciatingly clear on who provides what to whom and when.

What that means is how far before the posts come out do the ideas need to be agreed upon and how long before that do you need to present the ides to the client? Do they need to review the post before it gets scheduled? If so, how much time do they need in advance to make sure they get it back to you in enough time for you to make the edits? Who is putting the posts into the content management system? Who’s finding the photos and selecting the tags and the categories? Who’s responsible for the final editing?

When I do ghostwriting, I’m typically responsible for the final edits and I schedule it and it goes out. What that means is that I work with an editor or a copywriter or a proofreader or whatever to edit those things for me so that I can always say to the clients, “This gets a second pair of eyes before it goes out.” That also kind of saves me from being ultimately responsible for that text.

I really recommend that you do your ideas in batches rather than going back and forth every week about what the idea is going to be because you’re going to want to kill yourself at the end of the process. You’re going to spend so much time on email with this client and you’re also encouraging them to be more involved in the process and more communicative which makes sense for your hourly rate.

Similarly, it’s really important to clarify how many revisions are allowed. I think with my clients I usually do one round of revisions, perhaps in the early stages I do up to two and that’s on the posts, not on the ideas. The ideas need to be essentially back and forth and we’re done. I see this a lot with graphic designers because they have a codified way of doing the back and forth. With writers I essentially think you just have a lot of emails and you don’t really think about the stages and the number of rounds of revisions you have.

But with graphic designers, say you’re working on a logo, they tend to give an array. They would first give the client some very different logos. The next step is to take the ones that the client liked and to give a couple similar ones. Then they have to pick one. Then they get 5 or 6 versions that are similar but very slightly different. Then they have to go with that and that’s it. They don’t get any more rounds than that. I’ve seen graphic designers essentially cut off clients who want that first stage, the many options stage, to go on for too long.

It’s very important with your clients to not only set clear expectations, but to have them in writing and in something that’s signed and agreed upon like your contract. Similarly with the technical tasks: who selects the photos, who uploads the photos, who puts the entire post into WordPress in the first place? Those are some points in particular and if you have the Six Figure Travel Writing Roadmap, my book, or if you don’t have it yet, I recommend it for this purpose: in the back, in the appendix, I have 4 different examples of proposals. Several are for ghostwriting to show you how to delineate and negotiate and spell out these different aspects.

That’s all that I’ve got for you today. Thank you guys so much for joining me today and I hope that you guys had a lovely labor day if you’re in the U.S. and that you have a great weekend.

What Types of Articles Should You Be Writing? Transcript

Download (PDF, 273KB)

This week we’re going to be talking about something a little different. We don’t often look at the writing part of travel writing so much and there’s a big reason for that. It’s because if you can’t pitch, if you can’t get that assignment, you’re better off not practicing your writing. You’re better off not writing in a vacuum to your own specifications of what a story is without having an editor, without having the framework of a magazine article to work within because you’re going to pattern that type of writing that’s not publishable.

That’s why we talk so much about pitching and how to write pitches and how to analyze magazines and how to come up with good ideas. Because if you don’t do that first, if you don’t start with the idea, then you end up with writing that doesn’t have a home and writing what’s not publishable, and writing that is hard for people to read or follow.

This week we are going to talk about what types of articles you should be writing. If you got either the email newsletter or read the blog post connected with the call today, you’ll see that we talked a little bit about this first point here already in those two things. We talked about why it’s important to start brainstorming your article ideas with the shape, the section, the format of the article in mind. That is why we are going to look at all of these formats today.

I am going to talk a little bit about what we talked about in the blog post but also say some new things on that. And then I am going to go through the main types of articles that you’re going to come across. And this isn’t travel and travel-related magazines specifically. There are some other types of features and short articles and different things like that that aren’t very prevalent in travel that you might have become familiar with if you have a journalism background or have been to journalism school.

Then we’re going to look at specific examples from that easyJet magazine for each of these article types and we’re going to go backward. We’re going to look at the article and talk about how you would pitch this and why you would pitch it that way for the specific article type. That’s what we are going to look at this week.

Starting with the shape and format section of the magazine before you formulate any more of your pitch ideas, so to speak, is really fundamental. It’s because that’s one of the biggest problems I see with most pitches that I get.

It sucks that I was just looking at one this week where, forget anything else that was going on with the pitch, but I look at it and when I have my editor hat on and I look at these pitches, my immediate thought is “Can I use this?” Because that’s what an editor is thinking. Then, “Do I trust this writer to write it?” But first, it’s, “Can I use this idea,” or “Is it even valid?”

Often, editors get pitches where they simply can’t use it and it’s for a very clear reason. So, I wanted to share this quote from Julia Cosgrove with you. She’s I think now the Executive Editor of Afar, she’s been there for quite a while. At least since 2009 or something and she’s changed roles a couple of times, but she’s kind of the head honcho.

In an interview that was pulled from MediaBistro, actually, she named one of the common things that editors complain about, which is that they get a pitch about a place rather than a story. She says, “I’m going to Peru. Would you like an article about my time there?” That’s the kind of message that gets a swift and immediate delete. She says, “It needs to be a story, not a topic or an idea.”

And what we looked at in the blog post and the newsletter today was: what does that mean? When an editor says that you need to have an angle or a storyline, what does that mean and what are they actually asking you for? What do they mean by a story? But the problem is that I get from a lot of you—and I’m sure we’re going to hear this weekend in the Pitchapalooza that I’m up at the retreat house setting up for—what about these pieces that are like a front-of-book piece or an interview or a roundup? Does a roundup have a point? Does a roundup have a story?

That’s why I find this advice that editors give. I understand from their standpoint, but it totally doesn’t make sense to writers. So what Julia goes on to say is important and I want to share this with you. She said, “We have a very specific take on travel, so really do your homework and familiarize yourself with what makes us different.” And I’m going to get back to the end of her quote in a second, but one of the things I think that a lot of writers miss in looking at magazines is this concept of, “This looks like something they did in the past,” or “I think this is something they would cover.”

For instance, Afar has a very specific taste on travel as Julia said. Which is that they cover very authentic experiential travel. It’s become more high-end than it used to be, but essentially authentic experiential travel. So a lot of times you’ll do something, and you’ll think demographically. Like if you’re the type of person that reads Afar—you read Afar, you are that type of person. This is the kind of thing that those readers are interested in.

But the issue is that what makes a magazine different isn’t just that. And as writers who haven’t been magazine editors and haven’t been on that side of the desk, this is really easy to forget: that for the magazine, for the publisher, for the ads, for the staff, what makes a magazine different is the way they present the information: The visuals, the formats, the length.

For instance, the magazine that we’re going to look at today is very infographic. A lot of their articles have a minimal amount of text, but it’s sliced up in different ways.

There are boxes here, there are photos there, there are maps here, and it’s a very long magazine. That’s why I was saying—If you’ve joined us late, the magazine is in the handout section. It is the May 2017 issue of easyJet Traveler. This is a long magazine. This is 168 pages. In part because they make it so visual, but that’s part of their style.

They are going after a young audience, they’re going after an audience that’s also probably using their phones or other devices on the flight, and so they are competing for that attention and they know that to do it they have to be incredibly hip and entertaining.

As a reader you’ll think, “Oh, easyJet Magazine – this is for people who fly easyJet. EasyJet goes to these destinations. I went to this destination, this might be the kind of thing that would fit in easyJet Traveler.”

But, to those editors, it’s not just the content and it’s not even just the tone, it’s the format. It’s, “Is this something that I can make visually interesting? Is this too much text? Is this something that’s first person? Because I tend to write things that are in second person. Besides even third person, which is descriptive.” These things about the format really have a lot to do with familiarizing yourself with what makes the magazine different as Julia says here.

What she continues to say is, “We get a lot of pitches that might fit better in other magazines.” And I see this all the time. I was on a coaching call yesterday where—and I wasn’t looking at full pitches—the individual had sent me a big list of ideas I had requested matched to magazines that she wanted to break into.

She had done it. She put together 20 ideas matched to magazine sections for 20 different magazines. I was so impressed with how much work she had done. And the thing is that for some of them I had no comments whatsoever, which is very rare. Any of you who know me know it’s rare for me to have no comments on a pitch idea. So that was great, but some of them I looked at and they just weren’t.

I could see how she would say, “Oh, this is what the magazine section would look like,” but it just wasn’t a fit for that magazine. And that is the kind of thing that you need to get a better sense of. If you’re struggling with your pitches, if you’re not getting as many assignments as you’d like, or if you’re just not getting assignments for the magazine caliber or the website caliber you want to be writing for. It’s all about familiarizing yourself. And that means looking past the content, and looking more at the formats.

Let’s get into that. There are a couple different types of articles that I want to look at. I say a couple because some of them are variations of the same kind of thing. I’m going to look at them and show you how they’re different.

The news brief that I have here, there’s a reason that I have just the news brief, but I don’t have anything else that’s brief or short. And that’s because a lot of these formats can work in different lengths. They can be 200 words, they can be 2,000 words. They really can vary with a couple of exceptions here. And those two are the narrative feature and the postcard, which are two sides of the same coin but are only different in length. Let’s look at these in sections.

News brief. This is really something that the story, the what’s going on, the why, is that it’s new. So, this is really important to remember because I have people tell me articles that they want to pitch to a magazine front-of-book section where they’re covering things that are new, and the things that they want to cover have been open for a while. And when I say a while, I mean 6 months, a year, seven months, something.

This is not a news brief anymore. Anytime something is not opening in 6 months, as in when the magazine is coming out that you have your article appear in, it’s not going to be new enough. It’s not going to be the now. By then it will be open for a while, and it’s old. So, anytime you’re doing a news brief it’s really important to keep that in mind. The news part is paramount. That’s why that item exists. So, if the news part isn’t paramount, what else can you do? If it’s a restaurant, a shop, there’s so many other things that you can do with that. The article can’t be about just that this thing exists, because it’s not new anymore.

Then you move into this second section here. This interview, business profile, and person profile. The reason that I think of those as the next step from the news brief is that these are what you do with an individual place that you want to cover that is not new enough to be a news brief. So, if you have visited a museum, a store, a restaurant, an artisan, fashion designer, anything that you think is really great and deserves its own little something, it’s not necessarily a feature. You want to write just about that thing, almost in an encyclopedic capacity. Just about, you know, how it started, why it’s there, what they do.

Then we’re moving into this section. Now we’re into profiles. Profiles essentially take two tracks. An interview, in a way, is a profile, but you’re using the exact questions and words—though they’ve been edited of course—that you exchanged with that individual, whether you’re actually profiling a business or their business or that person. They’re kind of two sides of the same coin.

Whereas when you’re doing a profile, that’s you writing in third person and incorporating quotes, but there’s a lot more molding of the storyline going on and there’s also a lot more external research as well as details.

One of the big things that I find that sets interviews apart, and this is really important to remember, is you’re choosing interview subjects and that interviews just have to stand on their own. They have perhaps a tiny 50-word introduction, but besides that the words that this person is saying need to be interesting enough and the article interesting enough for the editor to publish and for the editor to assign you to do.

This can be tough because we see a lot of celebrity interviews and it doesn’t seem like they have anything in particular to say. The reason that they work is because people are curious, and they want to know what the celebrity thinks about things. So, if you’re proposing an interview, and it’s not with a celebrity, why do people care? The person probably needs to have some sort of expertise. This can work if they’re an expert in some sort of subject area, but that subject area can also be a destination.

You can do an interview, for instance, with a chef who lives in a certain city about their favorite things in that city. Because people care, because people want to know what to eat there and they want to know what’s new in the city, but you’re giving an extra layer that they are hearing it from an expert and they’re not just hearing it from you.

You can add a couple of questions to establish the background of that expert and then you move into their recommendations. But this is really important because there’s a big differentiator between pitching interviews and business profiles. In fact, there’s probably far fewer interview sections out there for this reason: because they’re a bit harder to make interesting. Whereas in a profile, you as the writer can have an interview where you can tell that the business is interesting, but the person isn’t really saying interesting things or they’re not very quotable. You can still write a really great article about it, because you can talk to different people, you can visit the venue yourself, and you can pick up a lot more details that are illustrative and interesting about that person or that business.

The next step up from there, so to say, is a roundup. I like to think of a roundup as essentially where we take a number of news briefs, or a number of business or individual profiles, more so business profiles, and we put them all together.

There are a couple different flavors of that. One is where they’re all similar, as in each item that you’ve included in the roundup. Roundup is a noun for the verb. It’s a noun that means you’ve rounded up a bunch of things and put them together and now you have a roundup. So, in the roundup, which is similar, which we refer to as a basket of kittens, you have a bunch of things that have something in common but that are also different.

For the person who’s interested in the common theme, there’s a wide variety of interesting options. And for the person who doesn’t particularly care about the common theme, but maybe they care about a certain part of the world, or a certain type of music, or a certain type of food, they can also find something between the different items in your basket.

A destination guide, on the other hand, is going to take a lot of different types of things and the only relation is that they’re all in this destination. So, it’s going to be a mix of attractions and hotels and restaurants, and places to walk, or festivals and annual events. In the destination guide, the only commonality between these different things is typically the city. Otherwise they are quite diverse. So the roundup is taking a bunch of news briefs or a bunch of profiles.

The next step from there is that you’re not only describing things—you’re not presenting the encyclopedic view, so to say, of something—rather you are giving the editor this “coveted” story. What does that mean? When you are giving an editor a story, it has a beginning, a middle, and an end. And part of why it has a beginning, middle, and an end is not because it’s chronological, but it’s because something happened in the middle that makes the end different than the beginning.

Let me say that again: a story, for the purposes of narrative journalism, is when there’s a beginning, middle, and end, but something in the middle has made the end different than the beginning. This is very important. And this is the reason why the types of first person narrated blog posts that people write and that are often derided by journalists don’t fly as narrative features. Because it’s not clear or there just isn’t any change between the beginning and the end. There’s no alteration in the person that they discuss, or their perception of the place or of the place itself.

This is really important, because I mentioned earlier how, except for the news brief, everything in here can be different lengths. So, what this means is that a lot of these features aren’t narrative features, and that’s completely fine. A lot of features are business profiles or person profiles, or perhaps interviews, or perhaps roundups. Narrative features aren’t the only kind of feature out there.

This is really important to remember. If you feel like you are the kind of person who looks through the Travel Magazine Database and sees these features and things you should be pitching them, but you don’t feel confident about it, it probably means that narrative features aren’t for you at this moment. Believe me, you’ll work up to them because I used to feel like that myself.

What that means is that the features that are better for you are features that are roundups, or features that are profiles. This is really important to check back on what Julia Cosgrove said. She said, “Don’t give me a topic, give me a story.” So if a narrative feature is a feature that has a beginning, a middle, and an end, and something has changed, what happens when you want to take a profile and turn it into a feature?

You need to add a little bit more of that story element. You need to think a little bit more about that story element, and that it’s not that your whole feature is going to be become a story. You might be writing about a business as your profile, and the story so to say – the beginning, middle, and end – is that first there was a person who had an idea, and now it’s a business. And in the middle some things happen and that’s what you’re going to talk about.

But the change is that first there was a person and now that person has a business. So, the change doesn’t have to always be some glorious thing, like you went to work in a refugee camp for Syrian refugees on an island in Greece that’s next to Turkey for eight weeks and had an epiphany about life. That’s not always what a feature is. A feature can be a profile, but it is important that you consider what’s the change between the beginning and the end once your pieces get longer.

When your pieces are shorter, you can still do something a little bit more encyclopedic as long as you keep in mind what the point is. Why does the editor care, and why do their readers care? So, even though right now we’re talking about article formats, I just want to keep in mind that you can’t just write an actual encyclopedia article. You can’t just read the about page of a company as a business profile. There still needs to be some sort of sense of movement or narration, but not to the extent that you are using in a narrative feature.

You’re introducing new characters that you’ve met in a destination, or you’re introducing characters that are guiding you through the destination. And that you as the narrator, as the protagonist, experienced an internal change or a shift in what you think about the destination. So that’s for the narrative feature.

But if you take a profile and you turn it into a feature, you still have to have that same beginning, middle, and end element. Any time you’re looking at pitching a longer piece, even if it’s not technically a narrative feature, keep that in mind.

How does it extend if you have a roundup that’s become a feature? This is a really interesting point to consider. If you’re doing a roundup, which is long, then what makes the beginning, middle, and end might be the things that you choose to show. It might be something that you explain basically briefly in the preface in that short one or two hundred-word thing in the beginning of the roundup before you get into it. But you still need to establish why you are talking about this place by showing that it’s interesting, and that’s typically done with its beginning, middle and end.

When we look at the destination guide, the one that I’ve chosen to show you is a couple different pages long and you can pull it up as well in the background in the PDF. But, the idea is that they’re showing a destination that you may have thought of in one light, and they’re showing you how to explore it in a different light. So, the beginning, middle, and end in this case is that you as the reader had a certain perception about this place and then as the roundup is showing you different opportunities and different things to do in that place to explore it more deeply, then your perception as the reader changes.

What makes the longer roundups different in the narrative features or in the business profile is who the subject is. If we have a long business profile, the thing or the subject that has changed is the business or the person who started the business. If you have a long roundup, this thing or this person that is changing is the reader. It’s their perception. If you have a long narrative feature, what’s typically changing is you as the first-person protagonist. Or if there’s a different protagonist, then it’s probably a person profile.

I know that’s probably kind of a lot in terms of story and everything, but I wanted to make sure that I get that out there. Because as we start to look at the examples a little bit, I know that the things I just mentioned are things that kind of trip people up. So, I wanted to put that out there so when we get to questions, you’ll understand how the accordion of changing the lengths on profiles versus roundups versus narratives works out.

What that takes us to is the postcard, which is essentially the mini version of the narrative feature. What that means is that it’s even past a short story. A short story is typically some pages that’s actually longer than a narrative feature. The postcard is like if you stuffed a short story into three or four hundred words. The postcard is like a snapshot more than it is a postcard. It’s like a moment from a trip, a visual almost, that’s meant to show you so many other things.

A postcard is a super difficult thing to write when you’re just starting out, and they can be very lovely to perfect. But, I don’t necessarily recommend going after them unless you have other writing training. Because, it’s about doing a lot, really a lot, of setting a scene, projecting a message, giving a sense of place, in a very tiny amount of space. But, we’re going to look at one to give you some examples.

Now, the last two that I have on here are different both from the rest, and also from each other, but I’ve kind of put them together for this reason: that both of them are lesson-oriented. So, they’re not necessarily meant to convey information, as much as they’re meant to teach something.

The personal essay, or just essay, is meant to teach through example. Just so you know, if you want to write essays you need to write them in advance. You can pitch them, but they will always be assigned on speculation. Because essays are the kind of thing where the editor needs to see the finished piece to know if it works for them or not. These are all about the actual text, not the idea, and here’s why: Because an essay is inherently an explanation. What a good essay does is that it starts with a question and then it keeps asking more questions, and more questions, and more questions about that question, and hopefully you’ll eventually arrive somewhere, which might be nowhere in theory, but the idea and the mindset of the author has changed by asking these questions.

Again, like a postcard, it’s not something you’ll want to necessarily dive into if you don’t have a writing background. But, because you have to submit them on speculation anyway, it can be nice to play with on their own for a little while.

It’s much easier to do, and a much better way to grasp the service, or “how-to” piece. Now, I’m sure you guys have all seen several hundred thousand service or how-to pieces on Buzzfeed, or on the cover of Women’s Magazine or things like that. It’s “how-to” this, or of course the typical example is how to have, or like eight different ways to have a better orgasm on the cover of Cosmopolitan magazine or something like that. So, we’re all familiar with what a service or how-to piece might look like.

But, here’s the interesting thing. In journalism generally, not even just in the internet age, but also in the pre-internet age, a how-to piece is quite different than when you just might think, “Oh, of course I can just sit down and just write that.” A how-to piece in journalism, particularly in travel journalism, and particularly today, has to be super backed up by experts. If it’s not your “Five Best Ways to Enjoy Athens,” it is “The Five Best Ways to Enjoy Athens,” and each one has three different quotes from three different local people who are experts to support why that is the best way.

If you’re interested in writing travel service pieces, this is very important to remember: is that if you should never pitch an editor a service piece that you’re just going to write in a vacuum, without getting additional quotes. Forget about just research, but additional quotes. Because otherwise that’s something they can very easily do themselves in-house, in like 15 minutes. So, just don’t pitch it unless it’s going to be a reported service piece. I’m just putting that out there.

I’ve pulled out examples of every single one of these, and I am going to walk through them all one by one.

As I’m telling you all these things and part of the reason that I chose this particular magazine, is that easyJet, as I mentioned earlier, is extremely long. It’s a 168-page book, the one that we’re looking at right now, and part of what makes it so long is its front-of-book. I think that the front-of-book, these short uncategorized pieces that sort of come before the feature, I think there’s about 80 pages of them or something. It’s very, very long for a book.

I remember when we were putting it in the Travel Magazine Database, I said to the writer, “There’s got to be some recurring sections in that enormous front of book right? I mean they have like 25 different articles there.” And she said, “I took a bunch of different issues and they’re really different every time.”

I just thought that was crazy. How can these editors have 25 different articles that they just do from scratch every single month? This is a 12, 12-month a year publication. How can they do all of this without any sort of rubrics, or any recurring columns? As an editor I’d kill myself! That sounds horrible and they must have a lot of people working on this.

But the funny thing is that they don’t. They work with quite a lot of freelancers, they also write some of them in-house. Like I said, a lot of them are very visual, but part of the thing is that they can take anything. They can take an interesting art exhibit they heard coming up, they can take a random idea about what’s new in travel and they can pull together a basket of kittens around it, which means a lot of opportunities for you as the writer.

I have a lot of people come to me and say that they want to pitch features, and I look at the pitch and then I’m like, “An editor is going to look at this and say, ‘This is 200-word story; there’s nothing else here. It’s just a profile. It doesn’t even need to be that long, so this would go in the font-of-book if anywhere.’”

That’s the thing. A lot of these places that you’ve gone, things that you’ve seen, that you’re not quite sure what to do with, they probably do belong in a front-of-book somewhere, but it can be hard to know where. The beauty of front-of-book sections is that we’re going to dive into is that they’re often quite a bit amorphous.

When I do the Pitchapalooza that we have going on this weekend, the live Pitchapalooza, I sit here with our enormous collection of magazines and as we do the lessons, we all grab a magazine, and we flip through and we identify what’s in the front of the book. What’s by freelancers? How is it different? What typically happens is that they’re all amorphous, especially airline magazines. But that’s kind of the point, is that they’re a grab bag of things.

You can very easily take a story idea that you’ve been sitting on, and that you’ve been having trouble placing, and find a home for it in a front-of-book because they are a catch-all. The way to do it is not to tell them you’re going to Peru, like Julia Cosgrove said. Or that you’ve been to Peru. It’s to tell them that you went to Peru, and while G Adventures has been partnering with these textile makers near Machu Picchu for years and they’ve done very well, there’s a new homegrown startup, which is actually not near the tourist area. It’s in all these other areas that have banded together to get their items distributed in the airport, to get themselves exposed to visitors, and here’s how they did it.

You have to approach them with a very specific idea, but also with the format. This is very clearly a business profile, and it’s got a story. Which is that one group was having success, they weren’t because of this partnership, and you’re going to tell how they managed to become successful and how they managed to get their stuff in the airport.

The front-of-book is like a secret stash of all sorts of interesting articles that editors have figured out what to do with. And, part of the way they get more of your stories published is to help the editor see why your story fits there. Which is why we are going to talk about some of these formats.

I’m going to see if I can just show you quickly on the side. If you have not already, then open up the magazine now. Like I said, this is going to be the May 2017 issue, and it’s a very, very long magazine. This PDF actually has 100 pages. If you start on just page one of the magazine, and you scroll past all the ads, which there are many, because the magazine is very successful, and the editor’s letter, then you’re going to get to the manual. This is what they call their front-of-book section.

As you can tell, it’s got a lot of stuff going on, and it’s organized by numbers. As I pull things up on the slides, then you can find them here in the numbers in the magazines, because I’ve had to take them a bit out of order from how they are in the magazines because I need to keep them in the order of the sections as we discuss them. So, let me flip back over to the slides now. But, that’s how if you have the magazine pulled up, you can follow what we’re doing. Of course, the first one that I’ve chosen doesn’t have the number on it. This is one of the very first ones in the magazine.

If you flip through, one of the very first articles that you’re going to see, it has a very beautiful picture in the background that I’ve cut off, so you can see the text. But it is very clearly a news brief. It is about an installation of an art exhibit actually, that only goes for eight weeks. So, do you know how I know it’s a news brief? Because at the end it says, “Until the 11th of June.”

This is a really, really clear indicator that something is new, and that there’s a specific date. Any time you’re looking through a magazine to see if they do have new briefs, look for a specific date, because nothing else in a magazine is going to have a date on it, because editors don’t want their publications to be dated. They want them to be things that people can continue to use. So, there’s just a couple things you’ll notice here, this is quite short. Just looking at it I would say that it’s maybe 150 words. These are the type of articles that are hard for editors to get, because people who have been writing them for awhile are not super keen to use what they already have in to an editor to just get $150 if it’s $1 per word, or if it’s $2, or whatever that pays. They would rather use the connection that they have with the editor to get longer, juicier stories.

What that means is that universally—somebody even told me that she’s not with Travel Asia anymore, but that when she was there—Amy Farley edited the front of book and she was always desperate for front-of-book pieces. And, don’t harp in on the word desperate; this is just something that I heard from somebody. But, my point is that even the very large magazines have a need for these things.

Now, the difficult thing then becomes, how do you pitch them? How do you pitch something that’s going to be going at the time that the magazine is published in advance, and get it picked up, assigned, written, and edited, photographed, and into the publication just at the moment that it’s going to come out? This is hard, right. But, a lot of the press releases that you would be able to get your hands on, the editors can also get their hands on.

The best way to do this, is to always be asking people what is coming next. Do you have something new coming soon? Like, “I know this thing is vacant. Do you know if there’s something else that’s going in here?” Or, “Is that going to be a hotel?” Or if you’re in a museum, “What exhibits do you have coming up a year from now?” So, the best way to find these news things that editors don’t know about and won’t know about is to just constantly be asking questions when you’re on the ground about the future, and to take notes on those, and to pitch them very, very specifically in terms of the lead time.

The lead-time in parts of the magazine is different. The lead-time with different magazines is different. This is something we’ve talked a lot about before in a couple of different webinars, so I don’t want to spend too much time on it. But the lead-time is the number of months in advance of when the article would appear in print that you need to be sending your pitch to the editor.

The thing is that with the front-of-book, that the lead-time tends to be less, and that’s for a couple different reasons. Features can be assigned like two years out, even for small magazines, a year out for features and sometimes even departments, is not uncommon. But front-of book things tend to be, even in very large magazines, like six months out or something. Because, they follow trends.

They don’t want those things to be too far removed from when they’re going to go to print because they want to make sure they’re relevant and that’s hard to do. So, if you have something that has a specific time peg, like you know a really great installation is going to be going, you can pitch it early. You can pitch it as soon as you know. The worst thing that an editor is going to say is, “Well, I’m not assigning that yet, but I’m going to be assigning it in this month, please contact me again then.” Great! Now you’re already on the editor’s radar.

As soon as you have done your digging, and have asked about what’s new and isolated something that’s interesting enough for the editor to care, and you’re prepared to potentially travel there, go ahead and pitch it. Like I said, the worst thing that’s going to happen is that the editor is going to give you a very specific timeline on when they will be assigning that issue. That’s news briefs and how to pitch them. Let’s move on.

Interviews. I talked quite a bit when we were on the types of articles slide about interviews and their various drawbacks and why you see fewer of them than profiles. But in large magazines, I think for the most part, you’re still going to find at least one, because people like them. Typically, like I said, they’re going to be about someone famous, but the thing is that famous is relative.

I have quite a few friends who, in their circles are rock stars, but you may have never heard of them. I have a friend who has I think five New York Times best selling books, and I think that on his last book tour Warren Buffet was on stage with him at one of his book tour stops. But, most of you would never have heard of him. So, this is really important to keep in mind. Famous is relative. Famous does not mean a household name or movie star. For some magazines it might, but not for all of them.

We had someone in Pitchapalooza who is working on an interview pitch around this guy who is a Canadian comedian, who is quite renowned there, and she was pitching it to a Canadian magazine, and she was really amazed they hadn’t done a profile on him yet. That is just the right amount of fame for that publication. That’s all you need. They need to be famous enough for the setting.

If it’s an airline magazine, you can pitch people who are famous in the destinations they fly to, but that most of the readers might not know. But, that’s the exactly the kind of thing that airline magazines would be looking for. The most important think to keep in mind when pitching interviews is that you have access. I know this is obvious, but don’t pitch an interview without getting permission to do the interview. This is a huge red flag for editors, and this is always the very first thing that they will ask you. So, never ever pitch an interview without getting permission first.

How do you do that? We’ve talked about this a couple of times in past webinars, but it really comes down to, if you want to interview somebody, and you don’t have the assignment yet, you ask them if they would be included if the article is accepted. This gets harder with bigger famous people if you don’t have a very personal connection, and that’s why it’s good to choose famous enough people.

When you pitch an interview, it’s usually pretty standard in terms of the space in the magazine that they typically allot for it, and that they’ll get back to you about what that length is. And, you can always get back to them and say, “In the past how long have people done the interview for to get the type of text you’re looking for?”

Always make sure that when you’re doing interview assignments, double check in advance, before your interview, what the recording requirements are, because some publications will automatically expect that for an interview you will not only furnish them with the recording of the interview so that they can double check the quotes, but so that they can also make a transcript of it. So, make sure that you check that with them before you get the assignment – what they will need for fact-checking your interview.

Like I said, related to interviews are the business profile and the personal profile. Let’s see if I can zoom this in and have you all see the zoom as well. This is a screenshot that I took from the feature, which is actually a roundup in the magazine that you guys have which is something like, “50 Reasons to Visit England Now.”

This is a profile about a pub. It’s really interesting, because as I was breaking down this magazine into things to use in the class today, its headlines kind of suck. Its headlines, like the internal headlines for things in roundups and stuff like that, this headline is something you would never see on a front-page headline. But they get away with it because airline magazines are designed for sort of captive readers as they call it, people who are sitting on the flight and don’t really have a ton of choice if they don’t have a device with them, besides reading this magazine.

When I first kind of glanced over this, I was like “The English Pub is Still Kicking? This must be a trend piece,” which we didn’t talk about because trend pieces tend to fall into these other categories that we’re looking at in terms of being roundups or being business profiles. This is a really good example of something that is at once a profile of a specific business while talking to a greater trend. And that greater trend is the “why.” That was the hook – that why do the readers care, why is the editor interested, that the writer who pitched this story would have used to get the assignment to write about this specific pub?

In this case, they’re talking about how obviously pubs are a huge part of English culture and English traditions, but that they’re kind of chain pubs and that it can be hard for small business owners to stay in business because rents rise and things like that, and they’re using that trend, that beginning, to talk about how this pub has pioneered a completely different model to become successful and remain alive, and that’s the end.

This is how you can take something – and I’d say this is about 250 words—and still have a beginning, middle, and an end, and also have a why, which is in this case is speaking to a larger trend in a tiny, tiny, number of words.

I had somebody ask me yesterday about writing their pitches too long. It’s really important that anytime you are pitching something that’s short, that your pitch does not exceed the number of words that your final piece would be. Just eyeballing this it’s about 250 words, so this is something that you would need to be pitching in about 100 words or maybe 150 words. Some of those words are going to be about you, and some of them are going to be about the story. The words that are about the story are going to be about half the final piece.

This is a short business profile. They can also be done much longer, but what unites both of them is that they’ve taken the why, which in this case is the trend, and they’ve then told a story about how the business is successful. Pretty much all business profiles, the story that you’re telling—and I just made air quotes—is that there was a need and this enterprising person started this business to fill it.

In pretty much every business profile, that’s the story. That’s the structure of your article, just cut and paste. Here’s the need, here’s the person, here’s how they filled the need. Beginning, middle, end.

How does that translate to a person profile? Which is the other part of this kind of triad of person profile, business profile. This is a very, very short person profile. I was trying to find a longer one, but that issue that we’re looking at has every other type of article but doesn’t have very robust person profiles unfortunately.

What I will say is that usually, the profile of a person is going to be more in line with what I was talking about in that business profile. They’re going to be talking about how there was something, perhaps there was an injustice, or perhaps there was something like the individual person had injustice, or there was community injustice, but there was some sort of problem. This person came along, and in this case, there are two, and they kind of devised this solution, and now they’re the heroes.

That’s the difference between the person and the business profile. Like I said in the business profile, the hero is the business itself. Whereas in the person profile, the person has done something and they themselves are the hero of that story. In this case, it’s a really good example of the three parts of the story, like I was telling you.

It says that the founders started an app that finds quirky trips, and you’re like “what is ‘quirky trips’?” Basically they’re looking for things for people who didn’t want to do a package trip, but they didn’t want to book the flight, and the stay, and the activities all separately. It’s like if you’re typically an independent traveler and you don’t want to do things in a package, but you don’t want to do all the research, what do you do? That was the problem. And then they put it together in just nine months, and they launched it last year. That’s the middle part. They saw this idea, they knew there was a problem, and they sat down, and they just banged it out.

In this case, the person profile and the business profile are kind of related. And this goes back to what I said about how this is kind of two sides to the same coin. You can do a business profile about a restaurant, and you can do a person profile about the chef of that restaurant. And this is really helpful, because you can take that same exact experience, that same visit, that same place that you want to cover, and do it as both.

You can do it as a person profile for one magazine, and then a business profile for another. It becomes a different article, and you can sell it twice. So, that’s one of the really great things about this triad, that interview profile, business profile, person profile, because you can also go sell that interview somewhere else. So just one awesome thing can become three different articles that can go to three different publications, and then you can do those three articles slightly different for different audiences.

Whether it’s a magazine that’s published in the UK versus here, or a magazine that’s for families versus a magazine that’s for seniors or for couples, so this is how you start to slice things: Is that you begin with the format, and then you say, “Okay, now I’ve got this topic and I can fit it in this format. How can I then translate this topic into a different format for a different magazine, and then to a different audience in the same format?”

Let’s move on to our next set of article types. This is the roundup, so I’m going to zoom back out to normal zoom here. In the roundup, I’m going to show you a couple different flavors of roundup, but I wanted to start with the really vanilla, “Ten Things Worth Getting on A Plane For.”

I have all of them here because it was a couple pages long all the different ten things. This is a roundup, which you’re going to notice, has dates. There’s May to June, August to September, and June here. This is ten things worth getting on the plane for this summer.

It’s got “go now” versus “book now” and it’s got all these other things. They’ve got culture and outdoors, they’ve got all these different slices that they’ve put on here, and the only unifying factor and the only commonality they have here is that they’re ten things worth traveling to. It’s something that only happens for a limited time, and you should get your butt off your couch and on a plane, so you can go see it. That’s really the only unifying factor here.

This is really like a top ten things, it’s really like a “Best things to do this summer” or to book now to do in the fall. But they don’t call it that. It’s very diffuse. This is the type of roundup that’s really common, but hard to pitch.

I want to point out, you’ll see here at the bottom of the page that this is by one, two, three different people. I recognize Florence, I think works for the magazine. So, this might be done entirely in-house, and there’s a reason for that. It’s because these roundups have a lot of moving parts that are always slightly related, and there are a lot of editorial decisions that need to be made about that. So those tend to be done in-house.

Another similar roundup to this that people see and say, “Oh! I could totally write that,” is like 50 weekend getaways in New York City for the summer. There is never going to be a time when New York magazine or whoever is doing that is going to have one writer write that whole thing. They’re going to have different writers that are experts in different areas write the tiny pieces of that article that they’re an expert in, and they are going to decide what pieces are included, and they are going to put that together.

Somebody wanted me to review a pitch for that the other day, and I was like, “You can’t pitch this, this just isn’t a section that you have control over what goes in there.” Also, if they would even do the same section again. If they’ve done the 50 best weekend trips from New York City, they’re not going to do that again for 15-20 years. They’re just going to keep referring people back to that article that they wrote previously.

What are the articles that you can pitch? Baskets of kittens! Love them baskets of kittens! I saw the first one, and I just died because it’s just such a basket and is full of kittens. What I mean by that is that it’s about Guns and roses, and their European tour.

What they’ve done is they’ve taken places that were important stops on the Guns and Roses tour before, and they have told you about what happened there previously, and when you can see them in that place this year. Like such a weird, weird, topic, but such a perfect example of a basket of kittens.

This is united by Guns and Roses performances that were there before, and are going to be there again. That makes it a short list, but they use it to talk about all these different destinations and encourage you to fly there, which is the purpose of the airline magazine. This is kind of short, but you can also see this roundup that is very easy to pitch because editors are not likely to think of these kinds of things.

If you don’t already start looking at every interesting thing you visit, in what are some things that are similar to this that I can put together in a basket of kittens, I encourage you to. Because these things are just gold, they’re really great and editors love them. It’s just so, so unique. And, you need to start training yourself and think, “what else goes to this, what’s the bigger trend, and why else do people care?”

The next variation of roundups, like I mentioned, is the destination guide. If you have your magazine and you want to flip to it, this is multiple pages, and this is number 12. So, let’s zoom in and have a better look at this. This is really a pure, roundup sort of destination guide. There is a tiny intro, I would say this is maybe 50 words, but it just goes all in to all different, very short, like 20-word items all around this city that it talks about.

This is the kind of destination guide that a magazine like easyJet Traveler loves, because they can make it really visual. This is not the kind of destination guide that you as a writer are envisioning when you pitch that you want to write about this thing. But it’s important to realize that when magazines publish destination guides that just talk about, like I said, relatively unrelated places to stay, restaurants, and so on and so forth, they need to make them very visual to capture the reader’s attention because it isn’t a thread, or a basket of kitten’s style commonality that unites all of them besides just the city.

They need to keep calling out interesting things visually to make sure that they drag in people and that just kind of roll over this and say, “Granada…I don’t really know if I’m interested in Granada.” They use these photos, they use all the different call outs to make people interested in the article and keep reading the magazine, even if they’re not specifically interested in Granada.

The next two types of articles are different sides of the same coin in terms of being a bit more atmospheric. I’ve heard people say they want to write these more literary stories, and I’m not quite sure that’s the word I would use to describe it as much as descriptive. A narrative feature.

This part kind of jumps out: “People thought I was from a different planet.” It’s “I,” it’s first person, it’s her story. But if you look at this feature, I believe it’s the second feature after the story about 50 ways to do something in England or 50 reasons England is hot right now. This feature is very photo heavy, very design heavy. That is really common. Features go on for 10 or 20 pages now, because there’s so many photos included. This is important to keep in mind because that’s what the editor is thinking when they see your pitch. They’re not just thinking, “Is it a good story?” they are thinking, “How does it look on the page?”

I’m going to flip over and see how this looks on the page. So, we’re going to go from the manual and we’re going to go forward to features. Now we’re in the features, and we see some things about England…and here we go. This is the feature that we were looking at in the slides. You’ll see that the text, unlike anything, is maybe a quarter of a two-page spread. I think it’s over now. Oh no, it keeps going there’s some ads in the middle. This is the most text that I’ve seen on a page in this feature so far. Okay, this one has a bit more.

But it is so about the visuals. When you are pitching a feature story to an editor, you might be thinking this is a great story and this is a great destination, and they’re thinking about the pictures.

A really great tip that I heard the other day for features like this, not just features that are design-oriented like this, but features that are in a magazine that have heavy, visual pictures, is to include pictures with your pitch. Not yours – don’t include your pictures. Because if it’s a big magazine they are going to source them from a professional, but you should include professional pictures to help the editor imagine what it’s going to look like.

The reason I said not to include yours, is that editors have a style for their visuals. They have art directors that curate this. So, even if you already went to this destination and already shot photos, and then they would want you to shoot photos there, they’re probably going to send you back to take more. It’s very unlikely, especially for a big publication like this, that they would just use out of the box photos. They would definitely have somebody.

See here, it says, “Photographs – Greg White.” I have worked with magazines where they just have photographers all over that they work with, that are kind of their stringers in those locations. Even if you have your own photos, and are pitching a magazine that is of newsstand caliber—that would be like a household name airline magazine, or a newsstand magazine, or a major regional that you could buy in the newsstand but only in a certain area—don’t send them your own photos.

But what you can do is put together like a Pinterest board, or you can pull some things from Instagram, to show them this. To show them a really stunning photograph and the visibility of the place you’re pitching, so they can imagine what it looks like on the page. And this tip, by the way, came directly from an editor of a major newsstand publication. So, it is 100% okay with major editors, and she said it was really crucial and helpful for her.

The flip side of this is the postcard. Postcards also tend to be very photo-oriented, in part because of what I said that what the postcard does is it gives you almost a slice of that big long feature. It gives you an image, even if that image is in words, but it is always going to have an image attached because magazines are so, so visual.

This is a little bit longer than some of those other things we looked at. I think that maybe this is 350-words. But what typically happens with a postcard is that you need to get across a point, and this is actually the headline that first made me realize that this magazine has not great internal headlines. This doesn’t tell me anything: “The Chiltrens just got even better for foodies.”

I looked at this, and I was like, “What is this really even about? And why is this even in here?” Chiltrens is a really posh weekend getaway spot for Londoners and easyJet Magazine is based around the easyJet airline, which currently flies a lot of places, but it really serves a lot of Londoners, so I would say that’s probably their biggest spenders. Even though this is something that you wouldn’t hop on a plane for, it’s something that is going to be of concern to their readers.

These are people who might already go to this destination for the weekend, so why do they care? They care that it just got even better for foodies, but how? And then, if you dig in a little further, you’ll see that he’s taken a village pub, a very big chef who’s very well known in the UK, has taken a village pub and actually “poshed” it off as they might say. So, this is really actually a business profile, and again, with a trend twist a little bit. But what they’ve done is they’ve put in so many details.

They talk about the type of food, they talk about the décor, and they give you this really tantalizing picture. That is kind of what elevates it from being a profile to being a moment. You can also do this with a little bit less of a focus on a single establishment, but it’s really hard because you essentially need to show an entire destination in so few words, but still in such great detail, that’s it’s typically best for the postcard to choose one establishment, one meal, one beach you were on in order to be the focal point of that postcard.

There’s a relatively short essay Don George wrote that’s in his book of essays, The Way of Wanderlust, where he’s talking about a visit to a museum, but the only part of the museum that he talks about is when he’s standing in front of one painting and all these crazy local ladies with their hats and their outfits come up and start having this conversation kind of with him and about him, and in front of him, and around him, and so he talks about the whole city in this place on the coast of France, in the French Riviera, just through this one conversation in front of one picture at a museum.

That’s what I mean about the postcard needing to focus in on one kind of business so to say, is that you need to be really granular in terms of the moment that you choose to display.

Let’s get to the two that are more teaching-oriented, so essays. This magazine I also chose just not because it’s got that big, huge, juicy front-of-book, but because it’s got a huge essay section. If you go past the features, you’re going to see all these viewpoints. It’s got tons of viewpoints on sections. It’s got viewpoints on food, viewpoints on drinks, viewpoints on business.

The one that I’ve pulled out here in particular, and I had a different one here and then I swapped it out when I saw this, is that it’s just a very illustrative example of what I talked about essays really being about the question, about taking one question and then just asking more questions, and more questions, and more questions. Here it says, “Alex Pell investigates why Nokia and Blackberry [Who knew Blackberry was even around?] are bringing back classic cell phones, and wonders if it’s finally time to let go of the past.”

You know, that makes me kind of curious. Again, like I said, is Blackberry still around? Microsoft bought Nokia, but why are they brining back classic cell phones? Why are they even still in existence? And so, he keeps asking these questions, he intercrosses them with some memories, and at the end, he winds up talking about how, at first, he mourned the death of the iPad scroll, and he’s learned to let go: “It’s the nature of the beast we call progress.”

This is really like life-lessony stuff here, right? That’s why I think that a lot of people are scared of personal essays. But I think that if it’s something you want to get into, the best that you can do is read them and practice writing them. Remember, they’re all in spec, so if you’re just spec—spec means speculation—and speculation is like when you’re a gold-panner, when you don’t actually have the lease to the land that you’re speculating on, but if you find something, then you get the profits.

In this case, spec or speculation means that you have pitched an editor and the editor says, “Well let me see the profits. Let me see the essay, and then if I like it we’ll go with it.” In this case, and like I said there’s a lot of different essay examples in there, it’s not super travel-oriented, but I chose this one because it is a good example of taking something mundane and tying it in to a much larger lesson.

Let’s go to the service piece. That front-of-book that I showed you before, that manual section, is chock full of these. As I mentioned, easyJet, this particular publication that we’re looking at, is really very “you” oriented, because that’s their audience. To say it’s millennials and “me, me, me,” is not exactly what I mean so much as that they have decided that their tone is really about what’s in it for the reader, and bring the reader in, and very oriented into what the reader can do as opposed to an armchair traveler.

This is one of the very first sections in the manual, number three, and it’s on “How to Throw an Insect Dinner Party.” I picked this one up not because I want us to throw insect dinner parties. In fact I am now at the retreat house where we’re in the country where I’m watching bugs crawl by on the outside of the window while I’m talking to you. So it’s not the most appetizing sounding thing, but I chose it because it’s a crazy idea.

I think we often think of…what did somebody want to pitch in Pitchapalooza? I think it was something about how to disconnect when traveling, like how to do a digital detox. But how many stories like that are there? Like I said, today if you want to be getting a service piece in a magazine, you have to not only include quotes, and here’s some quotes from the Nordic Food Lab, but you also have to show something that the editor can’t get in house. So, it’s not just that you can get the quotes, it’s that you have this idea. You have some connections or you have this experience that would really make you the best person to write this.

With that, that is all the different article types I wanted to lay out for you guys today.

I’ve got one question here about article topics: “Any suggestions on how to decide which of the styles would be best for an idea that you have?” My actual advice is to do all of them, and this is part of the reason I wanted to lay all of these out for you, but if you have an article idea and you’re not sure which one it would be, try to find a way to fit this idea into every single one of these, because that’s how you’re going to sell more stories.

I think that’s a good point to end on, and I thank all of you so much.

So, thanks you guys and have a great weekend! Cheers.

How to Get the Most (On the Ground) Out of Your Press Trips Transcript

Download (PDF, 253KB)

This week we’re going to be talking about how to get the most on the ground out of your press trips. Last week we discussed how to do the research before your trip to make sure that you get the most out of the ground. And so, when we looked at that, we really dug through how to pull out specific ideas from your itinerary, so we’re not going to be looking at that so much this week.

In terms of how to get the most on the ground out of your press trips, this is really going to be more a look at specifically some itineraries that I’ve pulled from a lot of you guys who are here on the call today as well as best practices. So, we’re going to walk through some fresh itineraries because I feel like I’ve used my itineraries with you guys to death from different trips that I’ve been on. So, I’ve got some from some of you and I’m actually a little worried because I have the destination branding on them and I didn’t write the destination’s permission. So, just pretend you don’t see those logos on there.

So, there’s three main things that I want to talk about today and like I said, first we’re going to talk about the more high-level best practices. And part of that is going to be, also this second point here, how to troubleshoot some of the bad situations that come up. And in order to make sure, you know like I said, that I’m not using the same examples also all of the time for that, I had some of you guys send me some very less than ideal situations that you have found yourselves in recently.

Again, if you’re just joining us, the handouts on the side. We’ve got a mix of some PDFs as well as a word document, so make sure you download those so that when we get to them, we can discuss. And it looks like there’s two itineraries. One of them is the preliminary and one is the final and so she sent us both so we can see how those change which is really instructive. So, go ahead and make sure that for those first two which are for the same trip, but are slightly different, you download both of those.

As I said, we’ve got a lot great content coming from various among you guys and people who will be listening in on the call afterwards. And what I did with the itineraries is I didn’t over look at them or over research them before myself because I wanted to come to them as you guys would, you know, getting it fresh from the person organizing that trip and figuring out what to do with it. So, when we get to walking through the itineraries, that’s what we’re going to do. We’re going to open them up, we’re going to look at them together, we’re going to pretend the PR person just sent them to us, and we’re going to figure out what we would do to make sure that we can optimize that.

I really want you to think about when you’re talking about how to get the most out of your press trips is looking for those things that you wouldn’t typically notice as well as looking for what makes that destination a place that people would go out of their way to travel to.

Part of the reason that I have really honed this over the years is that, as a lot of you guys know, I had a full-time job and I left to become and a travel writer and I really wanted to figure out how to make that sustainable so that I could pay for my own trips and I didn’t have to just go on free travel and I couldn’t make sure everywhere I was going was a place that I had chosen to be and everything that I was doing when I was there was something that I had chosen. And the six-figure travel writing roadmap really came out of that. It really came out of helping show other folks how to get their travel writing to a point where it was sustainable enough that they could be making choices about where they travel.

While today the itineraries that we’re going to be looking at tend to be for group press trips, I just want to emphasize that what we’re talking about you can do on individual trips, on individual itineraries. And yesterday I was on an individual itinerary here in Oregon South of Portland doing something similar where a lot of people come to Portland for the food or because it’s weird or whatever and I wanted to get some more research under my belt on the things that you can do outside of Portland that even in and among themselves are worth taking the trip after from wherever you live.

I’m bringing into this call today part of the fact that I was just doing this yesterday, so I might throw some examples of my own trip from yesterday in as well with the ones that we’re going to be talking about from you guys. So, before we get into — oh, how great, one of you is in Portland right now too. I’m literally going to my flight after this, unfortunately. All right, so like I said, before we get into the feedback and the itineraries and everything from you guys about your trips, I just want to talk very quickly about why it is that we would ever come home from a press trip without story material in the first place. Because if you think about it, they’ve spent this money and then they’ve spent time paying PR people to set up these itineraries, do all these things so that you can go there and get your stories.

What it is for them for you to come home without anything to work with. It just seems silly that there would be a situation in which the people who are spending the money to organize this trip would not do absolutely everything in their power to make sure that each person on that trip comes home with something. And part of that to be honest, and we’ve talked about this in the very first call about press trips and what to expect, is that a lot of the folks organizing these trips, they might have never done this before. They might be new to PR, they might be new to travel, but in some way, shape, or form, you actually know more about press trips than they do. And for sure, in many cases, you know more about how to put together a blog post or an article than they do, even if you think that you have not been doing this for very long. I guarantee you, you will know a lot more about this than many of the PR people that you will encounter, especially if they’re new to their job or if they’re in a different country where the focus on marketing destinations has only recently become something people are spending money on.

You will often find yourself in situations where it’s not that people don’t want you or don’t need you to get a story, but they simply don’t know what on earth they should be doing. And so, they are trying to do whatever they think works and it has nothing to do with what they should actually be doing. So, some of the ways that this often comes up is that there’s poor initial planning for the trip and I’m actually going to talk about this in two flavors. I’m going to talk about sponsor/attendee focus fit in a minute which is different, but poor initial planning tends to be things like on the PR side it can be an itinerary that doesn’t reflect what the actual attendees are interested in. But if you think about it, this means it’s a PR person needs to know in advance as they’re finalizing the itinerary what each of those people wants and what each of those people would write about and sometimes they don’t know to ask that. And even if they do know to ask it, they don’t know to ask it to the level that it’ll help them with their trip planning.

Sometimes it’s just a function of the person who chose the individuals for the trip, who looked at a bunch of people’s applications or what not and in their head, maybe they had one person who had done a lot of great work for them after a trip in the past or maybe they just have a concept of what their ideal blogger looks like which isn’t actually the right fit for the itinerary they’re putting together. So, there’s a lot of different ways that you can end up on a trip that from the PR perspective, is not going to be super fruitful for you. And as we looked at last week, there’s a lot of research that you can do in terms of checking out magazine markets, checking out things in the destination, digging really deeply into the back stories of the locations that you’ll be visiting on your trip.

There’s a lot of research that you can do to help maximum some of those bad PR planning situations. So sometimes when you end up on a trip and at the end you feel like you don’t have anything, it can come back to you not having done some of that other research before your own trip. But a lot of things are outside of your control like weather and one of the stories that we’re going to look at later that came from you guys is about this. It’s about what happens when you’re supposed to be in a destination that’s really predicated on having great weather and outdoor activities and that just all goes to crap and you have essentially start over being there in the worst possible situations.

This is actually something that I think I’m lucky and touch wood, not that I’m super superstitious, but I think that I’m lucky that I’ve never had a press trip where the weather was just completely the worst possible situation, but it seems to always happen on my own trips where I am paying and the PR people are not paying. That I went recently to the Netherlands and we spent five days on a Gouda farm in the, it’s actually called “Goo-rah” or something if you pronounce it correctly, but outside of the city of Gouda where the cheese comes from and I think maybe one and a half days, a trip composed of like half days here and here. It didn’t rain and it was actually quite cold as well and you don’t want to be mucking about a farm in the rain if you can help it.

These things happen and as I mentioned in the blog post and the newsletter proceeding this call today, a lot of what you can do in the worst, worst situations is just go back and do phone interviews later and we’ll talk a little bit about that. But as I mentioned, there’s some things like this misunderstanding of focus background that can be mitigated. There can be, you know, either if you thought the trip was going to be one thing and then get there and find it out it’s something else or the PR person thought that you researched a particular type of thing and it turns out that your interests are something different. There’s a lot that you can do once you get there to switch gears and that’s what we’re going to look at in a minute.

One thing that I mentioned on the first call and I wanted to throw this in there for those of you who weren’t with us for the one on what to expect during press trips is this concept of the rock star being catered to so at some point in your career if you have not already, you will find yourself on a trip where there is essentially one person who is “more important.” Like they write for a bigger outlet or they already know the PR people in the destination, but they’re just getting more of the attention. The itinerary seems to be more about what they want to do or what they want to write about it and it almost seems like you are the third, fourth, seventh wheel on someone’s individual fam.

When that happens, and this is going to be one of the only situations where I would really advise this and we’re going to talk in a bit about why not to do this later, but this is one of the only situations in which I would really advise you to politely ask if you can simply go off on your own and do other things. If it’s really clear that all of the attention and the choosing of what to do and when to leave and how quickly to go through a tour is based on one person that’s kind of like the star horse and jockey of this horse race of who’s going to get press for the destination, politely ask if it’s okay if you can just go on your own and do some other things and make it very clear that you don’t need anyone with you and you’re very happy to go do this on your own and you just want to make sure that you get your stories and they get their stories and everyone gets their stories without overburdening the PR person.

Now, one thing that I want to touch on, because I think a lot of us don’t think about it that I also mentioned a bit in the webinar in what to expect on press trips, is the sponsor/attendee fit. So, when PR people are putting these itineraries together there’s a lot of negotiation and concessions that needs to happen to make sure that this group of travel writers has somewhere to sleep and somewhere to eat every night and every meal and then along the way, different attractions that fall at the different times and there’s tour guides that are there and being paid to be there at certain times. And so, what that means is that there’s just so, so much begging and saying “Okay great. Well, if you do this, then I can do this” that goes on and what can happen, completely not because the PR person thinks that you want to do a certain thing or need to do a certain thing, is that you’ll find yourself at hotels or restaurants or even attractions that just seem like an absolute waste of your time.

It’s important to realize that sometimes the PR person hasn’t done that just because they think you’re going to like it. They’ve done it because they had a sudden hole in their schedule because the really amazing farm that they wanted you to visit recently found out that it was going to have to throw away all its cheese because it had some contamination issue and they’re all hands on deck to basically start their whole operation from scratch, so they can’t take you there. Or that they wanted to take you to a very cool venue which was supposed to be open by now and then when they put it in the trip. Originally, it was supposed to be open by now, but it just hasn’t opened. They’re still finishing construction, it’s like a hard hat zone, and they just can’t take you there.

Sometimes things like that happen and they just have to throw something in which is easy and maybe is an attraction that is like very known or very uninteresting, but just to give you guys something to do for a short time. And so, this is another situation where you can carefully, and especially if it wasn’t in the original itinerary. If it was, then you have a little bit less to stand on here, but if it wasn’t in the original itinerary and it seems incredibly uninteresting for what you’re doing. You can always ask. In that case, if the item is a late edition, if it’s okay if you do something else and I recommend inserting some ideas.

Like say you’re in Israel and there is — I’m trying to think of something that would be boring in Israel — so say you’re in Jerusalem and there’s going to be a walking tour of the Tower of David and say you have not only visited this venue on your own, but you did a piece where you talked to a bunch of archeologists and you have a ton of experience about this thing. And it wasn’t on the original itinerary or you would have mentioned it. And now you’ve just found out in the final itinerary that there’s going to be this tour and it would really be not a great use of your time and less information than you already know.

You say instead “I notice that the Yehuda Market which is the big food market, isn’t on our itinerary, but you had that in the initial description and that’s something that I really wanted to do and I have already done this piece about the Tower of David. So, would you mind if I instead go visit this other venue on my own? There’s no need for somebody to go with me while you guys go to that. So, these are the two situations when there’s clearly somebody who’s getting all the attention and they don’t really care about your story and when there’s some things that have been added to itinerary, especially if they’ve been changed last minute, that really aren’t a fit for you and especially if they’ve taken off something that you want to be doing when you should politely ask if it’s okay, if they would mind if you do something else instead.

When these situations come up, I talked about a couple different ways that you can wriggle out of them, but I want to look at some more sort of big picture, high-level ways that you can change your habits, your way of looking at things on your trips, the things that you bring with you when you go out during the day, and the scripts that you use to deal with PR people in order to mitigate these situations, and also just the little tiny situations that come up. Like, if any of you have been on a trip, I’m sure you’ve run into the thing where the PR person says that you’re going to have free time in the afternoon and you don’t. There’s just so many things like that can just come and muck up the works and we’re going to look at some specific ones that have happened to some of you in a minute, but first I want to talk about some techniques and then we’re going to, like I said, look at some unfortunate situations that have happened to some of you and how to deal with those specific things, and then go into some itineraries and look at how to maximize those.

Have you guys heard me talk before about the pocket cheat sheet? It’s something that we’ve mentioned on our blog and a couple times in some different webinars and you can find it on our blog at Dream of Travel Writing/Pocket Cheat Sheet. The idea that when you go to a destination, yes, you have certain things that you have said “When I’m here, I want to be working on this type of story for this type of magazine”, but this is a more general list of article ideas that you can just for whatever. So, I recommend that you all make your own pocket cheat sheet. Not just because I don’t want to give you one and have you all pitching the same magazines, but because the types of things that each of you are interested in every destination is going to change.

Some of you are very interested in food. Some of you are very interested in finding quirky, interesting cultural things in the places that you visit. Some of you are very interested in checking out the outdoor destinations. Some of you are more interested in the type of things that locals do versus the type of things that a family traveling to a destination could do. So, each of you is going to have your own pocket cheat sheet, but what it should be composed of is a list of say, 10 or 12 magazine sections. So, not a specific magazine, but a specific section in a magazine that has very clear structure to it about how to pitch that’s applicable to a lot of destinations.

A really easy example of this is there’s a magazine from Hoffman Media Group which does, I think it’s Southern Lady and Southern Living and they do Taste of Home and a lot of hospitality-oriented magazines for an audience in the Southeastern U.S. And this magazine from them called Tea Time has two articles that are travel-oriented and one of them is a very simple round-up of the tea houses and tea shops and tea rooms in a destination. And they include about five in each piece and they have an interview with the owners. You’ve had the tea, you talk about what the tea is like, you talk about anything seasonal that they do certain times of year, perhaps why they opened the tea shop, and in the beginning there’s an intro that kind of describes the tea situation and why you would want to take tea in this city.

This is the kind of thing where if you like tea, you might notice that there’s tea shops places, but even if you’re not a tea fanatic who sits down and checks out all of the tea rooms somewhere, you would be shocked to find how many major cities will have a certain number of places where there’s high tea or that there’s just interesting team shops. And you can usually come up with five pretty much everywhere. Even in smaller tier cities like Savannah, I was able to come up with something like this.

This is an example of the kind of thing that’s not just a straight city guide. It’s not just here’s where to sleep, where to eat, and what to do in this city, though there are a lot of those and a lot of our Friday Freebies on the Dream of Travel Writing blog we have a lot of different city guide examples. But this is the kind of thing where it’s a city guide through a certain lens that you can probably find in a lot of cities.

When you put your pocket cheat sheet together, I recommend scoping out some different magazine sections that are like that, that are very applicable, but very specific so that when you are somewhere, if the other stories that you want to work on have fallen through, as you are walking around the destination and seeing things you can say “Hey, this blog has some really cool artisans and boutiques and a restaurant that has a different menu every day.” This would be nice for a far section called One Great Block where they talk about an up and coming neighborhood somewhere that has a lot of interesting options very close together and profile each of them with about 20 to 50 words.

This is the kind of thing where when you have that in your pocket, so to say, on your phone or on your computer, as you are literally there walking around on the tours on your press trip or you’re being driven around or you’re chatting with somebody at a venue. When they mention these other random businesses that are around or when you see them, it will set off a little light for you that these are some things that you can match to the magazine sections on your cheat sheet. And this is really important and I’m going to talk more about this when we look at the itineraries, but it’s really important to keep in mind when you go somewhere that even though from the itinerary and from afar, not the magazine, but this sense.

From afar, you’ve planned ideas and articles and magazine sections that you want to look at pitching. You will always find new things when you get there and they will almost always be better than what you thought of, but there’s things that aren’t online or they’re too new to have really been visible through searching or they’ve been around for a long time and so they don’t even have a website, but they’re a fantastic suit maker in Naples that’s been passed down through the family for six generations.

There’s things like this that you won’t see them unless you keep your eye out and you won’t have a good idea of what to do with them if you don’t have some magazine sections in the back of your head that are pretty universally applicable. So, my very biggest tip is that no matter how many ideas for articles you have queued up based on your itinerary, have this general cheat sheet because it will sort of create a way to force yourself to keep your eyes open as you’re walking and driving around and talking to people in a destination.

For instance, if you are on a beer-oriented itinerary, you might have some beer-oriented article ideas that are all set. They have to feed you sometime, right? So, you’re going to be perhaps having beer tastings where you have the beer, the brewer, and the chef who’s created the food talking about how they’ve created these dishes for you. The dish is supposed to highlight the beet and so on and so forth. And so, certainly, you could go back to beer publications that you’re looking at writing about this trip for and say “Hey, I have some good pairing ideas”, blah, blah, blah. But what you can also do is then you can say “Oh cool. I hadn’t thought so much about the food angle because I didn’t know that would be a thing, but let me talk more to this chef about how he uses beer in his food and then take that to a food magazine.”

As you start to use the cheat sheet to force yourself to keep your eyes open, then your ears star to prick up more frequently for these things because you start to see and feel when there’s more. You start to feel when somebody who is telling you that they started this chocolate shop late in life after they had a consultancy helping skydivers. You’re like “Whoa. You sound very interesting. Let’s talk a little more because you sound like a profile.” And don’t tell a person they sound like a profile. I think I might’ve done it sometimes and they look at you a little quizzically, but once you start to use the cheat sheet to make yourself see ideas that aren’t already seeing, you’ll start to see more of them everywhere. So, that’s really my biggest, biggest piece of advice in terms of getting more on the ground that all of you can do no matter what situation you’re in, no matter what the trip is.

The second thing: sleep in advance. This is actually really hard and that’s why I put this on here because it seems so obvious and it’s not something that’s actually easy, even though it seems obvious. Because we probably have other writing, other work, stuff on our blog, family things that we have to get done before we go on this press trip and essentially give all of our time and attention over to somebody we’ve never met who may or may not manage it wisely. So, it’s very common for you to be working really hard and then to have a crappy flight where there’s a delay or you have to fly a redeye in economy and you’re squished in the middle of the middle between two huge guys that will not share the armrest. These things happen and so you should basically expect, no matter how beautiful the itinerary looks, that you will be run completely ragged during your trip and that getting there will probably suck, even if it looks okay. Just assume that it will suck.

Essentially, imagine before you go that you need to have such a store of sleep and patience and energy that you can really surmount anything. And the thing is if you have been on press trips, you probably have told yourself “Oh my God, next time I’m never going to do this”, but it’s really hard to just tell ourselves “Okay. Let me look at my calendar. This is the day that I’m leaving on the press trip and on this day I am going to make sure that I am in bed at 10:00 no matter what because the next day I’m going to be packing and I’m probably going to be up late and try to finish things.” So, you have to start backtracking on your itinerary to make sure that when you show up, you are able to put up with stuff, to notice things, to have the energy and the attention to notice things.

When you’re there, I talked a little bit when I was talking about noticing things. I said when you’re driving around, when you’re on a tour, but also just when you are having conversations. And this is one of those things that I’m always surprised how often I’m the only one having sidebar interviews with these fascinating people who are giving us tours. So, I get so much material by, not annoyingly though, don’t be the annoying one, but by being up close to the tour guide or whatever tour we’re on so that as we’re moving from one room of the museum to the next or if we’re on a truffle hunting demonstration. As we’re moving from where they’re giving us the initial spiel to where the dogs are going to find the truffles. As we move from point A to point B, by standing near the tour guide and walking with them I have these little micro moments either for them to just spontaneously say something that’s great for me to ask them how did they start doing this? How long has, if it’s a museum, how long has the museum had this docent program? Or how did they decide to start offering these really extensive menu of different tours? Or something like this.

By having those little micro moments, I’m able to ask questions offline because when you’re on a tour, especially on a super packed itinerary, nobody likes the person that is asking 20 questions every time the tour guide finishes their spiel and says “Any questions?” and they really mean “We’re going to move on to the next stop now.” Nobody likes that person. So, unless you have a question that everybody needs to know because it’s really confusing, I really recommend doing these little sidebars, walking somewhere with them and asking that question then because not only do you stop from the potential of being that person who’s “holding things up by asking questions even if they’re important”, but you get that information. And not to say that other people don’t get it, but you get that piece of information and you get to ask the follow-up questions.

If you ask a question on a tour or to the PR person when the whole group is together, you might be interested in something and ask about it and then they say something and you want to know more or you’re not quite sure what they said, but somebody else is hijacking the conversation and then asking follow-up questions on this. So, by doing these sidebars, this allows you to get the best information for you. To make sure that you understand everything the guide has said. To make sure that you get to ask your follow-ups. Is it unfair to the other people? No, as long as you’re not pushing somebody out to go be the one having that sidebar conversation.

I have never seen a trip where people were tripping over each other to get sidebar interviews. There always seems to be enough walking from point A to point B that people shift a little bit and you get to ask the tour guide a question now, somebody else’s later, you can ask the PR person a question now while someone else is talking to the tour guide. There’s just so many opportunities for this, but you need to maximize them because especially when for instance, have any of you guys been on a Context Travel tour? Do you know Context Travel? It’s a company that focuses on having people who are professors or art historians and things like that do their tours.

I’ve had a really mixed bag of context fours which is why I don’t super write about them or recommend them per se, but I’ve had some really excellent context tours where we had somebody who was a professor. So, she knew how to tour and touch in with what people are interested in, but super, super knowledgeable because she had been an archeologist in Greece for 20 years. In those situations, it is just a shame to miss out on any opportunity for a sidebar that you can because even if you don’t know what this person might say, by just being there and just asking them open-ended questions, they will come up with fascinating anecdotes and often, those will lead you to a whole new story idea that’s brilliant. That’s really great. That’s super easily salable that you would never have had because they wouldn’t say it in a tour.

But they just happen to mention as you guys are walking and you said like “Oh, how was your weekend?” They say “Oh, you know, I just found this new dig. It was completely random. It was in somebody’s back yard and they sold the house and the new people found it and the previous owners just hadn’t told anybody about it” and they tell you about this amazing thing. And so, often, it happens to me when I teach and when I coach, it happens to everybody who speaks in any fashion. You are presenting a narrow slice of what you know about any topic at a given time and for us as writers, we want to make sure that we get as many slices to see as many potential story options as we can from these really qualified sources.

I just have a question that I want to pop into about the cheat sheets. Somebody was asking about how to find the cheat sheet on the database. It’s not on the database, it’s on our blog on the Dream of Travel Writing site. So it’s dream of travel writing slash blog if you want to search around, or it’s dream of travel writing slash pocket slash cheat sheet. Okay, so back to the best practices.

Asking for exceptions. We covered this earlier. For any of those of you who weren’t with us by the way, make sure you download the handouts. We’re going to look at those soon. There’s three PDFs and one Word file and in terms of asking for exceptions, like I said, this is something that you want to do with extreme respect and judition, if that’s a word. But you want to do it judiciously, you don’t want to do it too often. You don’t want to be opting out of things on the trip. That’s a really horrible thing to do, okay? Like, I told you before and I’ll say them again some situations in which it’s okay to do that, but generally, if you have shown up on a trip and at some point before this moment in which you are doing an activity you were told that you were doing that activity and you have not previously discussed with the PR person or the organizing person that you aren’t going to do a certain activity and why, do not just not show up. Do not just say “I don’t feel like it” or “I don’t like this” or whatever. You need to talk about that with people in advance because then the PR person has the opportunity to see if that’s how most people feel and change the itinerary.

I was on a trip and I’m going to keep it quite vague to protect the parties involved, but I was on a trip where it was self-driving. So, we didn’t have a handler. We didn’t have a PR person with us and I have a bad back, as many of you know, and they had added last minute in the final version of the itinerary. So, we had it before we got there. They had added a whole afternoon of horseback riding and I wrote them as soon as I saw this and I said “I can’t do that”, “I’m very sorry”, “This was not in the original itinerary or else I would have told you before” and they said “Okay, great. Fine.” And then when we got to the place, I was the one who wasn’t going on this, was the only one sitting in the hotel lobby when this really sweet, really enthusiastic guy showed up to take us out for the horseback rides.

And I said “Oh, great.” I had already written to the person that I can’t do it for health reasons, but let me go find the other people for you and the other people on my trip simply stayed in their hotel room and didn’t even come out. I think maybe there was one that was a couple and they had sort of talked amongst themselves about it, but they didn’t even come tell the guy. They didn’t try to tell the PR person. This lovely guy was just sitting in the lobby for like a half hour or 40 minutes and then I went and tracked down everybody and asked what was going on and apologized to him profusely and he was really sad because he had planned a horseback ride and a picnic and he was going to tell us all about this amazing beautiful area we were in and the history.

And these people just completely missed out on it. And mostly, it was just because they didn’t feel like doing it that day. They wanted to walk around. And that just sucks because, like I said, a lot of begging has to be done to set up the different things that you’re doing on your trip. And I know that none of you are the types of people that would just stay in your room and not go out, but it’s important to remember that there might be other people who do feel like that and if there is something that genuinely isn’t a fit for the group, that you’re doing everybody a favor by helping the PR person come to realize that so that something else can be organized if possible.

In terms of asking for exceptions, like I mentioned earlier, the two times that I do recommend using judiciously this practice is if there’s a rock star person that’s getting all the attention and the itinerary’s really based around what they want. Or if something has changed really dramatically and what you initially wanted to research isn’t there and they’ve substituted it with something that you already know or that isn’t of interest with you. And you really need to, in that case, use the peg of “Well, this is something that I wanted to write about. We’re not doing it anymore. I already know this thing, I’m already familiar with it. So, why don’t I just on my own go during the time when the rest of the group is at that other venue?”

In terms of maximizing your time, we’ve started to look at a couple different ways to do this, but maximizing your break time is something that I wanted to look at. Now, actually having those breaks is something that doesn’t always happen. It’s very common to have an itinerary where they very often mystically say “Oh, we want to make sure you have two hours in the afternoon to rest.” That never happens. They never let you rest, don’t believe it, but sometimes, especially in hotel tours, you’ll have really a lot of free time. Like really a lot, as in they just give you an entire day on the property with nothing scheduled.

Now, in a perfect world where you weren’t on a trip, you would sleep a lot, maybe go to the pool, maybe get a massage, but you are there for a reason on somebody’s dime to get stories. So, what, when you do have breaks, can you do to maximize that time? I really recommend, especially if it’s a hotel property, to go talk to the staff. To talk to people of the itinerary or at the activity center to talk to the concierge and get ideas from them because just like I was saying about the archeologist giving you a tour, they might have something really cool that’s not open to the public yet that they can tell you about and maybe give you a preview of. They might able to just give you an impromptu behind the scenes tour.

If you have breaks and you can manage it, you don’t need to hop on your computer right away, I really recommend going outside of the people organizing your trip. To people in the destination that are knowledgeable. Even if you’re not staying in a hotel that has a concierge, you can try going to a super luxurious hotel down the street and just chatting up their concierge. I’ve heard a lot of people say that this — no writers, but actually hotel people — that this is totally fine as long as they’re not dealing with customers from their own hotel at that time.

Get outside of the current pool of the vice that you’re in and go to other destination experts and have them recommend to you what you should see. Get more perspectives. But then the second part is defending your break time. So, this is a little tough because itineraries are not perfect. Tours go longer than they should. There’s too many bathroom breaks getting from point A to point B. There’s a variety of reasons that your trip can run behind and these break times can be eaten into, but there’s also a subset of them that are bad reasons. That are because the tour person, the PR person, your handler, whoever did not stick to the schedule.

Don’t feel bad about reminding whoever it is that’s currently setting your time pace that you do have a schedule. Don’t all sit back because the tour guide is droning on and on forever and just think about how annoying this is and how you’re going to miss out on some other thing. Be the person who helps everybody else have a better trip as well as yourself by speaking up to the tour guide or to the PR person. And, you know, the tour guide doesn’t necessarily know. Good tour guide, when they get there, this happened to me on the trip yesterday. We showed up a very fabulous winery and I could tell that my host was changing the trip as we went along, that he had completely deviated from the itinerary.

I totally didn’t know when we were supposed to be anywhere and when we got there, she said “How much time do I have?” That was her first question. She was like “I’d love for you to do this, this, and this, but you tell me what you want to do and how much time you have.” And then I said “Okay. Well, these are things that I want to do” and she said “Okay, great” and then she put together her head like, the order in which we were going to go around her property.

That’s how a good PR person or a good tour guide will do it, but not everybody is that. Not everybody knows that. Not everybody is thinking about that. So, feel free when you get there and you introduce yourself to the tour guide so you can have those sidebar conversations, to say “Hey, thanks so much for having us. I see on the itinerary that we’re here until 1:00. What’s your schedule for us for the next half hour? What are we going to accomplish in that time?” To help get that person thinking that they only have you for that long and how they can maximize it and make sure that they haven’t shown you only half of the venue in that time.

This kind of gets into also the next point of being focused ruthless and unapologetic about it. If you are in the kind of situation where the itinerary, like I was talking about, about my trip yesterday, is super amorphous and you can see that it’s changing the PR person is cutting things right and left and not discussing it with you guys and you just show up at a venue that you didn’t realize you were going to show at, go to that handler, that PR person, that driver, whoever and say “Look. I can see that the schedule is changing right now on the ground and this doesn’t work for me because I need 100 percent to be at this, this, and this place. So, can you tell me right now if those things are not going to happen anymore? Because if so, then I need to make sure that I get myself there separately so I can visit those places.”

Be super ruthless about the things that you discussed with the PR people in advance that you needed to visit. Don’t let them just shuffle them off and leave you scrambling. And again, this is the kind of thing that you would think would be very basic, but it’s not, and we’re going to get into that in a second. So, work the PR and the sources goes back a little bit to what I was saying about the sidebar interviews, but it also means that you want to get them on your side. You can’t be ruthless if you haven’t made them like you in the first because they’re not going to do that favor for you. They’re not going to go out of their way.

I’ve spoken in previous webinars about thanking people and how I’m always shocked when we go on really packed itineraries and the people, the travel writers, don’t individually and graciously thank every guide that we have along the way and every business owner who’s welcomed us. Make sure that you do that because like I said, you might be the only one, but that person has changed their schedule. Like maybe if that museum isn’t open on Tuesday and they just opened it for you guys. They have often gone out of their way to accommodate you, but they’re definitely really curious about what’s going to happen from this visit.

Always take the time to talk to them and also to set expectations. We looked at this before about how people are increasingly asking writers to provide the photos that they took when they were there with an air of expectation that those photos will be given freely. But by making that relationship, you can help to set those expectations so that you don’t have negative consequences down the line, but you also are in a better position to ask them if you need things, like you need more information or you need them to set up an interview for you. And like I said, you might be the only one, so they’ll probably remember you.

Let’s get into some of these things that you guys have written me in about. I have included the verbatim here in case on the replay of the call, you want to pause and read the whole thing in the words of the writer, but I’m going to just highlight some bullet points here. And like I said, you can go back in the replay of the call to look at these. So, this particular trip was one which was really unfortunate that they just had crap weather and it was supposed to be outside. And I believe this was also a Spring/Summer sort of trip, so it was really — this is one that happened previously — and so, it was really surprising and unfortunate that that happened.

One thing in particular that I want to point out here is that she starts by saying that she had them book her trip, as in the flight, and that it’s made her really reconsider having PR people book her flights because they got her something that was indirect because it was supposed to be less expensive and the flight was very delayed. And she actually had to unexpectedly spend the night in her layover city. And that’s the kind of thing where when you’re traveling on somebody’s dime and you have to figure out how to shell out for a hotel room on short notice because you’re stuck somewhere can be really, really difficult to negotiate.

Anytime you’re going on a trip and someone else is booking the flights, this is a situation in which you should be ruthless because you need to emphasize to them if this thing goes wrong, I will miss an entire day of what you are bringing me for. Is that really worth it to you? And if you want, you can even check the delay statistic for those flights and things like that, but it’s definitely something to check out because it can really negatively impact your trip from that sleep perspective and attention and noticing things on the ground which is hugely important to getting the most out of your trip.

Now, this is the kind of thing where like I said, she had very bad weather, but it was supposed to be beach, biking, jet-skiing, and of course, people wanted to take photos. And you are not going to be doing that in this kind of weather. And so, she said they had to cancel outside dinner plans. Basically, a lot of the trip, they didn’t know what was going on. So, if you’re in a situation like that where because of weather or because of an emergency situation or because of construction that’s not planned for, something like that where the majority of your itinerary becomes impossible or next to impossible, hit the internet, if you haven’t already and make your own hot list of what else you would like to do. And just present them to the PR person and say “You know what, I know we can’t do all these other things and I know we probably can’t do everything on this list, but these are some things that I came up with that I would like to do since we can’t do what we were supposed to do. And I’m happy to do some of them on my own and I’m happy to figure when to do them, but I’d love to work with you to re-plan things either just for myself, or for the group.”

That’s the kind of situation where like I said, it’s not even that the itinerary has changed, but when you get there, things just aren’t feasible. But make a new one. Don’t rely on the PR person to do that because they’re probably just losing it that this has happened when they have these writers here and maybe it’s their only trip of the year. So, she was saying that one day they couldn’t do bike rides, so they shifted instead to go to a museum. And they had a tour where they skipped one part of the tour in order to focus on another one. So, a lot of these things where they traded back and forth between one thing or the other, the PR people and the tour guides were making those decisions in the moment. And if she had wanted to write about that lighthouse that they skipped on the dolphin tour, she’s going to have to say “Look PR person, I need to go to the lighthouse. If I can’t go now, can we go some other time?”

There’s a lot of sticking up for yourself and your ability to get stories that needs to happen in these situations because they have a lot of people to think about. Not just you and the attendees, but all of the stakeholders that agreed to do things that now those things aren’t happening. They’ve got to apologize to those people, see if those people can re-book, find new people, it’s just a mess. So, you have to step up in terms of taking care of your interest in a way that helps the PR people, okay?

One thing that she said and this was kind of about the original itinerary, was that it wasn’t very cohesive. They were picked up in one place and then they stayed in that place, but they did day trips other places. So, they ended up spending a lot of time in the car. And this can happen and like I said, this goes back to all these negotiations that PR people have to make. And sometimes that’s just where they can get you the hotel and there’s nothing that can be done about it. And so, I wanted to point out this is the kind of thing where it comes to when you stay in one city, but you have to go back and forth between a lot of other ones. The PR person probably knows that’s not ideal and they can’t do anything about it, but it might be that they thought it would be better for you as the writer to have a base.

You can mention this to them for next time. You can definitely mention it, but I wouldn’t necessarily ask about changing it on the trip that you’re on because that might not be within their power. So, this is one where she also had mentioned that a lot of people stayed behind/opted out of activities once they arrived or they were whining because they couldn’t get onto a particular thing that they wanted to do.

This is why like I said, it’s really important that when you’re sticking up for yourself about doing these various activities or not doing activities that you shouldn’t be doing, you make sure to always make a win-win, preferably win. Like it’s a win for the rest of the group, it’s a win for the PR person, and it’s win for you in order to not be that person that nobody wants to be on a trip with.

This next writer’s trip that I wanted to look at is the one that I mentioned in the newsletter and the blog post for today’s call where it was just a super unfortunate situation. The PR person had never planned a trip before and her father passed away before the trip happened. So, it was really just one of these worst case scenarios where if her father hadn’t died, then you could probably have helped her a little bit to make the trip better, but it was a situation where it was hard to make those kind of helpful suggestions. So, some of the issues with this trip was that the days were too packed and one person called it “drive-by journalism” because they often only had 30 minutes at a place. They had absolutely no free time over five days. Five days, every morning until every evening. They were doing way too many things in one day. She’s saying 30 minutes at attractions that typically required two to three hours.

Then one of the worst parts was that they didn’t receive the itinerary until the day before and a lot of things on that itinerary we’re even things that she wanted to do. So, imagine having — and this may have happened to some of you — but imagine having five days where you have to do a bunch of stuff that’s really stressful and really packed that’s not even interesting to you. I just want to go back to one of the slides. She said one participant left and didn’t show up again until the end because of this. That’s how useless this itinerary was.

What do you do in this situation? She says the days were really long, we had to meet up most mornings by 7:00 a.m. and didn’t wrap up until 11:00 p.m. So, it made it really difficult to digest information and get notes and everybody was really crabby. Like I had mentioned, she said that the attractions where too well-known. There wasn’t anything different or off the beaten path and she said worst of all, the organizers didn’t even know the itinerary. They didn’t know any of the restaurants before. They hadn’t visited any of the attractions. They didn’t know any of the specific details about how to get in and out of the venue or the hours.

This is the kind of situation like I said, in her case, the PR person was in a really bad situation and that can make it really difficult. But that one guy just left and came back and got some good stories. That’s kind of the extreme, right? You don’t want to be the person who just disappears for a couple days unless you’ve been really communicative about that. So, how would you deal with an itinerary like this? I think that in this case, it’s difficult to just opt out of a couple activities if you have gotten itinerary and agreed to it even if it didn’t have free time.

One of the things that you can do is perhaps try to say as you’re out during the day “Great. Do you mind if I just go for the beginning of this tour and then spend 20 minutes on the bus writing up some story ideas? Because I feel like I haven’t been able to think through the attractions we’ve been to.” You can create little pockets for yourself that don’t involve going all the way back to the hotel. You can even just say “Hey, I’m going to go to the bathroom” and secretly go sit somewhere for 20 minutes. There’s just a lot of little low-impact ways on a really crazy worst-case scenario trip like this that you can start to create space for yourself without pulling what that other guy did which is just disappearing.

The bathroom trick is a good one. Saying that you just really need a sec and where’s the cafe. Or you can say “I’d love to go in here at the beginning of this tour, but this attraction isn’t really a great fit for me, so I’m just going to work on some other story ideas while you’re there.” But don’t just stay home. Don’t not get on the bus, even in an itinerary like this because it’s one of these situations where once you get that itinerary and you don’t opt out of things the second that itinerary gets there, you have tacitly agreed to be doing this stuff.

Okay. So, let’s pop over to our other handouts really quickly. We’ve got the Sweet Home Alabama trip which is one of the PDFs and I’m going to open them all in my window and then we’re going to flip over to see my computer. So, we’ve got the Sweet Home Alabama trip as a PDF and then we’ve got the Mexico trips and as was mentioned earlier, for the Mexico trips we have two different versions of the itinerary. So, there’s one which is the final trip and one which is the original itinerary that they received.

First, I want to look at those two next to each other. So I’m just pulling up the preliminary and the final itineraries. And I’m going to switch over so that we can see my whole computer of craziness. So, now you should be seeing two different Mexico itineraries next to each other and I know they’re going to look a little small for you guys, so make sure that you also download the handouts from the handouts screen.

All right. Great, so we’ve got these two. Now, the reason I wanted to put them heads up like this side by side is you immediately start to see things that have changed. You start to see that here there’s a note “Credit card will be required upon check-in for any incidentals.” Now, here goes lots more notes. There’s “It’s best not to bring dollars for logistical transportation regions, you’ll be assigned a number along with your badge.” That immediately makes me think “How many people are on this trip? This sounds like we’re getting a little crazy.” And then you’ll see that items on Sunday have already started to change.

Originally, the transportation was 6:30. Now the transportation is 4:45. This is the kind of thing that when I get this I would immediately double check and make sure that that makes sense for me. So Carrie is saying this itinerary came from her and she’s saying that there 100 people on this trip. And so, that’s part of why everybody had a number. So, let’s jump over into Monday here. So on Monday, again, we’re looking and things have started to change. So, we’ve got 10:00, but then this one says 10:30, but soon 11:30. So, everything else seems to still be kind of moving along in the same time.

Then we’ve got class, lunch, okay, things are matching up except for this. Now, the transportation is on here, but the location is the same. So, it seems like in this case, they’ve just started to add more levels of detail, so that’s fine. Things aren’t changing super drastically and I’m not going to go through line by line on the rest of these things, but I just want you to kind see the level of checking that you should be doing to make sure that you don’t miss the boat on speaking up about something missing from your itinerary that’s really important for you.

Like Carrie said, this is a group trip with 100 people. So, this is very different than a lot of the itineraries that you might go on, but it’s not unheard of. I’m blanking on a name, but there’s a company that just organizes press trips for destinations. They’re whole thing is that they organize press trips. They have a list of writers and magazine editors and staff writers for magazines that they just invite all the time. And you’ll go on this trip and there might 20 or 30 people just in your one bus. You might even be with a bus of 50 people. So, imagine being on a press trip where every single tour you’re on, you have 50 or 20 people on your tour.

In those kind of situations, it’s not always as hard as some of these other things we’ve talked about to be going off on your own and doing your own things. But some things that I want to point out in here is you’ll notice that some of this is a conference and it has the conference schedule on here as well. So, there’s a bunch of business appointments here in the middle and then as we get to the end, now we’re back at transportation to the airport, meet in the princess lobby, things like this. So, this is an itinerary where it’s a mix of different things and this isn’t uncommon.

I’ve been on press trips where we were supposed to go to the destination and tour the destination and then put together our thoughts on the destination and discuss them, either in a discussion session or in a press briefing style thing or in a proper conference with the people there. So, it’s important to be really specific looking at your itinerary to make sure that there aren’t some other business meeting type things that you need to be doing on your itinerary.

Let’s pop over now to this other PDF that I have up. There we go, the Alabama one. And we’re going to switch so that we’re just seeing that. So, this Alabama trip is the one that we were just talking about where the weather just totally went to crap and they had to re-plan the whole thing, but this I believe, and Sky can chime in on this, this I believe is her original itinerary. So, in this itinerary, they arrive at the hotel and they have a little bit of information about each venue in here and that’s really great because it’s helping you to start to know of what to dig in on and hopefully, what kind of stuff they’re going to be doing with you when you’re there.

They say it’s a historic building. So, what I would immediately do upon seeing this is I would write them and I would say “Hey, I noticed that the hotel we’re staying at is a historic building. I don’t see on here that we specifically have a tour of the hotel. Is it possible to do a historic tour of the venue? Is there anybody that offers that? Is that something that can be added or I can just do on my own?” So, this is the kind of thing where when you see something like this, you can start to maximize, even if it’s not on the itinerary. And there might be and they might come back and say “Yeah, I need a clock. We’re going to have a little tour of the hotel before we go out to dinner” and then I would be like “Okay, well is it going to be more of a tour of the property because I don’t really write hotel reviews, but if it’s historic, then that’s something that I can use. So, is it possible to have somebody include that on the tour that we’re going to be having?

And like I said, the more of these things that you can be negotiating and discussing in advance with the PR people, the more likely it is that that will actually happen. And again, the onus is on you to be checking in with them and say “Hey, by the way, we are going to be talking about the history of the hotel on this tour, right?” But do be doing it with them in a sidebar or over email so that you’re not that person who’s constantly asking for other stuff and stats to annoy the other people on your trip.

You’ll see the next day that it starts at 1:00 p.m. and then they’ve got a lunch. They visit a garden for two hours. They go back to the hotel and theoretically have time to rest and then, they go out to dinner. So, this is the kind of day where it seems like a relatively chill itinerary and you have the whole morning empty. And I would immediately ask myself “Okay, what am I going to do that morning?” We could all work, we could all sleep, but here in Mobile, what am I going to do with this time?” And so, you can go back to the things that you’ve researched about that destination and then say “Hey PR person, I noticed that there is this Antebellum home where they have historic re-enactors who tell you the life story of this woman who lived here and this and that, and it’s not on our itinerary. I was thinking about going that morning. Is this something that you can help me plan?”

You can just go on your own and do things, but by looping in the PR person, you’re much more likely to get tours lined up and get private tours and things like that when you have these blank spaces like this in your itinerary. And Sky’s telling me that the gardens got rained out, but this is the kind of thing where when there’s a garden like this on here, it might not be something that you know about. You might not write about gardens typically, but there’s a lot of magazines that look for things like this. That look for tours of gardens, historic gardens, garden events, different things like that.

Even if you’ve come on this tour. This is the tour, like I said, that was supposed to be a bit more outdoorsy. Unfortunately, that changed because the itinerary changed, they still have the golf shores thing in there, but they do have this one main mobile that’s history. So, that might not be your beat, it might not be something that you typically write about, but seeing that this is on the itinerary can trigger you to go look up some places or to hit your pocket cheat sheet and see “Where can I place this?” If we’re going to spend two hours at this thing, what am I going to do with this? And if you only get the full itinerary the day before the trip, that can be really difficult and I apologize for that on behalf of all the PR people who won’t apologize to you for that. But the beauty of the intern, you can be at the venue and be Googling these things while you’re at the venue or while you’re over lunch before you get there or something like that.

And that’s one of the reasons, actually, that I like doing sidebar conversations on tours. But during meals, I actually tend to be trying to do as much planning for the upcoming itinerary as I can. So, resist the often very tempting urge, especially if you have a crazy itinerary, during meals to just — chill out isn’t the world, but to just kind of shoot the breeze with your other attendees. If that’s the only time that you are not on a tour, use that lunch hour to be planning what you’re going to be looking at, at the next venues that you’re going to.

I don’t want to keep you guys too long. We have one more itinerary, I’m just going to peak at some important things to note on there. And this is the Word document from Darcy, so let me see if I can get this open for you guys. This is going to be the itinerary for the Minnesota State Fair, so let’s pop over to that for a second. All right, so you should be seeing the Minnesota State Fair itinerary.

This one I wanted to make sure that we looked at this because this is a blogger trip. So, this is a bit different and I believe that she had written me or somebody else wrote me to say that they had gone on a trip which included some Instagramers and some influencers and that’s really not their thing and it really changed the tone of the tour and the way that it was to be on that tour and be doing the research. So, I wanted to make sure that we also looked quickly at a blogging specific trip because those things can be very different and the other people on the trip with you can cause different issues in terms of you getting the information that you want.

Sometimes when you’re on a trip with people who are more present-time social, as in Instagraming versus writing on their blog later, but as well as with bloggers, there’s obviously going to be a much bigger emphasis on photos. And sometimes that can really, really drag down the whole timing of what you guys are doing on the trip because the PR person might have the concept of how long it takes to visit a certain venue, but they didn’t factor in that every place you stop and places that you don’t stop, there will be an additional three minutes of people taking photos.

Like I said, I just want to look at this quickly. So this is a great itinerary in that they have a lot very different things. So, this is a great itinerary from the enticing people in the PR perspective, but it might not necessarily be a great itinerary for each person. For instance, they go from a non-profit where you’re going to have a cooking class and then they’ve got a mini golf place. Super, super different things and not necessarily stuff that’s going to be interesting to every Instagram influencer or every blogger.

This is the kind of itinerary where they’ve got breakfast starting at 7:00, 8:00 they’re on the bus. They don’t get home that day. They arrive for a nightcap — I hate when they say nightcap and dinner at 5:15 on press trip itineraries by the way because what they really mean is that dinner’s going to end up being at 7:00 and then, the nightcap you’ll get home at midnight. So, never believe them when they say this, but this is an itinerary where they are leaving at 8:00 and they are not back until probably significantly after 8:00. The next day, there’s just this very amorphous, all day, all night at the State Fair. That’s it. It says all day, all night. What do you even do with that?

This is the kind of thing where I would want to make sure to super drill out with the PR person and say “What time is the bus or the shuttle taking us to and from things that day? Are we going to be walking around the State Fair with some sort of guide? Are there particular contests at the fair that day that we want to be looking at? Will we be expected to stay together?” because herding a crowd of Instagramers at the State Fair, I can’t even imagine how difficult it would be as a unit to move around that enterprise.

This is the kind of thing that by clarifying with the PR person and then when you’re on the ground, being again, protective of what you’re doing. Like “Okay, great. I’m so glad we’re all here. These are some things I’m interested in doing. Is it okay if I go off and do those on my own?” or like “Could we stop by this booth? I would really love to see this thing.” This is the kind of situation where you need to be extra, extra protective of your focus and your interests on the trip.

Like I said, this itinerary includes a lot of very different venues, but it’s similar to the person who had the bad experience with the PR person who had her first trip right when her father had passed away. But these are very major venues. There’s the zoo, there’s mini gold arcade, there’s the sculpture garden, and then there’s the science museum. These are not necessarily of interest to people who have come to go to the Minnesota State Fair and who are interested in local good and doing a cooking class.

This is the kind of thing where you could maybe try to opt out of some of these, especially if you do it right when you get the itinerary, but otherwise, you want to take this and make the best of it. So, if you’re at the zoo, do sidebar conversations with the tour guide as you’re walking around. Cuddle up to that guy and as he’s walking around, even if you were completely uninterested in anything he’s saying, ask him more questions. Say like “You know, I write about food and I haven’t actually been on a tour of a zoo before, but I was wondering can you tell me more about how you guys interact, not just behind the scenes with the animals, but how do you choose which animals are going to be here?” And take it to the next step. Be like “How was your acquisition program? Are there animals that you’re looking at adding or rescuing? Are there any new things coming in that way?”

Take the topic of this tour, go past it. Go into what are some things that might be coming up that he hasn’t mentioned because he’s just giving you the typical behind the scenes tour. Go in more things about how the venue makes decisions and why they do things. What is special about this particular zoo? The mini golf honestly, I was going to say I can’t help you, but this can be a good opportunity to look and see if this is a trend. Is it a trend to have artists design mini golf? It actually is, I’ve been to some museums where they’ve incorporated mini golf into the museums and they have local artists who come and create mini golf courses. Each hole is designed by a different artists that are meant to echo famous pieces of art.

Even in something like Can-Can Wonderland. You can start to look for trends. Since when has mini golf and cocktails together been a thing? I think of mini golf as with families. How do they do that? How do they negotiate that? So, even if you have an itinerary like this where one whole day of it is not going to the fair which you thought you were going to do and there’s venues that are very — they’ve been there for a while, they’re very major attractions. Start to drill in, look for trend pieces. Walk around and see “Okay. They have an arcade. They have lots of pinball.” I know nothing about pinball. Are any of these machines interesting? Are they different? Do some of them look old? Is the owner really obsessed with pinball and has been collecting vintage machines for 20 years before he opened this establishment? Is this a thing?

Just start to look around and notice what is there a lot of? What seems particularly historic? What seems particularly weird? And then find somebody and ask why. And if they don’t know, find somebody else and ask why. And keep going until you figure out why that venue has that thing and now you’ve figured out what you can write about it. So, with that, that’s really my best piece of advice. If you feel like you don’t see a story, keep looking around for something that there’s a lot, that is very old, or that is very weird, and ask why it’s there until you get an answer. And that’s your interesting thing.

So, thank you guys so much for joining me and bearing with me. I’m going to go hit the Portland airport now and I’ll catch you guys next week.

How to Prepare for Your Press Trips Transcript

Download (PDF, 258KB)

Let’s get into what we’re going to talk about today: how to prepare your press trips. Last week, we spoke about what to expect on press trips, and also beforehand in terms of things to look out for to make sure you’re not blindsided for, and how to kinda make sure that you make the most of your trip. But we didn’t look at how to make the most of your trip in terms of a financial sense, in terms of how to get the most pitches. We looked more in terms of just as a person being sane. But this week we’re gonna look at how to prepare your work, yourself, your pitches, and so on for your upcoming trip.

We did a webinar in our last series on press trips, just specifically about how to get on press trips. We did a webinar that specifically on how to create a pitch portfolio to help get yourself on a trip, so in that pre-phase. And that was where you’re going based on very limited information, and you’re explaining to the person, who is filling the slots on the trip, what type of things you would pitch if accepted – which is different necessarily than going and actually putting together the pitches, and doing more due diligence to figure out if you’re doing is the right thing for the trip and will actually sell. And that’s more what we’re going to be talking about this week. So, let’s get started. And another thing that I think I might’ve mentioned when you weren’t able to hear me, is that we have been having trouble for the last few weeks – you may have noticed – with our go-to webinar not playing very nicely with PowerPoint. So, instead this week I’ll be using Adobe Acrobat. So, you’ll be seeing the little Adobe symbols up, but hopefully this will work much better. So, that’s what we’ll be doing this week in terms of the viewing area.

As usual if you don’t see something moving forward, or like you couldn’t hear me just now, definitely let me know. But I’m hoping this will be more useful for us in terms of us and what we’re trying to do with the webinar viewing. So, let’s go ahead and go to the first slide. So, you should be seeing the slides changing now. If not, please do let me know. This week what we’re going to be talking about specifically, is we’re gonna start with not necessarily recapping, but I want to start with some questions that people submitted for other webinars that were more appropriate for this trip. And I’ll ask some questions that I hear a lot from people about how to go about pitching these stories from press trips. Then I’m going to walk through a process, and also a way to kind of reorient your viewpoint on pitching stories from press trips to make sure the ideas that you have before you go on the trip, as you’re preparing for the trip, are ideas for stories that can actually sell, that actually do have homes.

Then, we’re going to talk about how to match those things to specific sections of magazines to make sure you get the right research done when you’re on the ground. And that’s what we’re going to talk about next week. So, that’s going to be a little intro, and then next week we’ll go really more in depth about how to do that research on the ground on your trip.

So, I have sometimes noticed when I’m on press trips, that there is an interesting lack of knowledge about where we are going on the trip, let alone what’s even on the itinerary. Have any of you guys been on a press trip where you felt like people don’t even know what country they’re in, or what language is spoken in that country? Or just a general lack of understanding of where they are that belies not having done any additional research before they went on the trip? I think that this might be a little more common – somebody’s got a really funny response to that – but yeah, it does happen. Yeah, some of you are chiming in that you’ve seen it. And I think that it might be a little more common, and I’m not throwing stones, but with influencer trips rather than rater trips because you’re not preparing a whole story based on the destination. You know, you’re taking photos and you’re sharing in-country exactly what’s happening as you experience it.

It’s less crucial to your promised product delivery to be doing that research, and in fact even just now in this session that I was discussing with Tourism Australia, he was saying that he doesn’t necessarily like to work with influencers for this reason: because they were somewhere else yesterday, and they’re going somewhere else tomorrow, and it’s the last of the highlight on his destination. So, if you’ve been on press trips you may have noticed this. If not, it’s something that happens. And so, not only will you set yourself apart from the other people on the trip in the eyes of the organizer, and the venues you’re visiting, and the tour guides by doing research, but it is absolutely crucial in terms of leaving your press trip being able to sell things.

I say this because even those of you who are going on blogs, I know a lot of people who came to me recently who have quite big blogs following me saying that, you know they’ve been at this for a while and they are allowed to put together a big post for their blog really isn’t there. And while they do want to keep their blog up, they also want to be selling stories because now they feel good about writing stories, and creating stories for other outlets. So, even if you are on a trip to be posting on your social profiles, or to be posting on your blog, it is very important to keep an eye as well on collecting research that can turn into stories for other outlets. So, on the one hand it’s important to do research about the other outlets that you want to pitch to. But on the other hand, if you don’t dig into the places on the itinerary, the destination itself, and find what people often refer to as angles – but I like to think of them more as story ideas – then when you’re there what happens is on the one hand, you might spend time that you could’ve spent before learning things that are new, rather than asking the deeper questions to find out things that aren’t readily available online, on the website of the venue, or other pieces of basic information.

In a way your time on the ground on the trip is being wasted because you could be getting better information than what you’re getting, but you’re only getting basic information because that’s the level that you need to understand what you’re seeing. But the second part, and the more insidious and sucky part I think, is that if you haven’t done the prep beforehand, and you’re just kind of getting it spoon fed to you, or just something that’s basic, you might leave the trip with nothing you can sell, nothing that is new, nothing that looks good in publication, and nothing will actually earn you money from this time that you invested in going on this trip.

For those of you that read the email newsletter or the blog post about today’s webinar, I was surprised to learn when I first started travel writing, that a lot of experienced travel writers recommended not traveling very often because the time spent outside of the office didn’t make sense because even if you’re featured in a glossy magazine for a dollar a word, that’s 2,000 words. And while wouldn’t we all love to have those, if you have to spend two weeks researching and writing up that trip, which you know I’m sure for a lot of you it would feel like it would take you a while to write a feature and that might be conservative. But if you spent two weeks of doing the research, doing the travel days there and back writing up the trip, that’s not gonna make sense. Two thousand dollars for two weeks of work is actually not a really great hourly rate, especially if you’re putting in quite a lot of hours.

One of the reasons that we need to make sure to do research is because even if we have one story that we know that we can get, one story is very rarely/never enough to pay for that time that we are spending physically on the ground doing the research because you may have heard me really harp everybody about hourly rates before, but this is really the only way to become a well, if not decently, paid travel writer is to make sure that what you’re earning every hour is not $5 or $10, but it’s more like $100. And if you are going to be spending even two or three days away from your desk, and say your rate isn’t $100/hour. Say it’s $50/hour, but if you’re spending two or three days away from your desk, and then you’re spending two or three days of travel time to get to and from this destination, and then you’re spending time writing up those stories, even if your hourly rate is $50/hour, two or three days of travel, you know that’s $400-500 of lost income a day. That’s $1500, and then add in travel days, you know $2500 of income that you need to replace because you weren’t working on those days that you were traveling on that trip.

We need to make sure that we’re getting more than that one coveted, glossy feature story to cover that time that we’re away, and you know to come out on top in terms of the days we’re investing to the writing and the research of these trips. So, we want to be double dipping, we want to be doing multiple stories off the same research. So, what that means is you need to be keenly aware on what to look for on the ground, so that every time you’re on a tour, you’re visiting a museum, you’re walking around you are picking up the tidbits of information you need to put together more than one story So, let’s do a couple questions that are related to what we’re gonna talk about today, that I have either received directly from some of you guys in advance on a call, or that I have heard a lot on coaching calls and in workshops.

I first wanted to do a couple quick recap questions on applying because I know we did the series of webinars on applying for press trips quite a few months back. And so, some of you may have not been around for those, some of you may have missed them, and I just wanted to catch up on a couple things. So, how do you handle applying for a trip when you don’t have a confirmed assignment? This goes back to that pitch portfolio concept I talked about. If you want to apply for a trip, and you don’t have a confirmed assignment and they say, “Well, where are you gonna put the stories from this thing?” What you do is you get the itinerary – make sure you have an itinerary – or the description of the trip you received from the PR person, as much as you can get, and you look at what stories you could be pitching.

Then you look at what markets, what magazines, what websites you could be placing those stories into, and in order to get on the trip it’s important to be conservative on those pitches, right? Like you don’t want to say, “Well, you guys have a unique lodge, and I know that National Geographic Traveler has a section on unique lodges. So, this is one of the stories that I’m telling you that I’m planning to pitch or place after the trip. You want to you know, line up with magazines/websites that are relatively comfortable pitching targets for you, and that’s gonna be different for all of us, so that you’re not overselling yourself and getting in trouble with the PR person later. But what we’re gonna talk about today is where you don’t need to be conservative. Where you’re thinking about what you can pitch and researching it, so that you have that material to put together after your trip. And here you should be pitching things that are comfortable, things that are a little out of your range, and things that are very much out of your range in order to make sure, like I said, that you get the most money, the most income – oh dear! – out of the days that you are spending on this trip. Okay. Let’s see if we can get back to the slide that we were on. Okay great.

Another pitch pre-acceptance related question that I got was: “Should you apply for or accept…” Oh sorry, I cut and pasted that from the question. It looks like a typo from the email. “…or accept a press trip even if you don’t have a story lined up?” And this particular question came from somebody who is a regular contributor to a very big name publication, which is distributed nationally but it’s like a major local newspaper. So, in this case she is used to having stories where she knows where she’s gonna place the story. And she was asking as somebody who is a regular contributor, if it’s ethical, if it really makes sense to accept a trip if you don’t know where you’re gonna place it. And I know that this situation is the reverse of the one a lot of you find yourself in, which is that you don’t have a regular outlet that you contribute to, and instead you are working on placing stories around that trip.

I just wanted to put that context in as I answered this question. So, in this case, as somebody who’s a regular contributor – this is a situation I’ve been in a lot – is that for the last two or three years I had quite a few magazines that I wrote for regularly. I had my beat, so to say, the areas I covered frequently, and I would often go there not necessarily having a specific assignment for that area lined up but knowing that I could probably place it, if not with one of my regular magazines but somewhere else down the line. And again, this is a situation where I had regular things and so even if I didn’t have an assignment right now, I could probably work that trip into another story later. So, if that’s your situation I think you should have a degree of confidence in yourself that if somebody, somewhere is currently paying you for work that you do have the ability to place other trips that you’re going on.

Like I said you…we’ll go back to the previous slide…if you don’t have a confirmed assignment, but you’re willing to bust your butt and get one, that’s one situation and you should definitely go ahead and apply for that trip. But make sure that you have made that contract, that covenant that you are gonna pitch that trip, okay? But if you do regularly write for an outlet and this isn’t a fit for them right now, or you don’t have an assignment for it right now, or it’s just not a fit for them period, have the confidence in yourself that you can find another home for it.

Now that ties directly into another question. I’m just gonna skip ahead for a second, and this is from that same person. What if you go on a trip expecting to pitch post trip and none of your pitches are accepted? And this is really important because I think a lot of us get down when we don’t hear back, especially if we don’t hear back. But even if we do hear back, and you’ve heard me say over and over again that a “no” is good and you should come back with another story idea. Either way if you’re not getting accepted because you’re getting radio silence or because you’re not getting acceptances, but you’re at least getting emails back from the editor and they’re encouraging those – it’s still a no, and that can still wear down on you over time. But I want to say in response to this question, and to that general sentiment: you need to keep pitching, and you need to have that contract with yourself that this story will find a home.

If I’ve pitched enough and it’s not finding a home, I will change the idea. I will change the tactic. I will change my audience. I will keep changing it until this destination, this story, finds a home; and in that vein I had done a Monday mail bag with somebody a few weeks back who was looking at pitching more literary essays, and wondering about outlets for that. He told me he had a story he had been pitching around, I wanna say it was two years. I don’t know, it was a while, and I don’t have that number off the top of my head. But he just told me he found a home for it on a great, really prestigious website. And I’m sure you’ve heard a thousand times things about Mark Twain getting 57 rejection letters, and J.K. Rowling who was kind of on her last hope when she got her book published – all of those types of things.

Just because you haven’t gotten a yes yet doesn’t mean you’re not going to get one, but it does mean that you need to take a moment and step back and look at what is going wrong with your pitch. Are you sending it to the wrong magazines? Is it not targeting a specific section? Do you not have a clear idea? Is the story kind of unpublishable, and you’re essentially asking the editor to help you work it into a story? So, if you have gone on a trip – so this is kind of moving forward – but it’s important to know in advance. If you’re gonna go on a trip and you don’t have a confirmed assignment you can place a story, but you do need to work at it. You do need to have the mindset that you will pitch until that story is accepted. Okay.

Let’s go back to this question, which is from somebody else. Is it safe for you to pre-pitch stories about a destination that you’ve never visited, based on what a PR person says? I love this question because in my opinion, it’s very scary to have no guarantee that the thing that I might be pitching based on the itinerary is interesting. And I think this is a little bit of an evolved – or not exactly a first-world problem – but it’s not something that hits you until you’ve gotten burned by going on a trip, or something on the itinerary just looked awesome when in reality it was next to a parking lot that was overgrown with weeds, and had a gross chain fence around it. And on the other side was supposed to be the waterfront, but it’s not a waterfront in the modern “we’ve redone the waterfront way.” It’s a waterfront in the kind of way you know, concrete barrier and some trash thrown on the rocks way, and there’s no walkway there to kind of make it something that you could do. And it’s 10 minutes away from downtown, and there’s no way to get there by public transit, and it just wasn’t gonna be something that interesting.

I’ve had these things happen. I’m sure some of you will have these things happen, if they haven’t happened to you already. But a PR persons job is to make something sound attractive, and there’s times when you know, they do their job so well that they really only told you 2% of what’s going on with that thing, and the rest of it is just not that interesting and you really don’t think you can sell it. And this is the situation that I never want, or would want any of you to be in about something that you have already pitched – something that has already been assigned, and you’re now on the hook to deliver. So, I really recommend and even if you’re experienced you can still get caught with this. You know, like I said PR people can do wonders, good PR people can do wonders.

I really recommend if you don’t know the destination, if you have no ability to get pictures, trip advisor reviews, any other validation that the thing is as fantastic as you are now selling it to the editor you’re pitching as, wait until after you have been to pitch. And in fact, I typically like to wait to pitch most things until after I travel for this reason. I typically pitch things in advance, only when they’re just so clear like it’s a round up, and all the venues exist, and of course the round up can happen. And even then, sometimes one or two things close or won’t be around next season, but you can swap something else in because you still have 3-4. So, those are typically the only times when I will with confidence pre-pitch a story. If you have a relationship with an editor, and they’re kind of saying, “Oh, like okay yeah, go to this place and write a story for us,” that’s different because it’s not a specific story that you’re on the hook for because you can find a story based on what’s there. So, that’s my quick two cents about pre-pitching stories before you actually go on the trip.

As we get into talking more about what kind of stories you can pitch, whether you pitch them before or after the trip depends on you, it depends on the description, it depends on what you’re pitching. So, all the things that we’re going to talk about now are things that you could be pitching before the trip or after, but you want to be doing that research and doing that thinking before you go, so that you can pick up the information, do the research on the ground to be able to write the pitch when you get back, if you haven’t pitched in advance. Okay, so let’s see if we can get the slide to go forward. Yay!

Let’s talk about how to reframe your research to make sure you have solid pitch ideas. So, what research are you doing before you go on a trip? Whether it’s a trip that you’ve accepted, or it’s a trip that you’re kind of planning for yourself. There’s no shame, no judgment here. I just kind of want to see what you guys are already doing, so that I can incorporate that into what I’m gonna say. I wouldn’t say I’m famous for not doing research, because I do do research before I actually go outside, but when I’m traveling by myself and not in an organized press trip — especially if I have a lot of other stuff going on at the time, I might not know what I’m doing before I get there apart from having chose the venues, the destinations for specific reasons. But then I’ll spend like an hour and a half in bed making you know, a whole list of all the things I want to do and why and reading every single article, and everything that’s been written about the destination.

I think one of the things, and I’m seeing some of you guys drop this in on the questions area on the side, is what’s new? And I’m so glad to hear that, because what’s new in an area is a really tricky subject. And as I was thinking about what we were gonna talk about in today’s webinar, I was thinking about this kind of catch 22 of what’s new…Oh my gosh Donna I love you. So, Donna has just said she prints out info maps/sidenotes, and the average is about 20 pages. Before I even did this job, I used to make elaborate packets like that about places and everything like that, so I love that if you have the time and the wherewithal to make your own little dossier about a destination I highly recommend it. But in terms of what’s new, this is a difficult situation because what’s new might not be interesting enough to print. It might not actually be new enough, and it might be something that’s already been covered in the places that would cover it because just as you’re finding out that it’s new, the people who cover that area regularly have also used those methods and found out in that way.

I think that this is something that we need to be particularly careful about when we are thinking about what we are going to pitch, and what we’re going to research when we’re on the ground because it can be very, you know, alluring to walk around a “new museum,” or a new museum exhibit is a more dangerous one, and take lots of notes, get lots of information, and then have trouble pitching it because the museum opened like five months ago, and everyone who’s gonna “cover” the opening has already done so. Or the exhibit may have opened when you were there, but it’s only open for a couple months and so print just couldn’t do it. The timeline isn’t there. So, I think that we have to be very careful when we’re talking about what’s new.

Let’s get into talking more specifically about ways to reframe your mindset as you’re thinking pitches. And as we do that, I’m going to give you some pieces of advice, you know like rather than imagine this, let’s imagine that. And that involves some different types of articles. So, I want to go over some different article types, and these are really the major types articles in terms of format. So, first I just wanted to make sure we’re all on the same page in terms of concepts and words.

Take a little look over this, and I’m just gonna go quickly through what each of these mean. So, a news brief is the type of thing you would write about without actually traveling to the destination typically, because that is something you would write based on a phone interview, or based on a press release. And these are the kind of things that would appear in the very, very front of the magazine where the very short sections are kept. And a lot of the smaller magazines in terms of distribution – these shorter articles in the front will all be written in-house, but with larger magazines like a Conde, and Master Travel & Leisure, or even a lot of the larger regional magazines – like I know we recently put the Indianapolis Monthly, and what was the other one? I know that we have Chicago, we have Portland, we have a lot of regional magazines. And in the regional magazines as well, those news briefs are often written by freelancers.

Now, interviews, I think we’re all pretty familiar with interviews, but I’ve separated interviews out from profiles because an interview in this case, I’m talking about something that’s a more published Q&A style piece. Where as a profile is something that would be more akin to the editorial equivalent of a case study. So, you have interviewed somebody. So, you have gathered information by talking about them, by talking about some people related to them, by talking to other businesses, or other people who have knowledge of them, and getting opinions. Then you can put all of that together into an article about that business, or about that person.

Then a round up can happen in a couple different ways. So, I talk a lot about baskets of kittens, and if you haven’t heard me use that term it’s where you have one thing that’s great, like a kitten that’s adorable on its own. But then, you take five or seven, however many kittens, who are all slightly different. They all look a little different. They all act a little different. So, for a round up they might be things that are you know, all restaurants that are doing molecular gastronomy in one city, in one state, in one country, or in one world. And that is you basket of kittens, which is even cuter than one on its own, and how can an editor resist that?

Your basket of kittens can be, like I said, a lot of things that are related in one way but not related in others. But a round up might also be a destination guide. It might be a round up of things to do in the destination that are different. So, it might be a round up that includes where to stay, what to do, where to eat, where to walk, what to see, best festivals. So, round ups can take these two different forms. Then, we’ve got features. Okay? But I’ve only got narrative features on here because all of these other things up here: the interview, the business profile, the person profile, the round up – those can also take the forms of features in terms of length. So, right here we’re really just talking about format.

A narrative feature is the kind of thing that you should hopefully not be pitching before your trip, and even if you do pitch it – this is important to know – if you do try to pitch a narrative feature before your trip to an editor you haven’t worked with before, you’re not incredibly likely to get a positive response. And I just want to get that out there because I know a lot of you are perhaps interested in narrative features, and people in the pitch blues have been talking about this a lot, but I want to try to make sure we’re clear that if you have not been and you have not worked with the editor, you should avoid pitching a narrative feature, and do it after. If you’ve been, go ahead and pitch. If you know the editor, go ahead and pitch. But make sure you have one of those boxes checked before you’re pitching that feature. So, a postcard is kind of like a narrative feature, well it’s shorter.

For a narrative feature it’s important to have a transformation, a story line, and characters. A postcard is something that might be narrative and evocative, but it’s shorter and it doesn’t necessarily have to have that nice, bookended, packaged story arc to it. A personal essay, on the other hand, is gonna be something where you take a question. Essays are designed to be exploring questions. So, I think I had mentioned on last week’s call when I was in the Netherlands, the idea of how Dutch people leave the curtains on their windows open, or they don’t have curtains in the first place. And you can just walk right by as they’re having dinner and look in and see what they’re eating, or see on their laptop what they’re working on. Why is that? So that’s the kind of thing that would be an essay question. And then a service or “how to” piece is when you’re talking about something in the second person. So, the object or the main focus of the article is gonna be the reader and how they can have an experience.

Now that we’ve kind of solidified those couple things, I’m gonna talk about a couple switches for idea types that you might have looking at an itinerary, and other things to consider. But I’m hoping as I put this idea in article format here for you, that this can also help for you to see that some of the things, besides the three examples that I’m gonna give, some of these things you might thing about pitching from a trip, are gonna have a hard time finding a home because they just don’t fit into the types of article formats that editors are typically looking to publish. Even if it’s the type of thing you’re looking to put on your blog, it’ll be difficult to find a home in an editorial outlet – whether that’s on an editorial website, or an editorial publication.

Here are a couple switches that I often see. And some of these come from some ideas that we’ve been workshopping in the recent palooza, and some are from coaching calls, ones that I see all the time when we do workshops. So, just one venue – so, people are talking a lot about looking for things that are new, and this is one of the things where if something is new it still might not be enough to just write about that venue. And this is the kind of thing where like yeah, maybe it’s been open for a little while. I’m not talking about that. This is the kind of thing where just that one venue on its own, it’s a restaurant that’s new, or it’s a hotel that’s new. So what? There’s already 1,000 hotels, and 20,000 restaurants. Those numbers are totally made up, don’t quote me on that. So what if one more restaurant is open? Even if it’s from a celebrity chef, why do we care? So, you can say, “Okay, why do we have care?” And you can say, “Well, okay. I have to come up with the ‘why.’” But the thing is that, that’s just a hard sell for an editor – just one restaurant. Okay? And so, it’s much better where if you can take that one venue, and you can add some more venues, you can tell a bigger story. You can turn it into a basket of kittens. Just because that one kitten is cute, it might not sell.

This is the kind of thing where I was workshopping with somebody who lives in Dubai, and we were talking about this neighborhood. And we were talking about why she wants to visit that neighborhood, in order for us to figure out what kind of stories we could pitch, what kind of outlets we could match that to, and what she could really do with it. She just kind of had this sense that this neighborhood was up and coming, and there was something there. And so I asked her like, “Okay. Give me some facts and statistics. What is up and coming about this neighborhood?” And she told me about this restaurant was open, and how the restaurant was founded by somebody who had pop-up restaurants all over the city, and then finally opened this restaurant. And while that’s normal in most parts of the world, for Dubai or actually it was Agwodabe, that was really rare. Pop-up restaurants really aren’t a thing there, and so this was very special. And so I said, “Okay.”

That description now that she’s told me, tells me so much. It tells me the type of audience this needs to be going to, but also yes, it tells me why this venue is interesting, but it also gives me an idea of how we can turn this into a bigger story. So, we need to do a round up and show not just that restaurant, which is interesting, but that that neighborhood is interesting, is to show other things that haven’t been done anywhere else in Agwodabe that are being done in this neighborhood for the first time. So, we came up with a gallery that was similar. We came up with a shop, we came up with a couple other things.

If you have just one venue, you need to do two things with it. You need to tie it into the trend. And when I say trend, I don’t mean like a fashion trend. I don’t mean, you know, like sea buck thorn, or foam on your desserts. Those two are appearing on every menu together in like every country that I’ve been going to recently, which is a Nordic thing if you don’t know. That’s why it’s appearing everywhere. But the thing is that you need to take multiple things that are related, yes, but then you need to explain why it matters. That’s what I mean about trend. So, for instance, it’s important that these things, which are happening everywhere else in the world but haven’t happened in Abu Dhabi, are starting to happen there, and why that’s happening, and why it shows Abu Dhabi opening up culturally to western influences, and different things like that.

It’s not just that we’re taking this one venue, and then finding a couple other things that are like it. You can’t just stop there. You have to find some of the things that are like it that tell a greater story, that have some impact, and have some lesson to take away. Shelly says, “Find the pattern.” Totally true, and I love it. I’m trying to think of another good example. So, the opening party of this convention I’m here for, this tourism convention, was at a restaurant on the water. Montreal is a waterside city, not the biggest thing, but at a restaurant that was serving new Canadian-small plate fusion, and I was kind of like, “Okay.” Is that really interesting? Is that really a thing?

Then I was like, “What does new Canadian mean?” And then I looked at the menu, and I was trying to figure out, and I realized that, you know, Canada I think in some ways, perhaps more so today than the U.S. is really made up of so many different immigrants from all over, but also from specific places. And if you go to Toronto or here in Montreal, you know, there’s like Chinatown, and Indiatown. You know, but then there’s different African foods. I went to a restaurant that’s like a Mauritanian – I think I’m saying that right – yeah, it’s from Mauritania in Africa.

There’s a lot of global cuisine that’s now shaped Canadian culture, which is now being mixed with the local ingredients in the same way that Nordic cuisine celebrates sea buck thorn, and things like that. And so, that gave me the idea of like okay, who is really doing new Canadian cuisine, and trying to define that as something on the global scale. So, that would be how you could take one thing, which is a restaurant for instance, and then say, “What can we add to this to make this a round up that’s interesting that I can sell somewhere?” You know, and now that has become something that I’m not just writing about one restaurant, and particularly if it’s a restaurant that’s been open for a little while, but I can go to American Way (the magazine of American Airlines) and they have a part of the front of their book. It’s extensively called simply the “Dining Section” I believe, but they actually are looking to highlight a specific city, and a trend that is happening in that city and why it’s going on the food map. So, now I’ve gone from one restaurant that they want us to write about, and I’m not sure why to how I can actually turn that into a story.

What do we do though with a single venue story on something that’s not new? As I mentioned this can be really dangerous because the PR people who are pitching you on this trip, or the PR person from the venue, they’re gonna hand you this packet when you walk in and it’s gonna have all their press releases, and it might have story ideas. Typically I look at the story ideas, and I think these are great ideas to write blog posts on your own blog, but they are not something somebody else is gonna write about. And good PR people will actually give you do this work that I’m doing right now for you, but the majority won’t. And they’ll just give you things that they should be writing about internally, or who are already visiting them. But they aren’t things for people who aren’t visiting them to start. So, this is what we want to look at: how do we look at something and find that point of inertia for the “not yet” visitor, and surpass that with something interesting enough to make them say, “Hey, I have to go there.”

For example, case in point: the Tourism Australia presentation that I was just talking about. He said that even though they have huge social shares, they’re like this award-winning market and everything, he said what they struggle with is overcoming that thing of “I want to go to Australia someday, and that’s an expensive flight, and I don’t have the budget for that right,” to “this has to be the next place that I go to. I need to figure out how to get there.” And you need to think about that with everything you’re pitching. So, if something isn’t new and we can’t simply tie it into a trend, whether it’s like a trend trend, or it’s just something you know we’re pulling together, how do we write about that? How do we do justice to our press trip itinerary and get a story out of that? And the way to do that is to figure out what is unique about that venue or its owner.

Not necessarily what is unique about it like I said, it serves new Canadian cuisine, okay? But you want to dig in and say, “Okay, why is it serving new Canadian cuisine? How did this person come up with it? Does this chef have an interesting backstory? That they have been all over the world, or better yet that they have cooked in the kitchens in, you know, absolute Northern Canada, in research stations, and in wildlife parks, and had to learn what local people cooked in those places previously, and how to make do with the ingredients he had, while bringing in his cooking experience from his school in France, and Italy, and all those other places.” That’s a story about why this person has opened this business in the first place.

I went to a museum in this very random part of Massachusetts on this trip a few years ago, and I was really intrigued because I had gone to school in Western Massachusetts, in Boston for several years. And I couldn’t – it just blew my mind that there was an entire, beautiful, hypermodern museum dedicated to Russian iconography in this kind of no-name town, in the kind of belt, former factory area of Massachusetts. And it turned out that this guy was kind of an industry magnet. He owned some of these factories back in the day, and had made money for doing that. And his passion was Russian iconography, these paintings – some of which are large. They’re often on wood. You see them in Eastern Europe, in churches and often museums dedicated them as well.

They’re painted by hand, and they have this gothic look to them, and the tiny ones are painted with brushes that are only a single hair wide to get the detail on the tiny, tiny icons. And he was fascinated with these and started collecting them, you know, as a wealthy individual collects art, and at some point his wife said to him, “You have to stop, or you have to open a museum because these can’t stay in my house.” And he was like, “Okay fine. I’ll open a museum.” So, he put together this amazing museum and it acquires these collections of icons, you know, that are 20 or 30 icons in a cycle that these museums wouldn’t be able to acquire because they just don’t have the resources to have that much Russian iconography in their collection. So, here’s this place, which you know it’s like to just write a story about the museum and its offerings and the icons, might be a little esoteric for a lot of publications, who would be like, “Well, I don’t know if my readers would be all that interested in Russians icons.” But the story, the story about the guy and his passions, and how that grew into this thing, and what it says for the community – that is something you can do in a lot of places because it’s universally applicable. And that’s the kind of thing you can do for a story for an airline magazine as a feature, because airline magazines are often looking for this business angle because a lot of their frequent flyers are business owners, or business people. Another sort of mistake trap that I see a lot of people looking for their press trip pitches to fall into, is this one of, “Well, I’m just gonna write a whole story about my trip. Like, I’m gonna write one story for everything I did on my trip,” and they’re not necessarily setting out to do it in an “I did this, I did that way.” They are setting out to write an interesting story, but they want to tell every single thing they did in that trip in a one person story.

The problem is there’s not a home for that except on your blog, and other low paying, if they pay, websites that publish that same sort of thing, and they don’t pay, or they pay very little because they’re essentially just trying to just fill their pages as much as possible with whatever stories people will give them. It’s not a good clip for you to have, and that’s really kind of the last resort that we want to have. We want to keep that as an “in case we can’t publish this anywhere else, and we’ve tried our absolute hardest, and we’ve asked Gabby to critique or query letters, and we still can’t figure out why this isn’t getting published” place to place your stories. We don’t want that to be our aim for where we put every single piece of information for our trip because once you publish something, whether it’s on your blog or another person’s blog, or whatever, once you’ve covered those things from your trip as far as a print outlet is concerned it’s published, and they don’t want it anymore. So, you need to start with the heavy hitters of the most interesting stories when you go on your trip, so that you don’t ruin your opportunity to get those things placed later.

The way to take this narrative piece, or this full trip story and make it publishable and pitchable, is to do one of two things: you can either take all the different of the things you did, and turn it into a itinerary piece.

Airline magazines are often good for these. But, they do have them in other places. Sunset, for instance has one that’s called “A Perfect Day,” and because Sunset is a regional magazine that has different issues in different geographical areas, they need something like three or four “Perfect Days” for every issue, for the different issues that come out in different geographical areas. So, if you are trying to, or struggling to come up with a different feature idea an itinerary piece is a great way to go because then what you can do is: say for West Jet, you do Montreal four ways, and you do Montreal as a music lover, as an art lover – Montreal has an amazing art scene if you didn’t know – as a food lover, and as an outdoor lover. You can still do a 48 hours in Montreal piece for the telegraph, or for somebody else. So, that’s a good way to keep so even though you have done a piece on you know, here’s essentially like an itinerary for Montreal, you can do it for a different audience with a different rights distribution, still as well because it’s not a 3,000 word piece that really kind of exhausts everything you can possibly write about.

The other way to do it is as a transformation tale. And what I mean here is actually a narrative feature, but I put transformation tale in here because I want you guys to remember that any feature story of a narrative capacity that you’re pitching, really needs to have, not just a point or an angle, but an arc. That’s difficult to kind of get your head around if you don’t have a fiction, or other, writing background. So, I think of it as transformation: something needs to have changed and the protagonist (which, if it’s a first person story, is you) is the arc. So, you start out into Australia, not knowing that the food is interesting, thinking that it’s just gonna be like British food, that it’s gonna be relatively bland, and then finding out that they have avocado farms that you can visit and have avocado toast that’s fresh, that’s just been picked off the tree. And it makes you realize you never knew what an avocado tasted like. And you may have said that in before, and now you’re gonna do kind of, at some point in your story you’re gonna jump back in time to the first time you had a farm-fresh tomato on the farm. And you’re gonna talk about how that changed your perception of a tomato salad. And then you jump back, and you talk about how the avocado farm works, and then how in Australia they have these different tropical products that we don’t even think of that you can get as farmers, and how that’s changed Australian cuisine as the farmer table has become more prevalent, and so forth. And so, that is your story of transformation, and so it’s not just “I went to Australia, and ate all these things.” It’s “I went to Australia, and realized this, and this is how it changed what I thought before the trip.” So, these are three main types of, “I think I can pitch this after my press trip” stories that just don’t work, and how to change them.

The second roadblock I see in people are putting together the story that they’re gonna pitch for their press trip, that I want to make sure they clear off is audience. This is a huge one, and it’s one of the things that every time I do a conference talk, about pretty much any topic, I really, really drill down on because one of the things that really holds us back – whether we are we are pitching to get travel content marketing, or local tour companies, or we’re pitching magazines, or we’re just working on our own blog – what holds us back from an fast, easy and quick success is not having a 100% clear idea of who we are writing for, and so you know, there’s a lot.

We have a whole number of lessons on this in Pitchapalooza, but we talk about what an editor’s day is like; what an editor needs from you, why editors even bother to work with freelancers if so many of their pitches are off base, why do they bother? And it’s because they need ideas that they, sitting in their little cubicle office in New York, and never leaving concrete island, would never have. They would never come across this information. That is why they need you. So, in that case it is very important to highlight to that editor that you are bringing them something that they can’t get their hands on, that you are trying to write it and that you really do know it well. So, in the case of what stories we’re gonna pitch from a trip, the place where people typically go wrong is not actually considering who goes to this destination. This is something that I see when people are like, “Oh, well I want to pitch, you know, this story based on this trip.” And I say, “To who?” And they don’t know. And it’s not necessarily that they don’t know, but it’s that they’re pitching to an audience that’s not themselves, that’s not the way that they travel, and they haven’t really thought about how that person travels So, for instance when I do travels with tourism boards, as you may have heard on the recent calls, I start by saying, you know, “What kind of people come to your destination? Who is your destination best for? Or what’s the best way for someone to take advantage of your destination?” Because that helps me to understand who their target audience is, even if they’re not clear on it.

By knowing from them who shows up, even if they’re actually trying to market to somebody else, it allows me to see who that’s a fit for, because you know, you can market to your heart’s content to one type of traveler. You know you can market to the young millennial, but if you’ve got a lot of multi-generational families showing up, that’s who your pitches should be going to because that’s the type of travel the reader, the editor is going to know lines up with your pitch, because they know it lines up with your readers. So, what that means is we need to find some ways to figure out: what is the audience? It’s not for specific ideas, it’s because we’re not there yet, we’re ahead of ideas, we’re before ideas right now. We need to figure out what is the audience for the destination.

The very first-pass on an itinerary that I like to do before putting the other pitches is to figure this out, to figure out the audience. And here are some specific questions to do it. So, the very first one, and I love to know. Do you guys look up what’s already been written about a destination that you’re visiting on a press trip before you go there? This is something that I think I started doing kind of by accident, but it’s incredibly important. And not just for this audience research reason that I was telling you about, but in order to know what’s already been covered, what’s done so-to-say, and then find the holes and see what hasn’t been done so you know what you actually can be pitching. So, if you’re not doing a Google, and not just a general Google, but a Google you know, to see what’s been written about, and the types of publications and the geographic areas you’re thinking about pitching to, definitely start thinking about that. And then what are the area’s demographics, right?

I talked about how you can ask the tourism professionals, the tourism boards in that area to see what information they have, and sometimes they’ll tell you. And like I said, sometimes they’re gonna tell you who they’re targeting, who they want to be having showing up, not necessarily who’s actually showing up because that’s their goal. It’s their goal to be getting the types of people that they want. But if you go, pretty every tourism board, there’s a few that aren’t that are actually destination management organizations which are companies, but the majority of convention and visitors bureaus, or tourism boards, are governmental or non-profit in some way, shape, or form. And so, they have to be putting out reports every year with information on who’s coming, how money is being spent.

By the way, if you want to get in trouble with Travel Content Marketing, looking at these reports is fantastic because you can see exactly, for free, you know it’s just out there waiting to be found, what money these tourism boards are spending on marketing, and what types of marketing. It has to go on their annual report. So, in their annual report though, is also the people that are coming, how many people. What are the demographics of those people? For instance, in research for my book on Indian weddings, I’ve been pulling a lot of visitor numbers.

You can pull visitor numbers of what people from different countries are arriving in the US, or Canada, or India, or wherever. So, all that information is out there waiting for you, and it’s really not that difficult to get your hands on. And that will immediately cut out a swath of article ideas that you were thinking you might be able to pitch from that destination, and shine light on what is most sellable. What’s the best use of your time? Then you can also, ask the destination list this question of what they’re looking for in terms of audience: who they’re trying to reach, what they’re expecting in terms of coverage.

This is something to take into account, but it’s not necessarily gonna be the guiding factor on what you’re pitching, but it can help give you ideas. And especially if you can get a pitch in an assignment into one of the places that lines up with what you’re looking for, that’s great because it ingratiates yourself with the tourism board because that helped them tick a box on their annual goals. And that helped them in that report, and look good to the people who fund them, okay? The next question is how do you get there? This is really important because you can’t be pitching an idea to, for instance, West Jet magazine for one of these four ways articles that I mentioned if it’s a place that they don’t fly! The magazine’s just not gonna take it.

Furthermore, if you are looking at pitching stories about a destination that’s a bit off the beaten path, this is extremely important, not just in terms of just who flies there, but who in terms of risk of travelers, types of travelers would go there. What type of people are looking at going to these destinations, where the infrastructure might not be there, where the hotels might not be as nice. For instance, Bali is known for having really over-the-top resorts where you have your own private pool, and all sorts of things like that. But there’s this town Ubud that I had gone to maybe like ten years ago now, and I’ve gone to more recently and it’s changed quite a bit. But this town I always thought was the best place in Bali to be going. It was a place where, you know, you could have the real food. You could sit all day and read books. It wasn’t so hot. There weren’t all these mosquitoes. It was just the best.

Back then, there really weren’t nice or modern, or standard hotel options. And so, that immediately cut out a ton of places to write about it because the Bali experience a lot of other people would want was an air conditioning, a pool, and all of these things. And so now that they’re opening those places, I think there’s five coming out this year in 2018 and 2019, that opens up writing about that city to a totally different market, a very different magazine, a very different consumer. Once you know those things, oops sorry, then you need to look a the itinerary again. Now you know what you could potentially be pitching, and who you could potentially be pitching, and you need to start thinking about, “Oh great, these are the audiences. These are the options, but what do I personally want to be writing about? What makes sense for me to spend my time on the ground, and in my writing, working on after this trip?” Because if you are trying to take every little thing in the itinerary, and pitch it, and find a home for it I can tell you, you’re gonna not put your heart into it, you’re not gonna honor that contract with yourself to just pitch until you find a market because you don’t really care. You don’t really care about that story, and you’ve obviously decided to go on or are interested in this particular press trip for a reason because there’s something there that interests you.

Focus on those things. Don’t just say, “Oh, well this looks like it’s something I could pitch. I’m gonna pitch that.” Take the things that you are really excited about on that trip, and find the places to put them.

If you have the worksheets, you can take a look a this Terre De L’ebre trip. So, I was talking about is making sure to pitch the things that actually interest you because you’re gonna have a hard time really pushing yourself to get a story placed on something that you’re just not that jazzed about. So, this was a trip that was attached to a conference. So, all of us on this trip, most of us actually knew each other before, and we were like well, of course, this is the best trip ever. Who would pick any other trip? And we were all just wild about this trip. And the funny thing is when I look at the itinerary with having gone, I have such great memories of all of the different things on here, but it’s hard to know what specifically drew me to it in the first place, but I know it drew several people on the trip.

For instance there was individual, a couple actually, who run a website that’s about eco-travel. They were very interested in this Tuna Tour activity. They were interested because Tuna Tours have been done in a way that’s very not ecologically friendly. I know fishing has had a lot of negative publicity about this, particularly in that particular space. And they, not in a hypocritical way, were excited to see this operation because it was supposed to be much more ecological friendly and specifically the swimming portion as well. So, this to them was one of the big reasons to go on the tour.

Another friend of mine, who runs a food tour company in Spain actually, she was really excited about the mussels. Another person was really excited about L’Ebre Delta Natural Park because they had never thought of Spain as kind of a salt water, flat, delta sort of environment. A lot of Spain is very dry and arid, or mountainous, or coastal. This is an entirely different ecosystem, and she’s a photographer, and she was just really looking forward to that portion of the trip. So, once you identified the one, or the multiple things about the trip that do excite you – okay, we’re gonna try to go back to the slides from before, and hopefully it’ll work out.

We were talking about what to do on press trips. Nope, it hates me. Alright, we’re gonna just look at it here. Once you’ve identified that one or several portions of your trip, that you want to be focusing your pitches on, this is just a very random, easy, simple table that I had made for the pitch portfolio webinar that we had done previously. And in this case, what I had done, is I had put the names aspects of the itinerary that I wanted to pitch on the side and then, I thought about the travel style. So, in this case I was thinking, you know, very specifically the types of things that I had mentioned for the West Jet four ways articles before. So, maybe someone’s interested in culinary, maybe somebody who’s multi-generational, somebody who’s more interested in outdoors. So, these are things that tie into this audience. And in this case, I’ve just broken up audience in terms of demographic versus audience in terms of interest, okay? So, that’s what those two different things are. Then I thought about the different types of articles. And then I thought about where magazines I could pitch would be based, and if they’re not gonna be in the US, other international outlets that I could pitch those to.

This that I’m offering here is just one framework for filling in the market that you’re actually gonna pitch that you can try. The thing is that if we go back for a second to this first-pass of research questions, as you’re seeing where things have already been written about the destination, it’s gonna start to give you ideas because you’re gonna see who’s covered it, and you can say, “Okay well, you know, if The Telegraph which is a British newspaper has covered it, I wonder if one of the other newspapers in the UK, like The Guardian, might be interested in covering it from a different angle.” Or similarly, you know, if The Dallas Morning News has covered a…Or perhaps let’s look at it this way: if The L.A. Times has covered it, would The SF Chronicle cover it from a different angle, the same destination?

You know, you could say, “Well, if this is the angle that this publication has taken, I’m not gonna take that angle, so I need to take a different angle and it looks like that’s gonna go to a different audience.” So, as you’re looking at where things have already been written, it’s gonna naturally start to cut out different markets for you. And it’s also going to start to present ideas based on markets that are similar, or on markets that are different because you want to take a different market approach to the one that you’ve already seen.

As I mentioned this table is just one kind of framework that you can use. I recommend, like I said, you start with a few different areas of interest or attractions when you’re start filling in markets because if you have your whole trip, if you have 10 stops, 20 stops, 5 stops, 7 stops, if you have too many stops and then too many different things within that stop that you could do a story on, or that the format of the story. For instance, a business profile, and a round up, and you’re thinking of like, “Well, this would maybe make sense for a narrative feature, but I’ll have to wait and see until I go.” Now it’s really multiplying, and now you’ve got 25 different ideas that you’re looking at markets for, and not only is that overwhelming, but you’re losing your mental focus, and you’re losing your ability to be hanging out in the travel magazine database, or in the Barnes & Noble store and seeing a magazine, and being like, “Oh, this is perfect for that idea I’m trying to figure out” because there’s too many ideas for you to carry them all in your head at one time. So, what I like to think about is that if you’re gonna break out a few attractions, like 3 attractions, 2 attractions – you can even do one – and break that one place into a couple different ideas, and then match those ideas.

Now we’re looking at something more comfortable like 8 ideas, or maybe 10 ideas, and we’re gonna match those to different markets. These can be the kinds of things, like I said, where we know we like to do stories that are on the full destination, and so you’re going on a press trip like that Spain one. So, you’ve said, “Okay, this is Spain. It’s accessible from Barcelona.” That has cut out itinerary article options and a lot of airline magazines that don’t fly to Barcelona. So, now that’s left me with maybe 3, 4, 5 places that I could potentially be pitching this itinerary about this destination to, and then what you do is you arm yourself with those pitch options, those market options when you go on your trip. So, now you’ve shown up in Spain, and rather than just having an itinerary and some concepts, like you know, “I want to be writing about the Tuna Fish tour, or I wanna be writing about the Delta…” that’s a topic that’s so big, you say, “Okay, I want to write about how to do a day trip from Barcelona out to the Delta, for a section like “Delta Skies Estate,” which is a short piece on how to do something outdoorsy that’s a couple hours, and that’s completely narrows your research because you’re not just trying to soak up every single thing that the guide says about the Delta. You want to make sure you know to get there. You want to make sure you know the best things to see in one day, or in a short trip. You want to make sure that the layout is conducive to people who might be coming on public transit, and so on and so forth.

As you start to narrow down, not just the things on the trip, but your interest in what you’re writing about, but particularly about those things, and then particularly what markets those match to. That is gonna arm you with a bunch of research for when you land and when you’re on the trip, and that is what we’re going to zone in on next week, is how to get that information, how to fill in those ideas and get those potential markets.

So, again after you do these things do you want to pitch before or after? It depends on your confidence level, but it also depends on lead time. I want to circle back on this. We talked about it last week, and I believe it was Taylor who brought it up in the Pitchapalooza as well.

If you are looking at going somewhere that is seasonal, perhaps you’re going to a festival, or we spoke on the Pitchapalooza, there’s a botanical garden in the Netherlands that’s only open for two months out of the year when the tulips are in bloom. So, that’s something that you have to go this year in experiencing it, to write about it next year. And that means that you want to be pitching the editor actually perhaps in advance to when you’re going, even though the stories not going to come out for fourteen months because that editor is slotting in seasonal things for spring, for summer, for winter now for next year because she knows people need to travel now. So, there are things that are definitely guaranteed like the festivals, or the tulips being in bloom, that do make sense for you to pitch in advance because of the time, because the editor’s gonna want to assign it now. They’re gonna want you to know that you have the story, so that when you go there you can get the pictures, you can get the right information.

Again, thanks so much for joining us today, you guys, and for putting up with all of the technical hurdles. I really appreciate it. Have a great week.

What to Expect on Press Trips Transcript

Download (PDF, 307KB)

Thank you all so much for joining us this week and we’re going to talk this week about what to expect on press trips.

So specifically, what I want to discuss this week, we have a couple different webinars coming up breaking out other parts of the press trip experience. And in the past, we’ve talked about how to get on press trips, the basics of sponsored travel, the different types of trips, how to set up your own individual trip for somewhere that you want to go, and how to apply for different group trips. So, what we’re going to talk about this week is specifically, the act of going on the trips, preparing for the trips, all the things related to your correspondence with the PR people and other people on the trips step by step by step.

And then in upcoming weeks, we’re going to talk about how you can prepare as in how you can make sure that you are going to get the most stories from each trip. And then the following week, we’re going to talk about how to act when you’re on the trip. So not just etiquette, but also how to, on the ground, get as many stories as possible from these trips.

So, what I want to go over today is quickly talking about the different types of press trips and how expectations differ in terms of what your actions on the trip are like, what the pre-trip process will be like, and how the post-trip production differs between these different trips. And then we’re going to walk through the things that happen before you get on the trip step by step. And then we’re going to talk about all the things that might come up on your trip and we’re going to look at some sample itineraries.

What is a press/fam/hosted/sponsored trip in the first place? As I mentioned, there’s a lot of different names as I said here on the slide, but there’s also a couple different flavors of these trips. But at its core, it’s a group tour unless you’re going on an individual fam or individual sponsored trip that is. So, incumbent in the fact that many of these press trips are group tours are a lot of different issues. So, first, I’d love to hear from you guys in the chat box. How many of you have been on some sort of leisure group tour, not necessarily for work, but a leisure tour where you maybe and your family or you on your own have paid money for whatever it is in a package setting. Perhaps you — even cruises in a way, can be group tours when they’re small cruises, but you are staying in a bunch of hotels that are pre-arranged by somebody else, you have an itinerary of tours that are going to be in different places, some afternoons you’re on your own, some afternoons you’re going to be doing one of a selection of options. You might be doing some crafts and other activities.

So, the thing I think a lot of us encounter when we become travel writers is that we became travel writers because we want to travel independently. We want to travel on our own and dig up interesting things. Somebody here in the chat box said something that’s so on point. She says she’s been on a group tour, but it’s probably not my first choice of travel style, but it’s good to see a bunch of things that may not have been seen otherwise. And I was just chatting with my husband the other day because we were driving around the Netherlands and this is actually where I came on my very first trip ever out of the country and it happened to be a tour. So, I used to play field hockey and I was in the Olympic Development Program for Field Hockey and they brought a bunch of us here to the Netherlands and to Belgium and to the U.K. to play field hockey because it’s very big here, especially in the Netherlands. There’s a lot of field hockey pitches or sort of — not exactly a field, but a turf field in parks and it’s a really big sport here.

So, we came with the dual purpose of playing field hockey in these different settings and doing some workshops, but also to see Amsterdam, to see London, to see Brussels. And so, my very first ever international travel experience was on a group tour, but like I said, with this dual purpose. And what I found a mentor because everybody, even if you didn’t know each other, you had a unified reason for being there. That ends up being very different than the type of group tours that some of us may have been on as a leisure traveler.

So, I noticed some of you are saying that you’ve been on fam trips that are with groups as well as independent tours and some of you are saying that you’ve been on leisure tours that are group tours. And the thing that you may have noticed if you’ve been on both is that in a leisure group tour there’s naturally a bit of a congregation of people around personalities and interest areas and things like this. And that also happens on press trips. And this is one of the really interesting things about being on press trips that I think a lot of people don’t consider before they go is that what you experience day-to-day on that tour and what you can get out of that tour will have a lot to do with the personalities who are there. So, it might be that you go somewhere and you’re supposed to have a tour of a museum with a very experienced tour guide, but because one person on your tour is very bent on asking questions, on having every single one of their questions personally answered, that you don’t end up getting as much information even though you have a very professional experienced tour guide.

So, it’s important to remember that anytime you’re going on a group trip, even if it is a fam trip and we’ll talk about that in a second, or a typical press trip that you’re going to have this additional layer that might be impacting, perhaps in a negative and perhaps in a positive way, your experience on that trip both as a person and as a professional journalist. So, I’m sure if you have been on leisure tours you have some funny stories. If you’ve been on a lot of press trips you probably have funny stories about all the people that have been on the trip or things that may have gone wrong because of people organizing or because of people on the trip.

And all these things are a huge factor in the press trip experience and the reason why I’m really spending a little while talking about this is that the best laid plans, the best constructed itineraries, can be completely waylaid by these things. And that’s why as we’re talking about expectations, what you can expect on your press trip, it’s incredible important that that is the first thing on your approach, that’s the first thing you’re thinking of. How many people are going to be on this tour with you? What other types of people are on this tour with you? Are they researching a similar type of story with you, something very different that will mean every time you go somewhere the person giving the tour needs to address all of these different interests? This is a huge factor that isn’t present on your itinerary and you can’t just know from the description of the tour that the PR gives you how these things are going to shape your trip. But you want to figure out as many of them as you can before you go.

So, let’s talk more about these different types of trips that I mentioned. Different types of trips roughly fall into the following major categories. Is the whole trip going to be focused around your interest, your research needs? Or is the trip designed to try to please a lot of people? And when I say please a lot of people, I don’t only mean the people who are in your group, who are attendees, who are other writers, bloggers, journalists, on this trip. Trips that are designed for a large number of people inherently involve a lot of compromise on the side of the PR person to get them organized. And so, what happens is that to make sure that your group has somewhere to eat lunch, to make sure that your group has someone to walk you around downtown, the person organizing the trip might need to say to the restaurant “Oh, we have these writers coming. They really want to hear about something” and that something might not be something that any of you would possibly write about. But you’re going to need to hear somebody talk about it for 40 minutes over your lunch, despite the fact that you’re not interested because that was how they got the lunch sponsored, by telling this venue that you writers were interested in that thing.

And so, there’s a lot of push and pull and give and take and sort of horse trading in a political way that goes into putting this trip together before you even see the itinerary. Then once you get the itinerary, if it is a group trip, then the person organizing the itinerary starts to get feedback. They start to get requests from different people and then again, it’s back to trying to see how they can make as many people happy in the parameters that they have.

So, somebody’s mentioned a great example here and actually I know a couple of you who are on the call today who have probably had similar experiences. What happens if you go on a trip and the journalists are from a different language background? For instance, what if you are on in a trip in Mexico and there’s a number of Spanish-speaking journalists there? What if you are on a trip in Germany and the people on your trip are German writers and they speak English, but the tours may be in a mix? They may be in German or there might people who you visit on the tour who the person giving the tours speaks German and somebody tries to translate it for you in English, but it’s not great.

I had a similar experience to this in Spain a couple years ago for tea bags where obviously, we were there for an English language conference. We went on a tour that was related to the conference. It was organized in conjunction with the conference, but at several of the stops there just wasn’t somebody there who was up to the task of doing simultaneous translation for this tour. So, this is the type of things that can come up. So, thanks for mentioning that Donna.

As I mentioned, there’s the individual trip which is going to be around your interests and again, we had a webinar entirely devoted to organizing individual trips. So, I don’t want to dwell on that too much, but the idea is that you have gone to the Tourism Board with a specific story that you have assigned or some story angles that you would like to pursue and the person organizing the tour has put it together around your requests and you have a lot of leeway to make changes to that itinerary.

Now a press trip is typically a trip that is at least in part, decided in terms of the itinerary or where you’re going to stay in advance. And that happens because press trips are designed for people with assignments or who work in house or as regular contributors for a publication. And so, it’s meant to be something that has a story produced very close to when the trip runs. So, the idea is that you, as somebody with the ability to publish a story either because you’re an editor or frequent contributor and have latitude to design a story around your trip, see the itinerary and you’re interested in the itinerary and then you decide to go on the trip based on the itinerary. So, what that means like I said, is that a lot of this horse trading has already happened. So, while there might be some leverage for you if you have an important publication that you’re writing for to get something added, it’s pretty determined in advance and they’re going to expect the story to come shortly after that.

Now very different than this, is a familiarization trip. So, a familiarization trip is designed for when you don’t really know the area and you’re going on this trip to get story ideas. And so in that vein, it’s more accepted that the story is going to come later. It’s more accepted that you’re going to have questions about the itinerary and perhaps ask for some things to be added. And familiarization trips also won’t always be composed entirely of writers. Familiarization trips are very common for travel agents and so sometimes you’ll see a mix of the two on one tour. But they’re typically designed to present a wide away, a menu, a very people-pleasing assortment of different things to choose from.

So, this is going to be the kind of case where there’s a lot of things that you might have on your itinerary that really don’t have anything to do with you and you have to go along with them. When I was doing some background research for this call today, I was looking at some things that people say about press trips and it’s a little — the things that people say about press trips tend to be one or two things. How to get on press trips or oh my God, press trips are horrible, you don’t really want to go on them, here’s how to figure it out or here’s how to get to the point where you’re going on individual press trips as much as possible.

And thing is that — well, I also think that going on an individual trip is going to be like I said, the best way to get your interests served. It’s not always something that you can do right away. You typically need to start your process of going on trips and getting stories from trips. From going on trips that exist already, whether that’s a press trip, a familiarization trip, or a blog trip or conference tour. So, the thing that’s different about a blog trip rather than a press trip is it’s inherently aimed at bloggers and that changes quite a few things.

You’d think that the itineraries would be somewhat similar, but they end up catering to not just a different audience because I wouldn’t really say that’s exactly the issue, but it’s more that they end up catering to a different style of travel. A trip that’s set up for people who are bloggers tend to be designed with the idea that you will be blogging as you are on the trip as opposed to just when you get back from the trip. And I say “tend to be” and this is said in contrast to press trips. When you’re on a press trip with people who are more writing for magazines or for print, they’re typically not tweeting during the trip, they’re not going to be writing posts on their blog every night after the trip. They tend to be working with something that they’re going to write when they get back from the trip. They don’t typically consist of people actively working on their story on the bus in between stops on the trip.

So, blog trips in theory, should have more available technology. It’s more likely that your itinerary will include the Twitter handles of the different places that you’re visiting. I’ve seen some really nice ones around this recently where actually on the back of the name tags they have the Twitter handles for all the places that you are visiting. They often tend to have Wi-fi on the buses that you’re going to be on as you go around the trip. And more importantly, as you are out visiting destinations things go a bit slower because people are taking a lot more pictures.

On press trips people are often taking some pictures, but they might be using pictures that are furnished by the destinations or the venues of shop people or they have a photographer with them who’s dedicated to that. And in addition to taking those photos, they’re actively posting them as you go along. So, that really slows down the pace quite a bit.

Now, kind of related to blog trips but also to press trips, is conference tours. Conference tours are a type of fam trip that will happen when you are going to a travel conference and they offer tours of the area where the conference is to attendees of the travel conference. So, two travel writers. And these are a really great way to get started if you’re new to the whole press trip process and particularly to getting assignments in order to get on a press trip, but they can be very, very, very different than these other trips for one reason: the people organizing them have a lot of trips on their plate.

This is not the kind of thing where you are going to Milwaukee for a very big, very important golf tournament and Visit Milwaukee has organized for a group of golf-oriented travel writers a slate of things to do around this event. This is a city that’s hosting some number of hundreds of travel writers for a conference and organizing 5 – 10 dozens of tours for these writers to be going on. So, these tours tend to be less — curated isn’t quite the word, but they tend to have less time dedicated to each one individually than your average press trip. So, what that means is that you’re less likely to have a handler, have a person who’s with you all the time who is from the destination. You might have someone from one hotel that’s hosting you or an external tour guide that’s leading the trip, but you have less connection with the Tourism Board of the destination or the hotel that’s hosting you specifically.

So, these can be great entry points, but they might become more difficult to get stories because there’s a little bit less of a security blanket there of somebody who’s there all the time to make sure that your needs as the travel writer are met in terms of making sure you can talk to somebody that you want to get an interview from, that you get your questions answered, and that you get the content of the tour translated for you, for instance. So, in that vein, something that I read that I thought was very interesting and even the writer at the time said she had heard this from someone and she wasn’t sure that she 100 percent agreed with it, was characterization of press trips as “A bus full of ladies looking at jam.” And what was meant by this quote is that there are often a bunch of people together, non-decrepitly, who might not necessarily have shared interest, who are looking at things that they also are not necessarily interested. And like I said, the dynamics of the groups that you are with on your press trip are very important. That the dynamics of that group pushed up against an itinerary that might not be the best fit for what all of you cover is also very important.

So, what that means is that while a group tour is an itinerary of things and you know in advance when you pay for the tour that this is what you’re going to be seeing on each stop, a press trip or a fam trip can be a much more amorphous experience as in the itinerary pretty much 100 percent of the time. I don’t think I’ve ever seen or heard of one remaining intact. The itinerary of the final trip will not be the itinerary that you agreed to when you signed up for the trip. Often, days have been changed or shortened. Entire destinations or excursions have been subtracted or added and so, it’s very important before your trip to make sure that you’re following the itinerary and what’s going on at every step of the process.

And like I said, there’s different types of trips that have different expectations. And some trips simply won’t have an itinerary ready for you in advance. They’ll just have a short description and this is often the case with conference trips. They tend to be something that you might agree to based on just a short one paragraph or maybe even two paragraphs of saying what they’re going to do. So, in those cases, it’s very likely that what they said would be on the trip won’t end up in the final itinerary.

On fam trips and press trips and blog trips they tend to relate more closely to what happened originally and you have more of a leg to stand on if you’re saying “Well, I agreed to go on this trip because this thing. This thing isn’t there I no longer have a story.” So, let’s just talk very quickly like I said, we have some other webinars available on this, about the different ways that you can first come in contact with these trips and secure your place on them.

So, trips can be available because they have been advertised again, by typically a small paragraph, sometimes by the full itinerary on an outlet for a writer such as Blogger Bridge which again, is more for bloggers, Media Kitty is a mix, but I would say it’s more for journalists and these are two ways that you can hear about trips. Travel writing associations such as SATW, The Society of American Travel Writers. I always get this acronym wrong, The International Food Lion and Travel Writers Alliance advertises quite a few. The North American Travel Journalist Association doesn’t have quite as many. There’s other ones in Britain and Australia and Canada as well.

So, the travel writing associations do have some. Media Kitty really has a lot of them and Blogger Bridge also advertises them quite regularly. You can also get on one of these trips by reaching out individually and you can also get these trips at conferences. So, I talked about blog trips or conference trips that you might go on attached to a conference, but there’s a lot of conferences like, not necessarily just a TVax or a Travel in Words or a Book Passage type of conference that you would go to learn about travel writing, but there are conferences and expos that are designed entirely around you meeting with destinations. So, Canada Media Marketplace is a big one for that. On alternating years, they come to San Francisco and New York, a bunch of representatives from different destinations in Canada to meet with American travel writers and that type of event is mostly around you setting up future press trips, either group press trips or individual press trips with those destinations.

And then, the other main way that you can hear about these is just getting them through your email and that’s the kind of thing where this is one of the reasons you need to have a writer’s website that says very clearly, not only that you are a writer and that you have clips, but the types of things that you cover so that people looking to invite writers on press trips know that you are available for those opportunities. So, you’ve applied for a trip or you’ve spoken to somebody about a trip. You’ve been accepted. Now, what happens?

So, once you get that your spot on this trip is secure, a number of things start happening. The first, very first one is the perennial question: Are flights included? I’ve been hearing this question a lot and this is something that’s changed dramatically in recent years. And I’d love to hear from those of you who are here on the call who have gone on quite a few press trips. In your experience, if you’re still finding trips with flights versus not finding trips with flights included because I’ve actually seen that while it is less common for you to have your flights paid for by the destination or otherwise included in your trip, it hasn’t entirely gone away. And the thing that has changed I think more dramatically, is how the flights are being funded.

So, it used to be that a destination might go to an airline or have a partnership with the airline and the flight itself would be comped by or would come out of the budget of the airline. They now tend to be more paid for by the organizing party which is what’s made it a bit more difficult for writers to get those flights included because it’s something that the party organizing the press trip might just not have the budget for. Because depending on who’s organizing it, the trip might be entirely constructed out of comps from different people. So, comp means complimentary if you’re not familiar with that term, and the comps might be coming from a number of different hotels and restaurants and attractions rather than one budget. For instance, the budget of the Tourism Board which is being used to pay each of these places for your stay and your meals and your tours and so on.

So, it’s most certainly something that you want to ask and clarify upfront. In our Monday Mail Bag, we had somebody who recently got a very obtuse invite from a tour company to write about what they had. They didn’t really say if they wanted her to come experience it and write about it, they didn’t really say if they just wanted her to write it up on her blog for publicly available information, and she’s thinking “Well, if you want me to come, you’d better be paying for my flight because I’m not paying to go to Greece for two to three days.” And this is a really huge thing is that often, these trips are not very long because somebody, somewhere, somehow is covering those hotel nights and so they want to get as much stuff done, they want to put as much stuff in front of you as possible with the fewest number of hotel nights. So, what that often means for flights is that you might be flying somewhere quite far away for a very short time. And I don’t know about you, but for me there’s a big jet lag no-no and I prefer to not bounce across the world for two days, but there’s a good way to handle that and it’s asking for extra days.

So, the deal with asking for extra days is you can always ask if they’re doing your flights, you can always ask them to tack on extra days on either side. And obviously, you should mention that if it changes the price of the flight dramatically, to let you know and you can cover the difference or you can decide not to do it. But, where it becomes an issue is if you’re asking for extra days and you’re asking for them to cover the lodging for those days as well. But if you just want to ask for some additional time on your own in the destination, not only is that something you can do, but if your budget allows for you to do that on your own or if you are interested in organizing those additional room nights on your own, it’s something that I highly recommend.

And the specific way that I recommend doing it is to do a day or two or whatever you can manage upfront before the trip and a day or two, again whatever you can manage, after the trip. And this is so that before the other people on the trip arrive you are able to get a handle on the destination to check out anything that you wanted to do that’s not included on the itinerary and specifically, to rest up and get over your jet lag. And at the end, that’s the time you use for anything that you visited on the trip, but it was just too quick. It was too brief, you didn’t your photos, you didn’t get to ask enough questions, or you were supposed to go to this venue and they had to cut it out of the itinerary that day because the itinerary was too crazy.

As we were talking about extra days, it’s really something that’s great to do if you can manage the extra days, but you need to be cognizant that they have the budget that they have and that they might not be able to set you up with the accommodations. However, what you can always do is that say the itinerary for your trip is being organized by the Tourism Board. You can ask them if there’s any hotels that aren’t included in this itinerary that would fit what you cover, that you should check out, and if they can connect you with that PR person to set up your own stay. If it’s a trip that’s already an individual trip, then it’s relatively easy for you to just see where you’re going to be staying and reach out to some additional properties.

If it’s a trip that’s organized one hotel, this is increasingly common that press trips are organized by a hotel to bring people into the area and obviously stay at their hotel and tour their hotel, but also to get out into the surrounding area and see what there is to do there and write about the whole experience of the destination while featuring the hotel. If your itinerary is organized by a hotel, find a different hotel. Reach out to that hotel. That other hotel might not know that there’s writers in the areas. They might be very happy to have the opportunity to also get in your story or get some attention while you’re in town to cover the first hotel. Is that something that you should tell the first hotel? I would probably keep that to myself, however.

Now, as you are getting your pre-trip ducks in a row. As I mentioned, depending on what kind of trip you’re doing, you may or may not have an itinerary. Now, this might not be an issue. I have seen some times when it’s not an issue. But when it most certainly is an issue is when they have told you, whether they’re upfront about it or they just think they’ve told you, that they want you to have a story come out very soon after the trip, but they don’t give you an itinerary. Now, this is where expectations become a very large issue and it’s not uncommon for the press person or for the owner of the hotel if it’s a small hotel to think that you will be able to sort of turn a story around afterwards even if they haven’t provided you with an itinerary in advance.

This is something that is very useful for you to be educating those PR people or those owners or whoever is the organizing party about that in order for you to secure a story, you need to have 100 percent clarity and confirmation of what you will be seeing while you are there in order to be able to sell those stories in advance to an editor. So, what I like to do with this confirmed assignment catch 22 is that anybody that wants a confirmed assignment had better give you a confirmed itinerary and it had better be confirmed and it had better be given to you in advance. Not the day before you leave, the week before you leave, but in advance like as close to when you are accepting the trip as possible, if not before.

Now obviously, if they’re giving you the itinerary when you’re accepting the trip, it’s subject to change in terms of times and things like that. But you need to get, if they want a confirmed assignment, you need to get more or less in writing just because everything’s happening over email, but you need to get their word that these things will actually happen on your tour. This is the kind of thing where I’ve seen a lot of people organizing trips be a bit squishy about this confirmed assignment thing where I’ve had people say “We’re doing this trip and we only want confirmed assignments” and then weeks go by and nobody that they’ve reached out to has confirmed assignments because they haven’t provided the itinerary or something else like that. And then they come back and they’re like “Oh, are you still interested in going on the trip? We have spots.”

This is something that happens. You should basically just expect it that you’ll have to play a little hard about the itinerary or put your foot down that you won’t potentially get yourself in hot water with an editor by getting an assignment for a story that you can’t produce, but just make sure that you are 100 percent continuously clear with the PR representative about what you are able to deliver. And so, what that means is making sure that when you reach out to the venue or when you apply to get on a press trip you aren’t communicating that you will be publishing a story as in you will be publishing, you confirmed will be publishing a story with a place that you just have a contact at or an editor that you’ve pitched once or twice. If you’re saying that you might be able to place a story, then you say “I might be able to place a story here” or “I’m in communication with an editor at such and such and I will discuss a story about your destination with them.”

So, the best way to tow this confirmed assignment catch 22 is to just be 100 percent clear upfront and transparent about what you are able to promise. And we’ll get back to follow-up later because that’s when this comes up again. Now, asking for changes in the itinerary, I’ve had some people ask me about this like “Can I ask for changes in the itinerary?” and the answer is always yes. There’s never a time when you can’t ask. If they can give it to you or not is another story, but there’s a way to do this. So, every time you have something in the itinerary that you want to ask for you need to show them what is it in for them. What are they getting out of your ask? What are they getting out of making that change? And not even just taking the time to look into that, but the person who you’re asking probably has to go to somebody else to try to negotiate this change. So, the more ammo that you can give them, the more likely the change that you want to see will come to pass.

So, whether that’s adding something that’s not on there, perhaps you say “This is something that I can do on my own during the break that you have scheduled between this and this time” or “This is something that I can do on my own on this morning when the main itinerary doesn’t start until 10.” That will make it a lot easier for them because it might just be a function of them getting up a little early or themselves driving you in the middle of the day to go to this place. Saying that “Having this thing will help me to sell a story or an additional story about this destination” is always great because the whole point of these trips is for them to place stories. So, if you’re saying “If you make this change, it will help me help you”, that’s always great. Just saying “Can we do this?” or “I’d like to do blah” is not enough ammunition. You have to bring it back to what it has to do with your readers or your editor and how that is going to help them get more coverage.

For instance, if you are asking let’s go back. Let’s go to extra days and asking about changes. So, let’s say you’re asking about extra days and you want them to organize it for you. You want them to add an additional hotel and set that up for you, you don’t want to contact them yourself. You can say, you know, “I have a website that I write hotel reviews for and I can do multiple reviews about your destination, but I need to be staying at different properties and I know that during the main days of the tour we’re only staying at property x and I would love to also review property y because our website has a readership of high income readers who typically spend this, this, and that and travel this many times a year and come to this destination more than once a year or three times every five years” or something like that.

So, when you put statistics in there, especially about your audience, it can really help them sell those things. And in terms of even getting the itinerary in the first place, this is something that can be, it can just be mind-blowing how many times people can tell you that they’re going to give you the itinerary and have it not appear. And like I said, there is a certain level of being sensitive that they are working to set up these trips. However, they do always know who they’re working with or what they’re working on.

So, if they’re telling you that they aren’t able to get it or they’ve said that they’re going to get it to you and they haven’t gotten it to you yet, then what you can always do is say “If you don’t have the day-by-day or hour-by-hour itinerary at this moment, I just need to know what the stops are” or “I just need to know what days we’re going to be in what cities” or “I just need to know what restaurants are included.” That might be something that’s much easier for them to get to you.

So, we’ve done our pre-trip stuff. We’ve, hopefully, received an itinerary in some form. We’ve gotten on the plane or the bus or the train and now, we are on our trip. So, I had mentioned in the blog post and the newsletter leading up to this webinar that, especially if you’re traveling individually, but I’ve seen this happen with groups as well. You might not get the red carpet, whether red carpet in the luxurious way or just red carpet as in you are journalist going to this place to cover it, welcome that you’re expecting. And, you know, if any of you guys have interesting stories about this in the chat box, I’d love to hear it over here on the side.

But the story I had just relayed was about a writer who had an individual assignment for a noted luxury publication to do a review of a brand-new hotel and she got the assignment from the editor and the editor asked her to go on the trip, got it set up, got the flights, got there, nothing. No schedule, no one waiting for her. No interviews, no handler. She had her room and that was it and the thing is for some people, that would kind of be an invitation to do nothing and I’ve definitely seen this happen, but for most of us, we want to get our stories. So, then we’re going to go bust our butt and figure out who is there somewhere, whether it’s a concierge or a manger or anybody who has an office who can tell us what to do and help us get that organized. Somebody’s got a great thing over here in the side bar.

I once had a trip that the organizer had forgotten to advise us about it being cancelled and she only found out after she arrived. This kind of stuff happens that you show up somewhere and there is no trip. And so, as much as you have planned, as much as you have tried to do your due diligence, as much as you have tried to wrangle, if needed, the person who is organizing your trip to make sure the trip is happening or the things that you have said that you need to cover on the trip, all these thing are happening, sometimes you show up and they just aren’t happening. Or you show up and no one is expecting you.

I had a trip and this was a conference trip which made it almost a little weirder because there were so many trips going that you’d think that people in the area would know we were coming, but I had a trip where we had a self-driving driving experience with other people we didn’t know which on its own was a little nerve-wracking if you ask me. So, we were supposed to fly both ways and a day or two before, they changed it that rather than flying up there, so at the beginning of the trip we were going to be taking an overnight train. So just imagine that you’re going on a self-driving trip with a bunch of people you don’t know and you arrive by overnight train.

And so, I happened to have flown up there separately before the trip and because I was already there, somebody connected me with the rental car. I literally don’t even know who met us at the train station, but they kind of took my license or something and scribbled something on a paper and then magically, we had a rental car. They didn’t tell us if we needed to fill gas, where to drop it off, when to drop it off, any of these things and then for the next three or four days, we had an itinerary that somebody had given us that had weird things like leave at 8:00 a.m. to go to some place and then several hours later, longer than it took to get there, tour of blah, blah, blah venue. We didn’t know who we were supposed to meet. We didn’t know if someone was expecting us. We didn’t know if it was a guided tour. We didn’t know if there was somebody that was actually going to be giving us a tour.

So essentially, every morning we got up, the four of us, the day before and we’d be like “Okay. What are we supposed to do tomorrow?”, “Is this stuff really happening?”, “Do we want to do this stuff?”, it was like “Where do we think we’re actually expected?”, and we tried to sort of figure out what we were actually supposed to do with this information that we had been given. And thankfully, it was not one of these horror stories where we were just on our own and we had to pay for all of our meals and our hotels even though they were supposed to be included. It ended up that when we got to places there were people expecting us and so all the groundwork had been laid, but the issue was that not only did we have no way of knowing that because had no handler, but the people we had been communicating with before the trip similar to the person that I mentioned in the blog post and the newsletter today, was on vacation during our trip. So, this trip had been set up and then all of the contact numbers that we had were not working. They were not reachable and nobody was getting back to us.

So, it doesn’t only happen on individual trips. You can be on a group trip where you get there and things aren’t ready for you. People aren’t expecting you. Or you go somewhere and people are expecting you, but they’re expecting you for three or four hours and you’re supposed to be somewhere else in an hour and a half. And sometimes you’d have a handler, but your handler is actually making the situation worse by telling people to keep talking, or to tour this, or to show you this, and things like that. So, it’s really on you, and this goes back to what I was saying with the group, on the consensus of the group and the needs of the group to make sure that you are holding up to that itinerary as closely as possible to make sure that everyone’s needs are being met because the thing is if you’re on a group itinerary, it’s not just you, right?

Like you might, as I mentioned quite earlier in the call, you might be on a tour with somebody who really wants to ask all their questions and get all their questions answered at the expense of the schedule which means that the thing that you needed to cover or that somebody else needed to cover which was scheduled at the end of the day, needs to be missed. So, it’s really important to figure out as soon as possible how you fit into the group, get the pulse of the group because it might be the case that there is somebody who is essentially the anchor of the trip. They have the most important assignment, the most important outlet, the most important story, and the person setting up the trip, perhaps for a hotel, got that person and then just couldn’t get other people of that caliber or other people that were similar to that person and filled the trip with other people that were interested and available.

And in that case what’s going to happen, is that what that person on the trip wants is going to be the preference of your handler or the person creating the schedule or the person deciding when you move from point A to point B. You might be that person. There might be a bunch of people on the trip who are very similar in level, but all have very diverse outlets. Maybe somebody writes about traveling with pets, somebody writes for travel trade, somebody writes a very popular food travel blog, and somebody else has a mom travel blog. So, people have very different interests both in terms of what they want to do on the group as well as the type of writing that they actually end up producing.

And so what happens in these instances is at the beginning of the trip, both you and the others who had these will gauge everyone else by asking the dreaded questions and I call it the “dreaded question” because if you have shown up on a trip and you feel like you got there in some way by the skin of your teeth or you feel like the other people are “real journalists” because they are on staff or they’re contributing writers and you are a blogger who’s trying to break into print, it’s very easy to get sort of stumped, stuck, or otherwise intimidated by the question of “Where are you going to publish after this trip?” or “What are you publishing?” or “What stories are you working on?” or “Who do you write for?”

And so, this is one of the reasons that the blog trip has evolved as its own separate thing is that originally, there would be, when blogs first started to become something that people organizing press trips would include in their inwrite pool, there would always kind of be the odd blogger out. Like you would be on a tour with a bunch of journalists and they would be like “Ugh, you’re a blogger?” even if you’re reach was significantly larger than the regional newspapers of the people who are on that tour. And so, it’s changed because like I said, the needs of bloggers on a trip are very different that the needs of journalists on a trip.

And so, what happens here like I said, is that you do sometimes get mixed itineraries. They can often be separated, but you might find yourself in a situation where some people are only interested in one thing on the trip and they’re going to be the Negative Nancy the whole rest of the time and be like “This is boring”, “Can we move on?”, or some people might have a blog where they can actually write five or ten articles about all of the different things that you’re doing on a trip and they’re going to perhaps be dragging because they’re trying to get maximum information about each of those stops. Another thing that happens is the person who just takes too long generally that I’ve mentioned a couple times, and we’ve got a question from Larry about that I’m going to ready for you.

Larry says “Do you have any suggestions on how to handle the person who’s putting everyone behind schedule with lots of questions or picture taking? Can you suggest that you get the guide’s email or phone number to ask questions later on or” — I can’t quite understand this question, but — “Ask where the group can get high resolution images of whatever you’re looking at.” So, this is a real question of whether you have a handler or not, so I’m going to move on to the next slide because that’s involved with this slide.

So, when you are on your trip you may have somebody who’s with you throughout the whole trip, goes from the hotel or the PR agency that represents the hotel or the destination or from the Tourism Board directly. And in those cases, when you have a handler who is with you throughout as opposed to just tour guides in different venues, it is the handler’s job to intervene with that person. And I say “that person” because that tends to be, you know, you say “that person” and everybody in the group knows what you’re talking about. So, it is the handler’s job to intervene with that person if there is a “that person” and if there is a handler, but the thing is that there isn’t always a handler. So, if — and the handler can sometimes not be very aware that this one person is dragging down the rest of the group and sometimes, as I mentioned, the handler can be catering to the needs of that person because that person has the most important outlet.

So, it’s important first of all, to gauge if there’s nothing you can do because that person is the priority person, but the other thing is if the handler hasn’t noticed and you tell the handler, it might be that nothing happens. So, if the handler hasn’t done anything about it, you typically need to have more than one person who’s on the trip approach the handler and make it clear that this is negatively impacting the experience of the other writer because if just you tell them, they might kind of be like “Oh, well you know, I’ll keep an eye on it”, but if it’s really clearly already a problem, it’s good to have a proper intervention about it.

Now, what if there’s no handler? What if you are completely self-guided like I talked about how we were on that self-driving trip? What if you’re completely self-guided and there’s no handler, but there’s a person? In that case, doing an intervention might cause them to get defensive. Doing it on your own might cause nothing to happen. So, the best ways to deal with that person in situations like this where there’s no one who has the authority to do it for you and it seems like doing it on your own or in a group might not have the desired result, is to try to manage around it.

So, what that means is — Larry had a great point about, you know can you ask the guide or the representative from the museum or the venue where the group can get high-resolution images. That’s great. Can you ask for the email or phone number so that people can use it later, but if this person’s really not self-aware and there’s nobody to really step in, what you really want to do perhaps, is to go to the guide at the beginning of the tour and say “Hey. Just so you know, there’s a person on our trip who tends to ask a bunch of questions it doesn’t allow the other people to ask questions or it slows down the tour and we collectively would love if you could try to make sure that the tour moves along.” So, you do kind of have to go around them in those cases. So, you either need to go up or you need to go around. So, I talked in answering Larry’s question about a couple different guided situations that you have.

So, the main things that happen on your trip and I apologize, these ones down here should’ve been further out. So, the main things that your trip is composed of is going to be different types of tours which may be guided or not, types of meetings, interviews and presentations and I’ll explain what I mean more about that, meals — and I say dinner here, but I really mean meals, and excursions or activities. So, I want to talk first about tours because a lot of what you’ll do on these trips is tours of different kinds. And sometimes you’ll have professional guides who are certified.

For instance, in Italy you need to actually have several master’s degrees and very a high-level knowledge about a specific city in order to be a certified guide in that area and you legally cannot guide there. So, foreigners who are leading a tour group need to work with local guides on the group in those cities. In those cases, the guides will be, whether they’re certified or they’re just general professional guides, they will be really good at this type of crowd control and things like that and you can more or less rely on them to be keeping the tour on track in terms of time as long as they know what the time constraints are. So, it’s good to remind them if you don’t have a handler. Keeping the tour on track in terms of time as well as keeping people in line and tailoring the tour to what you guys need to know.

Now, the other thing that can happen is that you have types of guides who are not actually guides, but they are the person who is there to show you around a certain place. Sometimes this is the owner of the venue and sometimes it’s just whoever was available. I think I have actually seen like the brand new, just started two days ago admin leading tours in some places who doesn’t know the answer to your question and has no idea how to do tours and so on and so forth. In these cases, it can be both incredibly boring because you’re being told things you have no interest in and it can be difficult to get information that you actually need.

So, this is the case where if you have a person who is leading your “tour” you need to get the contact information of somebody else and circle back later if it’s something that you really need to cover, but what can also happen is that you have a very skilled guide who is guiding you around something, typically a hotel or other type of venue that you have absolutely no interest in. Like you’re staying in a hotel, but do you really need a 45-minute tour? Do you really need to see five different types of guest rooms, and the restaurant, and the meeting rooms, and the gym, if you’re not writing a hotel review? The answer is no, but as I mentioned earlier on in the call, the PR people have had to play this up to the hotel in a certain way so that they can get you the room and part of that is that they can showcase what they have.

So, that’s why you get these walkarounds where everyone is on their phone not taking notes, but actually doing their emails and never really looking up because they don’t want to make eye contact and get the spiel to continue any longer. So, in the cases where you’re not covering those things, it’s really best again, setting expectations, to say to the person giving that tour at the beginning “Thanks so much for showing us around. I just want to let you know I’m doing a hotel review specifically. I’m going to be mentioning the hotel in a greater look at things to do in the area. So, I really appreciate you showing us these things, but I just want to let you know that I personally am not going to be covering too much about the specifics. So, if you notice me doing something else during the tour, that’s why.”

So, the thing is you might lead other people who are on the tour to do the same thing. And then what happens if everybody said they’re not going to do that? What can happen is that the person says “Oh, okay. Well, we do have blah, blah, blah which is actually interesting”, like they keep bees on the roof and they use it in the kitchen or something like that. This is can be a great way to actually unearth something besides just touring the rooms of the hotel and looking at them and going “Oh, thank you.”

So, another thing that can happen is when you have self-guided tours and personally, I hate these. Not because I don’t like exploring on my own but I really don’t like when you are on an itinerary and they just let you loose in the museum for 45 minutes with nobody to tell you about it. I find it to be a huge waste of time on a tour, but it does happen. So, in those cases, and Carrie and a great point about this, you want to do your research in advance. But it can be hard to know from the itinerary sometimes if you’re going to have a guide in a certain place or not and so in these settings, I think it would be really great always to have internet on your phone when you travel. If you’re going to be somewhere that you don’t have internet, at least check out the venues that you’re going to be visiting for the day before you get there because even if you do have a guide, when you get there you’ll be able to speak with more authority and ask better questions. And if you don’t have a guide, you’ll at least be able to figure it out on your own.

So, as I mentioned, there’s a couple other types of things that you might encounter on your itinerary and one of them I’ve grouped together as meetings, interviews, and presentations. And meetings can take a lot of different forms, quite honestly. I’ve been on press trips where I had several, several, several in a one-day press trip, time blocks let’s call it, where it was like 45 minutes with one person in a venue in a destination. Like maybe somebody who is the economic development coordinator for the city or somebody who is the program director for a theater or something like that and I just had 45 minutes with them.

And so, I’ve differentiated that from an interview because I didn’t explicitly say I want to talk to this person about this topic and then prepare questions in advance. I was essentially told “You will be meeting with this person between this and this hour.” So, what happens when you’re told you will be meeting with somebody, and that can be you individually or your entire group, is that you have a bit of an expectation that the person or people involved has an agenda, that they have something that they want to talk to you about, that they want to inform you about, perhaps that they’re launching something new. And that can happen and then we get into the area of presentations, but it doesn’t always happen. Sometimes it’s just kind of an information gathering session.

And so, this goes back to what I mentioned about the tours that you want to make sure that you’re always done, even if it’s just in the morning over breakfast, a little bit of research on these places that you’re visiting because you might unexpectedly find that you are somewhere, either individually or in a small group, with someone who expects you to be asking them questions and you weren’t specifically informed that that was going to be happening. Now, a related thing about meals is that you might sometimes have a combination meal and meeting. And I’ve seen these happen for sure on individual trips. If you have an individual trip, you can pretty much 100 percent expect that you will have a number of, if not all, meals that area actually meetings because it’s a good way to pair you up with somebody who can tell you about something. But these also happen on group trips. It can be sometimes as simple as your tour guide from a certain venue is joining you for lunch so that you can continue to ask them questions about the museum that you just visited or something like that.

And in general, meals I see become a very difficult moment on group trips. There’s the typical, you know, somebody’s vegetarian, somebody can’t eat this, somebody get that, that can slow up the whole process. Especially if people haven’t been asked about that in advance or haven’t mentioned it in advance or the meals weren’t announced it seemed like it was going to be a trip to North Carolina about food and ends up just being a trip to North Carolina about barbecue and this person is vegetarian and they weren’t expecting that.

So, there tends to always be a bit of tension that comes up at meals. Either because of something situation, circumstantial like that, or because there’s a “that person” who is now taking over the whole meal or who you get stuck sitting next do because you went to the bathroom when you went to restaurant and you came back and that was only seat left, surprise, surprise. So, meals however, are things that you have to go to. And this is something that came up when I was doing some pre-research for this call is that if you’ve never been on a press trip, it’s really important to realize that these itineraries, like I said, are grueling. They’re packed, they’re trying to get you to do as many things as possible in as few hotel nights as possible and you are expected to do each and every one of them.

So, I’ve had trips where we were scheduled literally, from 8:00 in the morning until 2:00 a.m. at night. I’ve had trips where we were in Hawaii during, not even specifically a heatwave, but kind of a hot time for there, and we were outside in the sun more or less with no lunch all day, multiple days in a row. Like, literally no lunch, like we were driving back from one venue and the PR person who was actually with the PR agency that represents Hawaii said “Oh, do you guys want to eat something because there’s a couple shops and a mini mall over here. We can pull over and you can go get something.”

So, not only are meals fraught with things, but it’s important to remember that if you’re not a breakfast person, you might still be expected at breakfast and in fact, there might be a presentation/meeting from the person who owns the inn that you’re staying with at breakfast. Lunch is not a time that you can pop back up to your room and check your email. It’s probably going to be something where the spa director is going to be telling you about their new spa program which is organic and they customize each salt scrub to your aromatherapeutic interest.

So, this concept of meeting with interviews and presentations, it ties into meals, but it’s important to remember that you never really know when it says on your itinerary a meal exactly what is going to be happening during that meal. So, I’ve had a lot of trips where we had a meal that was at a restaurant, but then they also had a brewer from a brewery come in and then they also had a chocolatier. So, for instance since we had the meal, the food comes out, the chef comes out to tell us about the course, the brewer comes out to tell us about the beer that’s being brewed with that course, and then the chocolatier comes out in the middle of the main course to do a discussion about their process, and then they come back when the desert is served.

So, there might be just no time to talk or think during your meals or you might have no handler, no supervision, and just be left in a restaurant with your group and somebody’s bringing you food and you have no idea what it is and you just have to figure it out. So, meals are one of the points in itineraries that are often the least clarified and can create the most tension as a result.

Now, I didn’t spend too much verbiage on our excursions and activities because they really, really depend on the destination that you’re going to and also the type of trip that you’re on. Some trips, especially active adventure trips, will have a lot of activities introduced into the itineraries. Other itineraries will have very few activities that are there included on the itineraries, but they’ll have a block in the afternoon which is “free time” that you can choose from doing a couple different things like ziplining or seg-waying around the property or different things like. But a couple type of activities to look out for are ones that aren’t available to the public yet that they are Guinea pigging on you. So, this can be figured out with a very quick Google search and any time you see an activity that’s not on the market yet that’s included in your itinerary, you need to prepare yourself because it’s probably going to have some hiccups. It might take much longer or much less time than they’ve said. They might say that there’s going to be food and there’s not actually going be food there and they might say that there’s going to be somebody doing a traditional dance and then there doesn’t end up being somebody available to do the traditional dance.

So, anything that’s not public and open and proven can be a wild card. It can be not interesting. It can be not ready, but the things that you need to watch out for in terms of being interesting are what I call the things they think you’ll be interested in. So, I’ve had times where we were in Turkey for instance, and we were on an eco-tourism trip and they took us to a waterfall. It was a grueling hike, but it was a long hike. It was the middle of the day and we had driven from somewhere else at a distance to go to this waterfall and it was just a waterfall. It wasn’t particularly long, it didn’t have a big pool at the bottom, it didn’t have a big cascade. There wasn’t anything particularly notable about it for people coming from the U.S. and Canada and also Japan and Africa about this waterfall.

So, this is one of the things that you can check on your itinerary in advance and you can ask “Oh, could you tell me why this thing is here? I’d love to have some more information about it before our trip” because sometimes you won’t even be able to find the things that they’ve mentioned online because they’re so not notable. So, that’s another thing to look at as you are getting your itineraries planned. Speaking of itineraries, I hope you’ve all grabbed the handouts and I want to just peek through and again, the handouts are yours to keep and look at more at length later. But I want to peek through and highlight some of the different things again, for you to notice, look out for that can happen while you’re on your trip.

So, we’re going to take the great exciting leap of trying to find our itineraries. Okay, I’ve now pulled up the handout on Experiencing Dubai. Let me know if you can see that on the screen. So, I’ve included actually pretty much all of the itineraries that I have in the six-figure travel writing roadmap in that handout that you have because they all show different things. So, I want to point these out to you and again, like I said, you can look at these more at length later on, but there’s certain things that I want to point out to you. So, I’ll just go over why they’re different in the beginning and then I’ll circle back with some specifics.

So, this Experiencing Dubai one that I have in here, this is a hotel-organized press trip. So, this is notable because it’s done by the Oberoi and the point of the trip is for you to cover Oberoi and in order to give you more things to help you cover that, they’ve included some activities. So, the next trip, this is a conference trip and it’s also a fam trip. And this is an area that nobody that was going on the trip had any knowledge of in advance and it was chosen by the people on the trip on the basis of various activities in the short description that were said to be included in the itinerary, but we didn’t have the itinerary in advance.

The next trip, like Paul said, this is a press trip and this is in also a hotel-organized itinerary, but this is more of an example of an also individual itinerary. So, we were there as a group, but this is very similar to the type of thing that you would get if you were going somewhere by yourself with assignment and they gave you some things to potentially do. This next one is a very straight press trip. All of the people who are on this trip had assignments or places that they wrote for regularly or they were an editor, but what’s particularly noticeable about this trip is that it is around a subset of travel. So, a lot of the other itineraries on here are a bit general. They might luxury or they might be a little food, but they’re really trying to cover a lot of bases. Whereas this press trip is really tightly, narrowly aimed at a certain type of publication of people who write for a publication and the types of things that you would need to know in that setting.

And then the last trip I’ve got in here, this is a fam trip that is very much a straight fam trip. In fact, there were even quite a number of travel agents that were on this fam trip. And what’s particularly notable about this itinerary is that it was organized by someone who has never organized an itinerary before for a press trip, but was very excited. And so, I think we were there for about two days and you see we have something scheduled practically every five minutes, and when I say every five minutes, I mean there five minutes in between some of the things on the itinerary on the second day. So, just to go back through quickly, a couple things for you to take note of.

So, I talk about how this Experiencing Dubai is a hotel trip. It’s a hotel itinerary. And so, when you’re on a hotel trip, something that frequently happens, similar to the person that I mentioned in the blog post and the newsletters leading up to this call, is that you have a lot of free time. So, on this whole day we arrive and then we go to the hotel and then we are there. Then the next day, we are there and then eventually we do something. So, on hotel trips you tend to have the actual itinerary, like the final itinerary which just has tons of blank time. And this is time where you probably want to be doing things. You want to maybe be going windsurfing or you want to have a private cooking class or something like that and when you see big holes like this on an itinerary that comes from a property, you really need to be asking them “What else can I do in this time?” Because I’ve seen way too many people go on trips like this and then they’ve gotten there, they’ve relaxed or whatever, they’ve walked around on their own, and then they find out that there were other activities that they could have been doing and they’re really bummed because now they’re actually packed with stuff to do.

So, anytime you’re on a hotel trip or any trip where they just give you a big blank slate of time, always push the PR person who your contact and ask “What else can I do during this time?” rather than just be at leisure and relax, okay? So, on this other trip, like I mentioned, this is a trip where it was a fam, but it was a blogger trip, so we were all going to write about it, but we weren’t necessarily knowing in at advance what we were going to write about and we have been drawn to this trip for a couple different activities. So, one of them was swimming with tuna, so it means the largest tuna in the world. Now, in reality what happened was that this was a totally cloudy day, it was a little hard to swim with the tuna, it was really cold, and they didn’t mention that it took like an hour and a half on the boat to get out there and we really only swam with the tuna for 10 or 15 minutes.

So, this is something that you can read about what that experience is like in advance. You can also ask for a little more information, but this is probably the amount of information that you’re going to get on your eventual actual itinerary. Likewise, this visit to the Apiarian Center where they have bees and they had a really nice internal thing where they showed you the bees’ lifecycle and had different honey you could taste, but then they also had you go out and be with bees. For instance, I’m allergic to bees. If they told me that we were going to go out and be with bees in advance or if it said that here, I would have totally told them. But it just sounds like it’s a very educational thing. So, it’s important to look out for anything on your itinerary that you might be allergic to, unable to do for health reasons or injuries or anything like that.

For instance, this didn’t happen, but it says Discovering the Delta Natural Park. Sometimes, to a PR person, it could be clear that this is kayaking. They could write this and think that it’s 100 percent clear to anybody that you would explore the Delta in a kayak, but they don’t actually ever say “kayak” in here. So, again, this is the kind of thing where it might not say it, but you do need to make sure that anything that you can’t do doesn’t gum up the works once you actually get on the ground.

So, for instance, this bee thing was hilarious. They made me kind of wait by the bus and watch everybody so that I could see it. So, I was kind of looking with my zoom lens from far away and then as they started coming back, they were like “Oh my God, Gabby! Run on the bus, the bees are following us!” So, they were all coming back in their bee suits and I was hiding in the back of the bus. So, these things can happen and they can be handled, but it’s much better if you can figure them out in advance.

So, someone has a question over here: “How do you avoid going on a trip with many people and those participants stealing your idea or just having many people with the same article idea?” So, let me get to this when I talk about follow-up. But in small answer to that, as you’ll see on this itinerary in particular and also the Long Island one, we were here for three days and we did quite a few different things. So, the likelihood that you’ll be on a trip with every single person publishing an article either focusing on every single one of these things or who comes from the same geographic area as you — usually when they pick the trip they try to spread these things out to avoid that issue — it’s usually pretty small.

So, on this trip for instance to go back to what I was saying about things that you might not know about that you need to look at on an itinerary and ask about before you get there, is like nautical activity. So, here’s a time where they said that we’re going to, but they don’t actually even quite say. They say “One of the elegant ways to enjoy the waters is on the board of a sailing ship, letting the wind do all the work. Allows for an unforgettable panorama view of the Delta.” So, does this make you think we’re going to be on a sailing ship, that we are going to sail ourselves as in be running the sails, or that there will be sailing involved?

None of them, but in the end, we were just on a boat with the motor running and we didn’t actually sail and we went to the mussel bed and had champagne. So, we didn’t really get a tour of the mussels. We didn’t really actually get to sail, so sometimes there’s some really nice marketing writing in your itinerary and that’s the kind of thing that again, whenever you finally get your hands on the itinerary, you want to ask as many questions about it as possible to make sure that whatever article ideas you have are in fact, possible.

So, let’s skip forward to the Lake Placid one. So, this one like I said, and you’ll see this from the concept of suggested evening activities and potential stops at, this is more of the type of itinerary you’d get when you’re traveling by yourself in an early stage itinerary no less, of different things that you could be doing during your trip. And what happened in the actual instance of this trip was that we all checked in totally differently and then we were just on our own, similar to the other hotel tour, for a few hours and I think I did take a stroll around this and maybe also go to the mains street and then I still had time to spare. And they said “Dinner at Generations” which is the hotel restaurant or another local establish and it ended up that there was a dinner at the hotel, but the time just wasn’t listed on our itinerary.

So, this is the kind of itinerary that anytime you get anything like this, it’s important to realize that sometimes you do completely have time to yourself like on hat Dubai itinerary I showed you. And sometimes things have changed and they have actually decided which one of these things is going to happen and just not told you. So, when you see something that’s vague like this, it’s always important like I said, to be checking in at different stages before you get physically to the trip to make sure that if decisions have been made, they’re the decisions that you would’ve wanted, or that you at least know about them so that you know that you need to show up dinner at 7:00.

Now, this one I wanted to pinpoint again because this is a very different itinerary in terms of including things that are very specific to one slice of the travel industry. So, as you look through this itinerary, you’ll see that it’s very, very detailed. You know, we get picked up at this time, when we go on our half-day program we see this person at this time, this person at this time, this person at this time, this person at this time. So, this is another really good example of a lot of different presentations/demonstrations or meetings. So, here’s where we have a site visit. A site visit is one of these walkthroughs where you’re in a hotel, a convention center, a museum, a historic home, something like that and they are showing you, not a tour, not like a historic tour, not somebody who’s telling you stories, but they are showing you the venue from the view of somebody who is writing about it as an industry professional as a review.

So, anytime you see site visit, that’s what that means. Going through further on this itinerary, you’ll see that while the first day had a nice bit of detail, it kind of starts to drop off. So, like we check in we have a site inspection, we can grab a bite or a few bites to eat on the North Shore, explore Waikiki on our own. It starts to get very vague and so when you see itineraries like this where some things are quite specific and some things are quite vague, that can be a bit of a warning sign. It can mean that the person organizing the tour is still in the middle of organizing this stuff and it’ll be set up later. It can also be a warning sign maybe that this part of the tour is very funded and this day of the tour is not funded by anybody. It means all sorts of different things, but when you see this kind of waving back and forth in the level of detail and the specificity of where you’re going and what you’re doing, that’s always something that you want to drill down and ask more questions about because similar to the Dubai itinerary that we talked about, these empty spots can and should be filled with things that will help your stories to make the most of your time.

So, this last itinerary. I don’t want to spend too much time showing you because I would just love for you to read it on your own so that you can see how incredibly crazy this itinerary was, but one thing that this itinerary does do really well is that it gives lots of great background information about each of the places that we’re going to visit, potential story angles, and what’s interesting about it. However, the fact that that creates so much space between the different times on the itinerary makes it a little bit difficult to tell just how crazy this itinerary was.

For instance, anytime there’s a 7:00 a.m. and you don’t actually need to drive anywhere that far that day, that’s a bit of a warning sign that your day is crazy and that they’re trying to stuff an unreasonable number of things in there. So, we ended up this day, I think we got home at 11:30. So, we had to skip doing the outlets, all of this stuff got completely pushed back, we went to dinner maybe at 7:00 or 8:00 at this thing that was supposed to be at 7:25 and then we got back at 11:30 because there was also beer tasting going on during the dinner. So, then they pushed the breakfast, they cancelled this theater without telling us they were cancelling the theater, they also cancelled the [ceilings] a bit, and then we went right to this place and we actually had breakfast there. So essentially, this whole thing got cut and they didn’t actually even tell us this at dinner. We basically found out when we went to leave the hotel the next morning.

So, when you have an itinerary that’s unreasonable, what typically happens is that by the second day it’s figured out. Somebody, the handler, the driver, somebody has figured out that it’s not feasible and some changes have started to be made. And so, this itinerary is great, like I said, for you to just read when you get a chance. You see 10:30 in one place, 10:45 we’re leaving, 11:10 we’re somewhere else. We visit all these different places. When you see an itinerary like this, like I said, it’s great to have this background information, but it means that you should do yourself, the organizer, and everyone on the trip a favor and try to get them to tone it down in advance.

So, let’s pop back over and wrap this puppy up for today by looking at follow up. The thing about following up is that there’s two sides to the follow-up. There’s the follow-up that you do and the follow-up that the PR person and everybody else that you met on the tour does or may do. So, in terms of what follow-up you should do, it’s quite simple. Whoever was your contact, thank them, let them know you’ll let them know when the stories come out and pass on your regards more generally. If you had really good conversations, if somebody went out of their way to help you on the tour and you have their contact information, then it’s great to send them a small thank you note. But right after the trip, that’s really the extent of what you need to do is a small, but sincere, especially if you had a good connection, thank you for the trip and let them know that you will let them know when the stories come out.

Now, it is not uncommon, unheard of, or in any way surprising and you will start to get this if you haven’t already, for the PR people to be following up with you to an unreasonable, in terms of publication timelines degree. There’s people who I have seen follow up in the middle of a trip with print journalists to ask when the story will be out. And not only did they follow up to ask when the story was going to be out, they gave us as two different points in the trip, extraordinarily long questionnaires that they wanted us to fill out about the experience.

Now, if you’re having us as consultants on your trip to evaluate your destination, they we are consultants evaluating your destination and should be paid as such. If you are having us as writers who are there to write about your destination, then that is where you see the feedback unless we feel like we need to talk to you about it in advance. So, if you have somebody who is expecting you to do something that’s additional type of work, so to say, on your trip, you need to kind of explain to them that’s not what you do, that’s not what you’re there for, and it’s not correct for you to be giving you feedback to them in this way because you’re going to be creating an editorial publication and they will find out about it then.

But these days, and you may have heard this, people don’t tend to write negative things in travel writing and it’s not because of shilling or because things are sponsored. It’s because people who are traveling, the end reader, they’re not really interested in hearing about the bad things that happened on your trip. They want to be inspired to go places and hear about what they should do places. And so, editors will usually tell you not to even waste your words writing negative things, but what can happen is not only is the PR person following up with you more often than is really prudent/has any bearing on your publication to see if your story is out yet, but you also start to get emails from people on the trip that you’ve met. Whether it’s the owner of the hotel that you gave your business card to or the PR person you gave your email address to or it’s the tour guide at the museum or something like that.

I recommend being as clear and as early as you can “Don’t call me, I will call you. Thank you so much for this and when there is a story to show you, I will give it to you.” And just keep repeating that refrain because the people who are following up with you too frequently are probably doing that with everybody else and annoying the crap out of everybody else and they’re not getting repeat visits and good coverage. So, it’s a good thing to do for the industry as well as yourself to help these people understand that publications have timelines that you operate within and that you are a freelancer and you are not responsible for those timelines.

Now, a second thing that I just want to touch on really quickly and then I’ll let you go, is photos. I had seen this a couple years ago in fact, on that Lake Placid trip that I mentioned, and I really taken aback by it because the person was quite rude to me, that places whether it’s venues or destinations are either asking you for the photos that you took while you were there or straight up expecting them. And if any of you guys have had this happen to you, drop it in the chat box because I’m trying to figure out how prevalent this is, but it’s kind of become a thing where people will say “Oh, we know that you took such great photos today and we’d love to see them and share them. You can send them to us.” And if this has happened to you or if it happens to you in the future, make sure to be really clear that I create content, I create words and pictures and I sell them and that I will be using these photos for publication and if you would like to by a number of them, buy the copyright to them, then you may do so. But you can buy the copyright to them and that’s not unlimited copyright, it’s single-usage.

So, I actually had a person, and this was many years ago on that Lake Placid trip which was really like we might go here and we might go there, you do what you want to do. It was a horse farm or horse training center. I didn’t ride the horses, I didn’t go near the horses, I didn’t do anything with the horses, and she basically demanded my photos because we had been there for an hour and I had to kind of educate her because this was clearly the first time she had ever had journalists come. But his is becoming an increasing thing. And so, particularly if you know you will be taking a lot of photos, if you are specifically a photographer, make sure to clarify this in advance with the venue. You want to let them know that you will be taking photos on the trip, you’re not sure if they will include a photographer on the trip, sometimes destinations like the Tourism Board will hire a photographer to go with you on the trip and take photos during the trip that you can use with your stories. And in those cases, they still might ask you for your photos, but it’s even more ridiculous because they’ve paid somebody to take photos for those days and they don’t like them and now they want your photos instead.

So, if you know that that’s going to be a big piece of what you do, let the person know in advance that you will be taking these photos and they are for your copyright and your editorial use and if they would like to be purchasing those from you that they can do that, but that they shouldn’t be expecting that. So, if there’s a venue, like I said, that you’ve gone to along the way, let them know again, and the same thing for editorial use blah, blah, blah and just that you didn’t create the itinerary, this was the itinerary that you were given and you weren’t told in advance that they would be expecting your photos, but that that’s just not possible.

So, don’t cave in to this. It’s really not a cool thing that people are doing. It’s the new type of eroding content rights for writers that deserve to be paid for things. So, don’t let them bully you in to having the rights to your photos. If they want to use them in social media, say “Oh, thank you so much. Why don’t I post it and then you can re-tweet me?’ Period. Make a hard line about it and if any of you feel like you’re being really bullied and you can’t say no, write me about it. And on that note, I’ll get to my email address in a second, but as I mentioned, in the upcoming weeks we’ve got two other webinars on press trips. Next week, we’re going to look at how to prepare for your press trips and not the thing that I talked about today about how to negotiate the itineraries and things like that, but how to set up stories for yourself. How to get that aspect of your press trip preparation done. And because I’m going to be on a flight next week on Thursday, wow that’s like two countries from now I can’t even imagine, because I’m going to be on a flight next Thursday, we’re going to be having the webinar on Wednesday and it’s going to be at noon Eastern, 9:00 a.m. Pacific.

So, mark that down if you want to join us. And then the following week, we’re going to be talking about how to do the on the ground work of the press trip. So, we talked about that a little bit. Some folks had questions about how to deal with “that person”, but we’re going to talk more specifically about how to do those interviews, how to get those stories, how to ask those questions, and how to hip check “that person” out of the way so you can get the photos. I mean, sorry, how to wait patiently and get your photos.

So, thank you so much for joining us and for staying long, so many of you, this week. And again, if someone is bullying about your photos, you write me. This is the hotline just to ask me what to do and I will go lay the smack down from the rest of us on that person.

So, thanks so much for joining us. I’ll stick around for questions for a little bit, but like I said, the questions about some of those other topics I’ll handle in other weeks and I hope you guys have a great weekend.

And Larry had a great point about the photos. He says “The request for photos is another reason that I always take multiple shots of each things from different angles, even if they are only slightly different. That way I have some that the venue can purchase rights to and still have some that the magazine can use since they normally want more liberal rights for their use of it.”

Yeah, and this is another thing about the photos to keep in mind. I’ve had times where I was on assignment and I was doing the photos for the assignment as well. And often, the magazine and your photo contract might say they’re purchasing all rights or some rights to every photo that you’ve taken during that shoot in which you’re under assignment. So, that’s another thing to bear in mind as well.

Securing Interview Sources That Make Your Article Sing Transcript

Download (PDF, 263KB)

Let’s go ahead and get started. This week we’re going to talk about securing interview sources. The reason I spoke first last week about how to do interviews and how to do them successfully and how to get the right quotes is that I feel like talking about where to find sources is kind of putting the cart before the horse if you are afraid or intimidated by doing interviews because me telling you where to find them and especially me telling you “Oh yeah, you can completely talk to the president of a national tourism association” is only going to make you more intimidated if you’re feeling like you, either because you didn’t go to journalism school or because you’re new at this, aren’t feeling 100 percent about your ability to do interviews.

Last week when we spoke about how to do interviews successfully one of the things I really emphasized was that you can do an interview, and a long interview at that. You can talk to someone for half an hour or even an hour and not actually end up with information that’s going to help your story. And so this week I’m going to start by talking about who you need to interview because part of securing the right sources for the story you’re working on is identifying what quotes and what information are really going to make a difference in your final piece.

April’s got a great question here that I just wanted to answer quickly because I don’t strictly have a slide on it which is, is it better to do an interview over email or by phone? And when I was looking up some other people’s thoughts on interviewing before this call I saw a really funny piece which I actually linked to in the blog post and the email about today’s call, but it wasn’t the whole piece so much that was funny.  I guess funny isn’t the right word, but there was a particular quote in there in which the person said “Yeah, I always do interviews by email both because then it’s easier to check the quotes, but also because I stopped reporting my stories 30 years ago. And I say that because it sounds funny, but it kind of gives you a hint of how journalists view email interviews.

Email interviews are kind of seen as lazy, as an easy way out, but also a lot of editors just don’t accept them. For instance, if you are writing for a very, I don’t know, arrogantly internalistic publication is the right word, but a very high on the ideals of journalism outlet like the New York Times with its famous press trip policy. Not only are they going to not like or perhaps accept you doing email interviews, they’re going to want you to do them in person rather than on the phone which is its own whole disaster for freelancers because it takes way more time.  And a publication like that is also going to want you to record and transcribe the interview and give that to the fact checkers along with your story, so it’s even, even more time.

That goes to say that you might have instances in which doing an email interview is okay. However, especially if you’re new to doing interviews, I really recommend doing them by phone because you’ll get better information that way. Because people tend to do email interviews, people who were on staff for publication say, people tend to do email interviews rather than phone when they have a specific piece of information that they need or when the source has a hard time going on the record and it’s better for the quotes to be checked by somebody in advance.

I can’t really give you an answer one way or the other because there certainly are times that you can do email interviews, but also depending on who the source is, they might feel like they don’t have time to do email, to sit down and write and answer questions, but getting them on the phone for five or ten minutes would be something that would be easier for them to fit in their schedule.  And I’m going to have, towards the end of the call I have a script that I use when I email sources to set up a call and I’ll show you that as well so we can talk more about the scheduling aspect then.

The main things that I want to talk about today are, like I said, I want to start by talking about does your story need sources and what type of sources do you need for this story? Who exactly do you need to be reaching out to? And just to kind of get your gears rolling a little bit, I’m going to ask later for some examples of stories that some of you might be working on to workshop the types of sources that would be good to talk to. So if you have any stories that you’re thinking about pitching or that you’ve already pitched and that you’re working on, but particularly ones you’re thinking about pitching, get those ready for when I ask for some ideas to workshop for later in that section.  And then we’re going to talk about where you can find people and I have some tricks that I use that I’ll share with you and if any of you guys have tricks that you like as well, I’d love to hear that.

The thing today is that a lot of the useful ways to find sources are based on some application or another online and they change. Like I was checking out on LinkedIn because I haven’t used it to find sources in a while, but I used to use it almost exclusively and they really changed a lot of their settings and what kind of search results they allow you to do with a free account and they’ve made it harder to get the journalist accounts. So that’s almost out as a way to find sources. So if any of you guys have things that you like, feel free to drop them in the chat box so I can share them with the rest. And then like I said, at the end of the call we’re going to talk about how do you reach out to people and I’m going to give you my script and I’m going to tell you the things to make sure to include.

I used to do a ridiculous number of interviews every month and we talked last webinar about how much time you typically need to set aside for an interview and I mentioned that when I first started doing them I would set aside a half hour and maybe even an hour and I would just talk the interviewee to death. I would just ask them every single thing about the topic and then walk away not really feeling like I had necessarily gotten anything useful in terms of specific quotes out of the call. And so if any of you are wondering if you weren’t with us last week about how long you should set aside for interviews, these days unless it is a profile of the person and the whole story is about that one person, I generally recommend setting aside 15 minutes for each interview.

Even though this looks like a lot of interviews, if you’re doing four in an hour even if I had four different articles that I had to do for one magazine, if my schedule worked out that way I could just sit down and in one day do every single interview. And that sounds crazy and tiring, you kind of get into a flow with it, but the thing is that’s how staff writers work. That’s how people who, not so much now because there’s not so many dedicated news rooms anymore, but that’s how people who have to write three, four, five, six stories a day for a newspaper, that’s how they do it. They just sit there and they’re just on the phone all the time.

Somebody had mentioned in the chat box that they do prefer to be on the phone and it’s the kind of thing where it can definitely be intimidating at first. I remember I would put off scheduling my interviews until I felt up to the task, but once you get used to it it’s just a part of the job. So before I get into talking more about the specifics of where to find your sources and who your sources should be, I want to talk about how to know if you need them.

Sometimes this is really cut and dry. Sometimes your editor tells you in advance that this story should have three sources or that every story should have one source for each business feature or something like that. So sometimes you more or less don’t have a choice about what number of sources you’re going to be speaking to, but other times it’s really up to you. And another way to look at this is that you might also be sourcing as in getting interviews for pieces that you’re doing even for content marketing work. And in that case, it’s really great actually to include interviews because you can up the rate on the content marketing. And you’re obviously producing a better piece in the end, but it allows you to add an extra layer as well to your pricing.

One of the best ways to know if you should be getting other people on the phone for the story you’re working on is if you’re expertise is enough. So what do I mean by that because this is kind of tricky. So what if you live in Japan and you’re writing an article about traveling in Japan and you’re writing it about an area that you know very well?  Does that mean that your expertise is enough? What if you used to teach English as a foreign language in South Korea and that’s what your story is about, specifically ESL in South Korea? Does that mean you’re experienced enough?

This is a really tricky thing to look at yourself and understand if you’re not used to doing interviews because you’ve pitched a piece because you know it and you think you know what to write. And if you go in with the mindset of “Well this was my experience and this is what I want to write about”, then when you do the interviews you’re just going to ask them questions to reinforce what you already say which isn’t going to be a productive use of anybody’s time, but you can certainly shape the quotes into your piece. However, when it’s best to use interviews is a time when the article might be about a topic that you know well, but it’s not strictly about your first person experience. It doesn’t mean it’s not a first person article, but the point of the article, the real substance of it isn’t your experience.

In this case let’s go to the teaching in South Korea. There’s a difference between writing a story about your own experiences teaching in South Korea versus tips for people teaching in South Korea.  And it can be really easy to say “Oh well I know what these tips are”, but if you saw the blog post or the newsletter before this webinar, you’ll notice that I talked a lot about the power today of social proof which has really always been the case. We all know that testimonials help sell things, that people check Trip Advisor and Yelp before going to restaurants.  We all know that people want other people’s opinions. If they don’t know something well, they want a recommendation. And when you are writing, even something as simple as a round-up or a tips article, even if you have experience with that thing, the reader doesn’t necessarily know you, they don’t know — I mean first of all, they don’t know how deep your experience is, but even if you tell them, what do they have to go on?  It’s not like you’re including your resume as an attachment for them to double check or a link to your LinkedIn profile showing that you spent two years in South Korea for example.

Having multiple voices to lend credence to what you’re talking about can really help with your article. And in service pieces such as tips pieces or round-ups are one of the areas where this is least used, but can have the best results.  So again, the difference is are you writing a piece about your experiences teaching in South Korea where all the stories, all the anecdotes, all the facts are going to be specifically things that happened to you and thus, you are the expert? Or are you writing about tips for acclimatizing yourself to the culture as an ESL teacher or tips for successfully teaching ESL in South Korea if you’ve taught other places or have a background with other places? That’s really the difference here. And so again, if you’re not familiar yourself with making that distinction, the best way to go about it, the best way to look at it is, is my experience, am I the person, the subject of this story? Or is the subject of this story either someone else entirely, for instance, perhaps you’re writing about a hotel that’s just opened. The hotel is the subject. Or is the subject actually the reader?  And service pieces or advice pieces where you’re telling the reader how to do something, the subject is the reader.

In that case even though it’s based on your expertise and your own experiences, the subject is actually somebody else. And in that case you need to look at what’s going to be most beneficial to the subject. So Carrie asks here, can you do both? And I think what she means is can you include your ow first person anecdotes as well as ones from sources? You certainly can depending on the piece. Carrie tell me if there was something else you mean there. You certainly can include both, but it really depends.

It’s the kind of thing where another example that I used in the blog post and newsletter proceeding this call was women’s magazines. So magazines like Redbook and Cosmopolitan as we all know, have tons of stories like 15 Ways to — I’m trying to think of ones that don’t have to do with sex because that’s all Cosmopolitan seems to have on its cover.  But like “15 Ways to Get a Bikini Ready Belly before Beach Season” or something like that. They have all these round-ups that are very service-oriented.  And the way that they make these, not only new, but also more worth paying for, more relevant, more authoritative than something you might just find online or some kind of anecdote, is talking to experts.

Often, these pieces might start with a first person lead.  However, it depends on the format, it depends on the column, it depends on the publication. So while you can include your own experience and weave in that of others, it really depends for the publication at hand, you qualify as an expert. So this is something that I think a lot of us who, especially people who aren’t as familiar with magazines and haven’t been published as frequently, it’s really easy to forget that even though you are familiar with something, that’s not enough for an editor. Or that’s not enough for a reader.

One of the things that can help here and we spoke last week about whether you should include interview sources in your pitch and how to go about doing that. But one of the things that can help if you find that you’ve been pitching pieces that are more service-oriented, so they’re more advise-oriented pieces, or their round-ups and you haven’t been hearing back from editors, it’s probably because your expertise isn’t good enough. That’s one of the big things that it can be.

Obviously it might be that the idea isn’t a fit for their publication, but if it’s a great idea and you’re not hearing back, then you’re not showing the editor clearly enough why you are the one who should be writing this piece. And one of the best ways to do that is say “I’ve already spoken with the owner of this business about being featured in this profile” or “I have a relationship” or “I already know” or something like that.  So one of the ways that you can make yourself more attractive to an editor and more qualified to write a story is to be self-aware enough to know when your expertise isn’t enough and you need to get source and to make sure that you line that up and mention it in your pitch.

I don’t want to dwell on this too long, but I do want to workshop some story ideas that may or may not need sources to talk a little bit about what type of sources you  might include before I get into a more bigger picture list of all the different types of sources that you can use for different articles. So whose — I’m going to pick on people from Pitchapalooza if nobody has any ideas. So tell me some ideas of articles that you’re either working on or that you’re thinking of pitching that we can talk about what type of sources you might include. Come on guys, I’m going to pick on Pitchapalooza people whose pitches I already know about if I don’t have any ideas.  Oh good, we got some, okay.

Trends in the food scene in Santiago. Yeah, this is a great example.  Okay, great, great. Okay so I’ve got three here that I’ve got already, so I’m going to start with these. So somebody who is writing a guide book — is it just to Chile or also to Argentina, I’m not sure Steph? But somebody who I know is working on a guide book for an area is — Chile, okay great — so is gave the example of trends in the food scene in Santiago. So this is the kind of thing where you as somebody who lived there could very easily write up what the trends are, but to do this for a magazine you absolutely need to have other people weigh in.  And then the question is who should be weighing in?

This is a really prime example because for a story like trends, you actually want to have a mix of authority sources and everyman sources and we’re going to talk about the difference for that in a second. But in this case, you know when you watch the evening news or something?  I typically don’t watch the news in the U.S., I only do in Italy, but I imagine they also do this in the news there. But they often have the kind of man-in-the-street thing where there’s a broad vest journalist standing outside somewhere and maybe it’s a U.N. Summit on environmental change or the Environmental Goal Summit that just happened and they’re talking to people outside. They’re talking to people who are maybe protesters or people who have just come to watch. They’re talking to diplomats as they’re coming out. This is the kind of everyman reporting that you would include also in this trends in the food scene style piece.

You might while you’re out at a restaurant ask the person sitting next you “How did you find out about this restaurant?”, “Do you eat out often?”, “How do you think this compares to other restaurants?”, “Are there particular things that you’ve seen start recently in the food scene here that are notable or that you think that you haven’t seen or heard of somewhere else?”, but then you’re also going to mix that with authority sources. So those would be, not just people who own restaurants, but also perhaps somebody who works with the tourism board, someone who works for the local hospitality organization, or even the mayor or someone from the mayor’s office.

That would be the kind of sourcing that you would use for a story like that.  Well we’ve got another one here which is a nice different example which is one specific attraction.  Now I’m not quite sure what the story angle is on this. If you want to drop that in as I’m talking about it that would be great. So for the World War II Museum in Sicily, if you want to write about this, it depends on the type of story.  If you are writing again, a first person story about your visit to the World War II Museum as somebody who had a relative that was in an internment camp, you could write that without any sources just comparing stories that you’ve heard from growing up with what’s going on in the museum.

She says that this is for World War II magazines why Sicily was such an important part of the war, great. So if you’re visiting an attraction at a site and the point of your story is to use that attraction to paint a larger picture, then it’s especially important to get the voices of people who are authorities on that topic. So this is the kind of thing where, I’m always very careful not to knock people’s blogs per se because they have a very different purpose than magazines, but this is the kind of thing where if somebody were writing about a visit to the World War II Museum on their blog, they would write about what they saw, they would maybe describe the exhibits, say how they felt, maybe say some quotes from the tour guide.

As soon as you start adding the tour guide in there then you’ve got some sources, right?  However, a tour guide at a museum is typically not going to be an authority source. They’re not going to be something not even that an editor would care about, but with the reader as well.  So for a reader they might be like “Okay. The tour guide said that. Huh. Okay”, but if the tour guide was somebody who fought in World War II, if the tour guide is a professor who regularly lectures on World War II at the university and volunteers his time tour guiding, if the tour guide is in Italy. For instance tour guides, not for attractions that’s different, but tour guide for regions have to have if not one, but several master’s degrees and take a lot of tests on their area of expertise in order to get their license.

You can build up how the tour guide does have a background, but what would be even better would be to visit the museum, to look at the museum, to talk about what’s in the museum, and then to include sources who might be professors. Or like I said, people who have in fact fought in the war, who are survivors. So those are some other different types of sources that you could bring in there.

Now we’ve got one more and Marta I’d love if you could tell me the angle on this as well. So we’ve got one more that’s again, very different, that I want to talk about here.  Marta’s mentioned reindeer crossings in the arctic. That’s a fantastic story. That sounds great, I can imagine the pictures. That sounds so cool. I’ve done some research myself with the Sami people in Northern Sweden who herd reindeer and reindeer herding is its own whole other story. But the reindeer crossing that Marta’s talking about sounds like a more natural occurrence and not like they’re being herded.

Herding reindeer to help people with food — oh it is related to people.  So this would be the kind of thing where if someone is herding the reindeer, I would definitely want to hear from them. I don’t want to hear why you, as the writer, think or have heard the reindeer are being herded. I want a quote from somebody who is herding the reindeer about why they do it. And I want to hear — she’s saying that it dates back to the 1920s — I want to hear from their mouth, not from yours, that this person’s grandfather did this and his grandfather before him and that they have been doing this every year even in snowstorms. And I want to hear an anecdote from them about one year when it was really hard because there was a big blizzard or something like that.

This is the kind of story that you could just write what you had observed, but talking to those sources, especially that kind of everyman’s source who has a story about a different iteration of this annual even that you weren’t there for, can really add to the fabric of your piece. Okay, great.  Thanks so much Susan and Steph and Marta for sharing those examples. Those were really great and I’m so glad you brought those up.

I want to get now into what I was just talking about in more specifics. So I spoke about how there’s really two main types of interview sources; the interview sources and the everyman sources. And I’m going to talk more about some examples for that, but if those two concepts of authority versus everyman don’t make sense to anybody, drop that in the chat box and let me know and I’ll expand further. So one of the interesting things is that both of these types of sources can be set up either in advance or when you’re on the ground. And I think we tend to think “Well if I’m going to interview somebody like an official or somebody with the tourism board or a business owner I need to set that up in advance, but if I’m going to interview just a random person to get their opinion, I won’t know who that is beforehand and I’ll need to find them once I get there.”  But this is actually not the most true thing and in fact, sometimes the best interviews work in reverse.

Sometimes the best everyman sources that really make your story because of the ripple factor, you set up in advance. And what I mean by that is that it’s kind of an old school, pre-internet way of going about things, but some people still do it. So a lot of journalists used to, before they arrived in a foreign destination, make sure they had some contact on the ground who was going to be their local guide and introduce them to the scene. And I was just speaking with somebody at the North American Travel Journalist Conference about a very interesting time when she did this. So she was going to India for the first time and they didn’t have a contact. And so she was about to leave, not just for India but another trip before that so it was about three or four weeks before they were going to be in India but they’re about to leave the U.S., and they didn’t know who — not even who was going to host them, but they just didn’t really know very much about what they were going to do in India because they just didn’t have the a connection.

She was at a gallery opening and just saw this stunning Indian woman in a sari and said “Okay, well that’s going to be our person” and she went up and started chatting with her and the woman needed to go somewhere to a different event, but said “Here’s my number. Call me tomorrow and we’ll talk about your trip.” And sure enough, she called the next day and not only did the woman remember her, but the woman said “Okay, great. I spoke with my mother, they’re going to pick you up at the airport, and this, this, and this.”  And so the woman had gone out of her way to start to set up things for that person to see in the city.

This is one of the great things about setting up everyman source interviews in advance is that you might reach out to somebody perhaps who owns a local business. There’s a really interesting, I can almost see it from where I’m sitting, but there’s a really interesting brewery restaurant across the water from where I am in Stockholm which kind of calls itself Brooklyn Brewery even though I’m sure they’re not trying to infringe on that trademark. But they say they make Brooklyn style beer with local Swedish ingredients in their cuisine and they match the beers to the Swedish cuisine and they’ve got this brew master that they’ve imported from New York and all the chefs are Swedish and it’s meant to be this interesting cultural amalgamation.

That would be the kind of thing where I could say “Hey, I’m from New York. There’s this cool thing in Sweden. I want to do a story”, even though everyone is doing these stories now. Pretend I wanted to do a story about the Brooklyn/Sweden connection and about based on this statistic that I read somewhere that one quarter of the people in this neighborhood in Stockholm wished they lived in New York City. So I would reach out to this guy and I would say “Hey, I’m from New York.  I’m coming and this is the story that I’m working on. I want to see if I can talk to you.” And the kind of thing that usually happens in that case is that they not only say yes, but then they say “Oh, great. I’ll have you for dinner, and I’m also going to bring this person and this person and this person.” And so then they start to connect you with other people.  And so when you do that at the beginning of your trip it allows for all of these wonderful opportunities to open up after that.

Now the flip-side is that authority interviews, sometimes these can be hard to set up in advance. Especially if you don’t have a story. Whether it’s you’re trying to get in touch with a tourism board that’s usually very easy to meet or somebody who might be the head of an association or an important business owner or something like that. Trying to get them in advance by phone or email might be hard, but once — God, sorry I don’t know what’s happening — but once you’re there to just pop into their office and say “Hey, can I talk to you for five minutes? I’m here from across the world”, it’s usually very difficult for them to say no. So either of these types of interviews can be done both ways and obviously you can do both types of interviews exclusively by phone or by email if needed, rather than being in the location.

Let’s look more specifically about one type of interview. So I talked about how getting in touch with somebody for an everyman type interview can be really useful in terms of opening doors to other interesting people in the location that might have great inputs, not only for the story that you’re working on, but maybe for other stories. But one of the best types of interviews and most important types of sources for you to reach out to no matter what story you’re working on, is the Convention and Visitor’s Bureau or the tourism board. And I used to get flak from one of my editors that I wouldn’t tell the CBB I was in town and I would just go around and do my own stuff. So I certainly understand the different reasons that you might not get in touch with the CBB, either because you’re pressed for time or you don’t have enough story set up, or whatever it is.

I have to tell you that if you have the time to take a half hour or an hour to go meet with them and they’ll often set you up with a lot of other things, so it might be more than a half hour or an hour. But if you take that time one of the interesting things that can happen is that it’s not like they’re just going to tell you about the top attractions. They’re not going to just read the visitor brochure to you which I think a lot of us worry about the tourism board because if you just go to the Tourism Information Center which is different than going to see the people who work for the tourism board. At the Tourism Information Center they do tend to specialize in what most tourists are looking for just because that’s most of the people who come in the door. But if you go instead to the actual tourism board, their job is to help journalists with stories and they are perfectly accustomed to the fact that not all journalists already have a story. Sometimes you’re there trying to figure out what your story is.

What that means is that they’re going to throw away the book, so to say, and they’re going to tell you off the top of their head what is helpful for you. So I remember I was working on a story, I think this is the story I was working on when I spoke to this person, but I had a really interesting story a few years back where I was working. I was writing about downtown shopping areas that had no chain stores. Everything was locally owned and independent in the whole downtown main street area and I was speaking with somebody and she told me, even though it wasn’t specifically in downtown, that “Oh I should come. I didn’t live that far away” and they had this really cool thing called Press Bay Alley which was where the local newspaper used to essentially just store their junk. It used to be just an alley and then they embarked to clean it up and move their stuff out of there and help a bunch of small business open there.

There was a maker studio and a really cool café and a greenhouse and all sorts of neat stuff going on. So even though that wasn’t necessarily something that I could use for the story I was working on at that time, it was a great idea for all sorts of other stories. And so when you talk to people from the CBBs they are going to know their destination so, so well. I’ve talked to people who work at CBBs and they’ve only started two or three weeks ago, but they tend to have already been living in the place that they are telling you about. So what happens is that even if they can’t tell you the statistics of every hotel in town, they know and are very happy to share with you the quirky story of the guy who started the hotel where the whole entire is leather and they feature guitars from famous rock bands and how he collected them and what’s the best time of day to catch him to get his stories.

That’s really what they’re there for. And so by either taking an interview with them before you get to your destination or before you start working on your stories, you’re going to have just a wealth of characters. A wealth of people that they have recommended you talk to because they have talked to all these people and they know who is interesting. They know who can give a good interview and who just in and of themselves or particularly, their business and the struggles they were through to start it, is a great story just on its own. So that’s my just a little sales pitch about talking to tourism boards because they’re really an underutilized resource I think today by a lot of travel writers and they certainly understand the desire or the need if you’re writing for certain publications, to not have sponsorship from the tourism board. But that doesn’t mean that you can’t use them as a resource to get story ideas, yes, but also connections to interesting sources.

Let’s talk about different types of authority interviews. So I mentioned already people who work in the CBB. That’s one for sure and there’s a couple other ones in here that I mentioned when we were talking about the herding reindeer, the World War II Museum in Sicily, and the trends in the food scene in Santiago. But I want to expand on each of these and talk a little bit about where you can find each of these and how and when you should use them.

Talking head types, I think that this has become a main stay of broadcast journalism and I do see this in some print/online outlets, but most of us aren’t using these people. Most of us aren’t using the kind of vaguely qualified, but off quoted experts that appear on the news whether it’s a talk show or the evening news. But these can be great people because they’re essentially professional quote givers. So they’re going to be an easy interview, they know what kind of things you might be looking for, or what makes a good story, and they’re reputable.  They’ve also been featured on CNN or I guess I shouldn’t use news networks, they’re so polarizing these days, but they’ve also been featured on other news outlets.

These can be great people when you just want to have a source for, a lot of journalists call it color or texture, but you just want to have a quote in there to lend some more authority to what you’re talking about.  Especially if it is a trend piece. So this is the kind of thing where, especially trend pieces that tend more towards general travel topics or aviation, there’s a lot of talking head types for things like that. Though you can also find ones that are more food-focused. For instance, you might say Anthony Bourdain would be a talking head that’s a little more food focused even though it would be a little of an odd characterization to call him a talking head. But Andrew Zimmern is one like that. There’s a lot of these people who have a bit of celebrity in the food travel scene that are also good for this.

One of the good ways to source these as well can be people who have popular blogs on these topics and when I say popular, I mean very seriously popular. So this is going to be in the past seven days, I’m talking more about people who are more household names.  o another really untapped resource though is hospitality and tourism professors.  I think we tend to even forget that there are people who have PhDs in tourism who can speak to these trends and who write papers about these trends and spend their whole days studying and teaching students how to study these things.

This is probably my favorite resource that I invite you all to further take advantage because just like the talking head types, professors are very used to speaking, they’re very quotable, and they’re also shockingly accessible. And so they’re really great people to reach out to, to get that extra level of authority in your pieces.

We talked about CBBs, but another thing that’s above and beyond a CBB, and also really great because it’s a bit more independent per se, is an association professional. And so there’s so many associations, I’m always boggled by the ones that I come across. And I used to write for a magazine that was specifically for people who plan association events.  And so there’s associations out there that are incredibly small in scale and ones that are international. There’s associations just for the teachers in a state or the teachers in a county. There’s associations for people who work in insurance only for a specific industry. There’s just so many different types of associations and the ones in tourism that you might be aware of are there’s associations for bus tours, there’s associations for tourism boards. So every state almost has an association of tourism boards for that state.

These association people, kind of like the talking heads, one of the main things that they do is advocate for their industry. So they’re also very used to speaking, they’ve got this nice credential to back them up, and they also have a big picture view about trends and about their industry, so they can be very useful in that away. Another good get, so to say in terms of an authority source, would be an actual city or state official for the area that you’re looking at talking about. And again, this is the kind of thing where you might think that it’s very hard to set these up, but there’s almost always somebody at that level, at the state or regional or city level who you can speak to. It might not necessarily be the mayor themselves and sometimes it is, but just get in touch with that press person and unless you’re doing something really controversial, they tend to be more than happy to give you a quote because they have their own press quotas that they need to meet and every story that they get in is a tick in that box and it helps show that they are getting their job done.

Now business owners, this can be very easy to set up or very difficult to set up. And this is kind of a weird thing because if you want to write about a very quirky boutique in Soho in New York, it’s great to get on the phone or get in person with the owner and talk about how they sourced the unique things that they sell. However, I’ve seen something unfortunate happen with a lot of small business owners. They are probably my biggest offenders in terms of trying to tank my story the day of my deadline by saying “Oh actually, I can’t do it this month.  Do you think we can do it next month?’ I swear. I will get the president of a CBB for a huge city on the phone, no problem. They make time for me, they understand the value of this, but somebody who owns a small business that is not getting this kind of publicity that would be a great thing for them to hang on their wall, and so on and so forth, they’re like “Oh sorry. Can we do this next month?” No we can’t do this next month, you’re not the only person in this story, the story isn’t about you, I have a deadline, grow up.

This can be a double-edged sword and this is one of the reasons why it’s really great to get these interviews done in person if you can when you’re onsite and for sure on the phone by just calling them and trying to catch them, rather than by setting up a specific time. But they can also be the very, very best sources in terms of information because they have their hands in the day-to-day operations and they know the founding of their business. And so they are just a great wealth of stories and also often quotations because somebody who has started a business tends to have to talk about it a lot and they have a really good flow with the story of their business.

Now I’ve made a distinction here between CBBs or tourism boards and DMOs or DMCs. So I’ve put DMCs also in here and this is a term that I don’t use so often that you guys might not be familiar with, but what these are is Destination Management Organization or Companies. So the difference between a destination management organization of some kind versus a convention and visitors bureau is how it’s funded in a way, but it’s almost more than the DMO is a third-party versus the tourism board which is an offshoot of the city itself. So it’s the difference between essentially non-profit versus profit or government versus contract or something like that. That’s the division there.

It’s an outside party that’s’ for profit who isn’t started specifically with these high-minded ideals or goals like a tourism board would be that they have to check in with. They’re more profit-driven. So DMOs and DMCs can be really great and because like a small business, they’re a company. They know their story and they know what they’re selling, but on the other hand they’re selling something. So unlike a tourism board which is there for the promotion of the region, DMOs and DMCs can be a little more promotional, I guess is really just the best word, about how they speak about themselves and the destination that can be a little too PR-y, blustery, sometimes what you need. And obviously that’s a gross generalization and some are better than others, but I say this because I’ve worked for a group of magazines where we were not allowed to use them in fact because it had just turned into all the quotes that we were getting and all the interviews had just become too self-promotional.

In some cases, there won’t strictly be a tourism board an area that you might be writing about and you do need to go to a DMR or DMC, but this is something to keep in mind if you find yourself in that case. So everyman interviews, how do you set these up in advance? How do you find them besides just talking to somebody that you run into in your destination? So I’ve never personally used couch surfing, this is me slightly going out on a limb, but I know people who have used this.

I’ve heard from somebody today that couch surfing like mentioned earlier, these apps are always in flux about their usefulness, but that couch surfing is more of a hook-up site now which is a whole other story. But a lot of the people on couch surfing, or another corollary here is Wanderlust which is only for women though I must say, offer you the opportunity to meet people in a destination for coffee and just chat and have them be a resource about a destination. An Airbnb host can also be really great for this, but one of the things that Airbnb has started doing which can be a great source of stories and I’m just waiting for somebody to start specializing in this because they’ve made it so easy for us, is that Airbnb has these new experiences which are just ridiculous things. It’s like a DIY press trip basically, but for non-journalists where you get to follow an interesting person around and do cool things.

That can be a really cool concept if you are going to a destination and you haven’t done too much research to find out what Airbnb experiences they have set up. Because they’ve got some really cool things in there at are typically not what you would expect to do in a destination and that always makes a great story. So there’s a lot of other social networks that are specifically for travelers. They kind of come and go all the time and change in terms of their pricing and things like that, so I didn’t want to a list here. But if any of you guys are familiar with A Small World, that was really one of the first ones of this variety.

Now I’ve mentioned Twitter on here and I didn’t mention Facebook and that was because Facebook has so many privacy settings now that you can’t really just go through and see who’s talking about blah, blah, blah and reach out to people that you don’t already know. People who are outside of your social circle. But on Twitter you can see who’s tagging Stockholm, who’s tagging Tokyo, who’s tagging Brooklyn, and just say “Wow, that looks cool. I just got here, do you have some tips for me?” or something like that.

I’m going to get in a second to talking to people or to the extensions of people that you already know, but Twitter can be a really great place to source, if not specifically talking to in person someone, but just to get these tips and specifically quotes that you can then throw into your stories. Now another really great resource for that is local bloggers. So I haven’t done this myself in a while, but it’s a very good and easy way to get that pre-arrival everyman interview who introduces you around that I mentioned earlier.

When I say local bloggers, I mean really digging in and who is the person who locally has a blog specializing just in Fika for instance, which is the African Coffee Brig here in Sweden and is writing about the places with the most authentic Swedish cakes. Cake culture is a huge thing here in Sweden. So that would be the kind of thing where you could find both some tips from that person and also reach out to them and tell them that you’ve been loving their content on cake cafes, but you also would just like to talk to them about food trends and what they’ve noticed and do a more general interval as well. And because they do have a blog on that topic it makes them somewhere between everyman and authority, but what I really like about local bloggers is that you can get them to talk both about what they’re an authority as well as about other things as somebody who lives in that place and experiences that culture every day.

Now I mentioned earlier the woman who needed an Indian connection and walked up to a person in a gallery, but usually she would reach out to her social network and say “Does anybody know somebody?” And this again, is kind of a good old-fashioned thing, but even I’ve used this.  For instance, my typical social circle is very different, but also somewhat travel-related. So my husband is a computer scientist and not from America and most of our computer scientist friends, most of his colleagues or people he went to his PhD with, are also not from America. So I was going to a part of France that I didn’t know very well at one point and he said “Oh, Phillipe is from there. Let’s ask Phillipe for some recommendations” and we said “Hey Phillipe, what should I eat while I’m in Lyon?” and he said “Hold on, let me ask my friends” and he went and got a bunch of recommendations from his friends who still live there and sent me all of those. And somebody invited me over for dinner and somebody else wanted to meet me at this bar, and so that can be again, old-fashioned, but the friend of a friend is a really great way because these days everyone is so global that you never know who has a really strong connection with a place that you might be very good friends with and you just didn’t realize that they have a very strong connection with this place and can hook you up with some people on the ground.

Now I want to be sure to talk about HARO or Help a Reporter Out. Have any of you guys used this or are any of you guys familiar with it? Drop it in the chat box, let me know either if you’ve used it or just if you’ve heard of it. Oh okay, so some of you haven’t heard of it. Some of you have just heard of it. Interviewed by Oyster, check it every day.  Love it.  Aileen say “Yes I’ve gotten great tips and been a source, even got a job from it.” Oh I want to hear about that. Email me about that, great to see you by the way.

This is really interesting. So for those of you that have a blog and don’t know about HARO, I would recommend checking it as Susan said, checking it every day because this is an opportunity for you to be a talking head authority source based on the content of your own blog. So it’ H-A-R-O, Help a Reporter Out. And the way it works is that — I was going to do a flip-over to Firefox and show it to you, but it’s really the interface is pretty easy. So I’m just going to talk about it and then we can get on to some other things, but the way that it works is that every day, I believe three times a day, I don’t know if you can set it to happen more often, but they send out an email. It’s HARO, H-A-R-O. Right here on the list here. Every day they send out an email where they include just hundreds, it’s not hundreds in one email, but over the course of the day hundreds come out, of requests from journalists for specific people that they need as sources for their stories. And then there’s also another section which is people who are offering to be sources.

You can put the most granular type of everyman source that you need in here. To go back to women’s magazines for instance for a second, you can say “I need a woman who is between 35 and 45, divorced, has two teenage children, and is thinking about getting remarried, but concerned about how it will affect her children.” So that’s how specific you can be in terms of your HARO request and you will get people. It is crazy. I have used this, I needed to do a story for a magazine for private pilots and they need so many photos. They needed photos of the airplanes, of these things, but they needed photos of the runway from the air and I personally don’t fly planes. And now I have some friends who fly planes, but I didn’t back then, and I needed photos from the air of a very specific, very small airport. And I put it on HARO and in a day practically, not even that long, I got an email from this person who had 20 odd photos and they were exactly what I needed.

When you have something very specific that you’re looking for an everyman type interview for, this is a really great place to find it. And the thing is that it’s important when you’re doing everyman interviews to make sure that the source is highly relevant to your story because when you’re doing a non-authority source and the source is tertiary-ly related to your topic, it can really just sink the social proof level of that source and by extension, your story.

I talked a little bit when I was talking about these sources about where you can find them, but I just want to offer as well because we’re getting very close on time here, a couple other ways, networks so to say, or tactics for finding sources. So like I said, LinkedIn used to be the go-to place to find sources and it’s changed a bit and it’s kind of gotten to the point where you need to have a membership of some kind for it to be useful in terms of sending in-mails through LinkedIn. And in-mails, if you’re not familiar, are something that LinkedIn guarantees will get responses and they guarantee that by refunding you an in-mail credit if you don’t hear back, but they allow you within LinkedIn itself to connect to people without having to find their email.

I’ve found that in reality, it’s not the hardest thing to find most people who have a job’s, professionally now, finding their personal email can be different. These days so many people are on Twitter and Facebook, that you might be able to just get them that way. So in a sense, the necessity of in-mails on LinkedIn has decreased, but LinkedIn’s searches, they’ve also capped but you can still do them. And this is really the huge, huge usefulness for us journalists of LinkedIn, is that you can search for people who have a specific type of job. They have a specific title or they’ve listed specific credentials, they work at a specific company or in a specific city, or they previously worked at a company or in a city.

Anytime you need to say get a source for food trends in Santiago and you might know some restaurants, but you can also go on LinkedIn and put in chefs or restaurant owners or maître d’s in a place and search that way and people on LinkedIn will select if they want to talk to you to be featured in a story. And often, especially people who are in professions where they want to be contacted, they will just include their email address right there on their profile on LinkedIn. But the other really great thing about LinkedIn in terms of finding sources is the LinkedIn groups.

LinkedIn has all of these professional groups. They have ones if it’s a professional association. For instance, like the Society of American Travel Writers or The North American Travel Journal Association, some of these professional associations also have a group on LinkedIn, but they tend to be a bit more affiliation-based. So they’ll people who work in tourism with an eco-tourism focus that are small business owners or something like that. So by getting on these LinkedIn groups you are not only going to see the people who are commenting and see in advance if they’re a good source or not, but you can also as a secondary benefit, pick up some good article ideas there by looking at what people are talking about. So this is really great if you have a beat or a focus area that you write about frequently.

Now Facebook groups are also really great for this, but can be harder to get into if they’re a closed Facebook group and you might not even be able to find out about them. So that’s another unfortunate point about the Facebook groups, but the LinkedIn groups, I don’t think there’s a way to make them invisible, just closed and it’s pretty easy to get into them. So we talked about HARO, another thing like HARO though is ProfNet. So this is just for professors.

I talked before about the value of all of these academic tourism and hospitality folks that we’re not using and you can certainly — every academic in the world has a website with their email address. It’s just impossible not to. So you can usually just find the person and put in their name and their university and get their email, but what if you don’t know who you’re trying to find? So ProfNet has listings of professors that want to be contacted for articles and they talk about what they know about that they can speak to.

Another thing I didn’t mention here because you kind of need to have the mindset of dealing with academic papers, but is Google Scholar.  Google Scholar is really what all of the academics use to collect their citations which means the number of times that their papers have been mentioned. So what you can do is you can go on Google Scholar and look for a certain topic and then see who has the most citations. So whose paper on that topic has been quoted most frequently? And that tells you that that professor has authority on that topic.

There’s also a lot of specialized forums. These have been around since the dawn of the internet, but if you have a really specific subject area that you want to look into, you can go into these forums and see who’s been commenting a lot. And these can really, like I said, back to — let’s go back for a second — Things like A Small World or social networks that are travel-related as well. Or they can be something that’s more specific for your subject area like a forum for chefs in New York to talk about where they like to eat late night and what restaurants they will all want to check out.

A couple that I use a lot that can be really useful are award lists and association membership lists. So every industry, every single industry has awards of some kind if not several, that might come through an association or that might come through a larger for-profit organization.  But going through the awards lists is a realty great way to find sources in an industry that you’re not familiar with who are definitely qualified.  Association membership lists are really great for again, like a starting point in an area that you’re not familiar with, but especially if you need to get an interview done quickly or you’re having trouble finding email address because it’s just a great big hit list and you can put a bunch of people in Google and see what you come up with.

Now I just want to mention for a second something about finding email addresses. I mentioned before this call that it just kills me when I see people selling lists of tourism board contact information because it’s all on the internet and the second that that list is put together in a PDF it’s already stale and you might be contacting the wrong person. So if you, particularly for tourism people, if you’re looking to find somebody’s email address and it’s not readily immediately apparent on the website, my favorite thing to do is just put the person’s name, their full name, in Google and then “@” the URL of whatever they work for and look that way. And you would be surprised how often it comes up.

This is really important because when you’re trying to set up an interview, you need to email the person directly to their primary email address. You can certainly write them through LinkedIn if you have LinkedIn credits or through Facebook or through Twitter or something like that, but don’t email a bucket email to set up an interview because it’s going to be a very slow response if you do get one.

I just want to talk for a second — we’ve got one question, hold on.  What if you can’t find a contact name? I really can’t find any contacts for the Chile and tourism board. So this is an interesting point. What if you can’t find a contact name?  I’m trying to think if there’s ever been a case where I really can’t find a list of staff for a tourism board. So what I just said about a name and the “@” URL dot com or dot org, I do that for press releases. So if I’m not finding an individual name, I’ll put in the name of the organization and then type a press release and put that in Google. And it’s very rare, especially for a tourism board, for them not to have released press releases.

Then what happens is that you might get a press release and they always have to give contact information in a press release. It’s a standard part of a press release, but when tourism boards hosts their press releases on their own site they often take that information off. So I use Google to find their press release through other sources and see who’s mentioned there and then I start with that person. But also you can look on LinkedIn. LinkedIn also has a lot of names and if that’s not working, I also do a Google search on the website itself for staff or for a directory or something like that because sometimes there’s not a clear link on the website to a staff directory or to a listing that, but it is there somewhere, it’s just not linked to.

You can got to the site map of the website, but what you can also do is you can go in Google and write — I’m going to type this in the chat box — so you write URL dot com. So whatever it is that you were trying to search and then you write your search terms. So we would say staff list or just staff. So you should all see this, but you put URL dot com and then colon just in a normal Google window and that restricts the Google search to start only on that website. So that’s another good way to go about it, but I’ve never had a case where I can’t find contacts for the tourism board. So one thing you can do if you’re not finding the email is to just find the phone number and that’s always going to be listed somewhere. You can usually find their marketing collateral or something that has a phone number on it or you can look just in the good old phone book or something and find their office trunk line and just call and ask who would be a starting person to interview.

If you really are having trouble finding the email address for a person or a place, call them and get some receptionist on the phone and say “Oh I need to know the right person to reach out to for blah, blah, blah” and they’re like “Oh yeah, it’s so and so” and they give you the email address. So the cases in which you wouldn’t be able to get an email address that way are like if it’s a famous person or a CEO or something like that, but in those cases you should be going through their listed contact which should be available online.

What should you include in the email when you reach out to people?  The name of the publication you’re writing for or your pitching if this is something about you’re setting up an interview before you’re pitching the story. The perspective publication date if you have it. The deadline if pressing, but you typically don’t want to include the deadline, your deadline because what happens is the source will try to push off the interview until your deadline and nobody wants that. If people ask you what your deadline is, I always tell them a week before my actual deadline. But put the deadline if you need to talk to them in the next two days.

What you want to talk to them about again, and brief, we’re not going to be telling them all of our interview questions or anything like that, and then why you’ve selected this source. So I’ve included on the next slide my very, very standard thing that I use for formulating a type of article that I do often and in this case it’s with a source that I speak to with some regularity. So in the subject line I just say in lowercase “interview and photo request” because I need photos from these people as well.  So it’s also important to be brief. Just like any pitch, when you’re reaching out to an interview it’s very easy to spend way too much time talking about why you’re reaching out to them ad what the story is about and all these things, but you should not because they won’t read it and you won’ get your interview.

When you’re trying to set up interviews you need to keep it as short as humanly possible. Anytime you’re asking for a favor from anybody who has no need to do it for you, you should keep it short, but particularly in this case. So here I have a little intro. This is where I would say if I’m reaching out to them cold how I found them or why I’m reaching out to them for these. So I’ve thanked them for helping me with my previous piece and then I said “I’m working on” and I talk about what the story is about and then I tell them that I’m going to be featuring their destination.  So that’s why I’m reaching out to them and this is the angle of the story, this is what I want to talk to them about. And then I tell them that I need help with two things and I say the length of the interview.

This is also really useful to say so that they don’t feel like “Oh long is this going to take? How much time of my day? I don’t know if I can really do this.” So I always say the length of the interview and then I say with who to the best of my ability. So if I’m emailing a museum and I want to talk to them about a new exhibit, then I’ll say “with someone who can speak about the new exhibit” or “with somebody who can speak about evens at the museum” or something like that. I say not a name because sometimes that person’s away or they’re just out of the office, but I tell them the type of thing that I’m looking for because that helps them if you give them flexibility. That’s really important.

Then because I need to get images for this publication, I tell them I need images from them and I tell them at the same time that I’m asking for the interview so that have a heads up. And then I just say thanks so much.  You can also say, like if you’re on a tight deadline you can say “Would it be possible for us to speak about this in the next two days because I’m on a tight deadline?” or something like that.

I mentioned that you don’t always want to tell them your deadline, that you typically don’t want to tell them your deadline because they can say “Okay well you have two weeks, I’ll get back to you.” I try to always follow up in a week if it’s not too urgent or a couple days with interview requests if I haven’t heard from them, but sometimes they’re just really flakey. They’re like “Oh yeah sure. Yeah, let’s talk about it” and you send them sometimes and you don’t hear back and then they just keep putting it off and putting it off. Or they want to do on email and you’re not allowed to do it on email. Or they want to do it for a different issue because they’ve looked on the magazine’s website and they’ve seen that there’s another issue about blah, blah, blah.

Sometimes you need to be pushy. I would say it depends on the type of stories that you’re doing, but maybe it’s 20 – 30 percent of the time.  And the thing that’s like — I have never, ever, in hundreds of interviews had a negative result of being like “No, I need to talk in the next two days. Can we do that?” I’ve never, ever, ever had any negative anything about that because when you’re interviewing somebody, you are getting them press. You are doing them a favor. It is a favor for you, but it’s also a favor for them and you could interview somebody else. Don’t feel bad about following up and don’t feel bad about being clear about what you need from them and when you need it by because they can always simply say “It doesn’t make sense for me to be in this story at this time. Can you please find somebody else?”

Until they say that and again, that’s incredibly rare and usually a result of their poor time management rather than you being pushy. So unless they’ve said that. Unless they are self-aware enough to know it’s just not going to work out, follow up with them. Do what you need to do to get them on the phone. Just call them and try to catch at random times of day.  I have to do this often and it’s totally fine and no one ever gets angry about it. So don’t feel bad if you need to be pushy, but do what you need to do to make sure that you have the information that you need before you have to sit down to write the story so that you’re not stressed.

I had such a great time chatting with you guys today about interview sources and thanks so much for the great examples.

The Magazine Landscape: Where All The Assignments Are Hiding Transcript

Download (PDF, 243KB)

Hello everybody. Today we’re going to be talking about the magazine landscape. Where all of assignments are hiding. Today we’re going to talk about is the literal magazine landscape.

Where can you even buy magazines these days. Like I said, it’s sort of changing. A lot of magazines are available online and I’m going to share some interesting facts that I learned at the American Magazine Media Conference recently about that. And also, how the magazine industry has changed around visual content and how that can present more opportunities for you. And then we’re going to look at five different types of magazines, that you might not be considering, that are looking for travel article content.  And often these can pay quite well and have less back and forth, less editorial indecision like you might have at a larger magazine. If any of you have written at large magazines, and we’ve talked about it before… Often when you’re writing for these large glossies, you get in this case where you’re talking to one editor who gave you the article and you’re working on it with them. And then you’ll go to another editor and that editor will have a completely different idea for the article. And you’ll have to rewrite it. And then it will go to the editor in chief and they’ll have a different idea for the shape of the article and you’ll have to rewrite it again.

In those cases, even though those can be really great to have, they can be really bad for your hourly rate because of all the back and forth involved. So I’m going to talk about five different types of magazines where that is not going to be the case and where they also have high hourly, high pay rates in the first place.

And then we’re going to talk about three ways to find new magazines. They are super simple, that you can do yourself. So you can have a new title coming in everyday.  And when I pitch a magazine I’m not saying only the magazine database, I’m going to show you three different ways to have new magazines coming into your life.

Before we start talking about the different magazines, I want to talk a little bit about magazine pay.  Because that’s really why we all want to get more articles assigned, right?  I was thinking earlier about a conversation I had with a gentleman in London last year, that I know I brought up during the “How to Break Your Trips into the Maximum Number of Magazine Articles” webinar. And he had said to me, and I went and looked up the quote because I wanted to make sure I had it right, On a 1-3 day trip, he can break that into 10 articles. Or rather, 10 sold article assignments.  And I think for a lot of us that are struggling to get our first clip or to break out of the $25-$50 online market or just not getting a lot of magazine or article pitches, this sounds like a really impressive number.

The thing is that when you really break down the types and the quantities of articles you need to be selling in order to make a living as a travel writer, that’s kind of what you need to do. And I remember when I first was starting to work as a freelance travel writer. I was on, I guess a webinar on the Freelance Writer’s Den, which is a more general website for freelance writing and there was a guy in there that did a webinar on travel writing and he Bob Howells. And the interesting and sad takeaway that I got from that webinar as that if you want to make money as a travel writer, you can’t travel, because when you’re traveling, you’re not at your desk and you’re not writing. And so his kind of setup was to spend the least time possible traveling and the most time writing.

I personally prefer the opposite: to travel all the time and work essentially part-time. But what I took away from that is that you can’t go on a trip and sell one article, one big article. Even if it’s a feature. Because the pure time you’re spending away from your desk just doesn’t add up. Say for instance you want to earn $40000 as a travel writer. That breaks down to about $800 per week and $160 per day.   Which means that if you are on a three day trip including travel, that’s going to be $480 that you couldn’t have earned because you didn’t have time to write. So if you look right off the bat if you’re just selling one feature and a few blog posts, you’re barely even covering the time, the sort of comp time where you’re not doing other writing work.  And so, to go back to this gentleman that I was talking about that says he can do 10 articles from a 1-3 day trip, you know if you look at it like that, if they are $300 feature assignments or $300 shorts, now you’re getting $3000 of content out of a three day trip.  That’s really the type of number we want to be aiming for.

This whole time that we’re talking about pitching for different types of magazines and what is the breadth of the magazine landscape, I really want to talk about getting more work for the trips that you’re already going on. How does that translate into pay? So, in the chat box over here, as I’m talking about the different types of magazines, just chime in with which of these magazine types you think the pay is best. So as we go over these three different types of magazines.

Consumer magazines are probably the best known ones.  These are the ones you’re going to see when you go to a bookstore or a doctor’s office. These are the typical magazines that you are able to buy, like Conde Nast Traveler, Travel + Leisure, Midwest Living, Denver’s 5280, LA Magazine, all these kinds of things. So that’s a plain, old consumer magazine. But there’s also the niche consumer magazines like Horhel Cruise, which is for cruising, going on cruises. Cruising World which is actually for sailing, curiously. There’s  Food + Travel and all sorts of food travel related ones. There’s even specific ones for types of food.  There’s Taste of Italia which is an Italian food and travel in magazine.

That’s on the consumer side. But then there’s also the same general and niche side for trade magazines. And what trade magazines are, these are those that you couldn’t buy, even if you tried. They go on a very specific circulation for people who work in a particular industry. So general travel trade magazines there’s the group called QuestEx that produces a lot of these that you might have heard of like Travel Trade West and they’ve got several online, but they’ve got about 20 different magazines that are general travel trade magazines. Just Travel Weekly, things like that. So, Skipped, if you’re familiar with Skipped these days. It’s a bit of a travel trade publication.

There’s also niche travel trade. So there’s one for meeting planners or hotel owners or people who do IT in hotels. So that’s a very specific area in travel trade as well. And, as I said, because travel trade magazines are going out specifically to people who work in a certain industry, the reason that you can’t get them is that the way travel trade magazines make their money is they promise advertisers a certain number of eyeballs, which probably isn’t large, it can be in the 4-5 digits, but they’re all people who are spending a lot of money. So the niche travel magazines, like I said, might not have as much of a reach, but for advertisers, they pack a bigger punch.

And the last one I’ve got on here is custom magazines. So custom magazines are the ones, the ones we’re most familiar with are these in-flight magazines. You know Atmospheres from United, American Way from American, Sky from Delta. And there’s a whole world of custom magazines. And I’ll talk a little bit more about that later…  Which do you think pays best? Niche travel trade, niche consumer, general travel trade, general consumer or the custom magazine? Okay, I’ve got some very good writer’s answers. So the first one was, “Niche trade for sure.” And we’ve also got one for consumer. Custom magazines, niche magazines. Great. So, I’m going to go to the next slide…

This is a graph I have used in other webinars, so some of you may have seen it. So this is, of course, a selection. I’m not showing every magazine that exists or necessarily a specific slice of the world. I’ve got a bit of American writing, I’ve got a couple other ones, but largely American. And the scale here is the amount of money you’ll get per 1000 words of text. So of course not every article is paid in 1000 words, you might get a 100, 200, 300 article. But, to sort of even it out, this is per 1000 words. This shows the base rate that the magazine will pay up to the top rate they would pay. So, you’ll see on the far left here, we’ve got some newsstand magazines, so consumer magazines, that are again, a bit niche. So Savannah and Portland Monthly are both niche in terms of geography, but they’re newsstand magazines. And then on the far right, we’ve got magazines that are also newsstand, but also niche. So AFAR is experiential travel and Backpacker is sort of very outdoors, off-the-beaten-path travel.

It’s interesting to look at this because on both sides of the spectrum, we’ve got niche consumer magazines. And so, it seems like pay doesn’t necessarily correlate to those five types of magazines that I showed you when you’re looking at this graph. And I would say that’s definitely something that is true, but it’s hard to know just by the type of magazine, how much they pay. So this is important to remember because you might get into this trap where you go, “I don’t want to pitch the niche magazines or the regional magazines because they’re not going to pay as much as the major magazines like AFAR or Conde Nast Traveler.”

The thing is, that is not always the case. So if we look at the ones that come before Backpacker we’ve got Via.  And if you’re not familiar with Via, that is from AAA, the car insurance association. And we’re going to talk more about association magazines later. But that’s not just an association magazine, it’s also geographically specific. But they’ve got pay rates are up there with these newsstand magazines. And then after that, we have two hyper-niche magazines: Cruising World, which is about sailing, and Modern Farmer which is about small family farms. And then going down from there we have some other magazines that are sort of large: Garden and Gun and American Way. But again, we’ve got Garden and Gun which is a regional magazine that is about the South and American Way is a custom airline magazine. It’s really tempting to cut yourself out from a whole sector of the magazine landscape, but it really varies from magazine to magazine.

Recently, we had somebody sign up for the Travel Magazine Database, and he was telling me “Oh, well this magazine doesn’t use freelancers,” or something like that, I don’t think it pays freelancers on features. And maybe it’s because it’s a Middle Eastern magazine. There’s not a lot of English language pieces because it’s based in the Middle East. And my first thought was, it’s a really beautiful, glossy magazine so if you were to just look at their publication, would you think that they don’t pay writers, probably not.  And so what that means is that if you are a freelancer who is really looking at boosting your income by having more magazine articles for each trip, then that might not be the fit for you. But, conversely, if you’re looking to get more assignments  for each trip, so that you have a guaranteed spot on a press trip, then a magazine like that might work well for you.

When we start looking at broadening our magazine landscape in terms of what we personally have in our portfolio, to have more income, it can also be useful in a pinch if you really need to get on a trip, to know about these magazines that perhaps don’t pay or don’t pay that much.  Because they can help you make sure you have enough assignments.

A super interesting fact from the American Magazine Media Conference: right now we’re in this era of fake news, I’m not going to dive off into politics, but consumers are becoming increasingly aware of the type of news they are consuming and the validity of its source, more so that any era before. Not just in the US, but around the world.  And in the last year or so, and what that means is that a lot of the major magazines are companies that perhaps 5-7 years ago were really worried about losing ground online to new upstarts, have stopped worrying because their brand really carries a lot of weight.

On the one hand this means that you can say they are investing more in visual content, but that’s not always the case. Often they are taking the content in their print magazine and repackaging it. It’s certainly true that a lot of the bigger magazines DO have digital-only content.  I always mention that Men’s Journal runs 8-12 travel pieces online monthly on their website, Conde Nast has a lot of pieces that go up on their newsletter that’s online. Travel + Leisure has these great slide-shows that they pay $1000 a pop. AFAR is really working on their Wayfarer blog. so a lot of the larger magazines do commission things especially for their website, but a lot of magazine are reusing things that they’re presenting online in different ways as well.

In this era of big news that we’re in, the really great thing for us writers is that the places are more likely to pay us a good wage are starting to get more of those ad dollars back. They’re starting to become more attractive for advertisers. And something else that they said at the conference was that, and I’m not sure that this is true, so that’s why I’m attributing it, is that National Geographic is the biggest brand (in terms of user-followers) on Facebook, Twitter and InstaGram. Not just brand in terms of type of magazine, but just the biggest name out there. And so I think that’s really a great thing for us in terms of finding these different places to write because I think that a lot of folks have gravitated toward things online, not just the big magazines, but online in terms of new online magazines and blogs to find places for our work. But these magazines are really starting to invest a lot in their online content and their print content as well, so that’s going to trickle down to us.

Another factor of the current magazine landscape is that magazines, not just have changed how they reach people in terms of online, but the new magazines that are starting have really changed. So somebody earlier thought that niche trade magazines were the biggest game in town in terms of pay. And niche magazines are for sure the biggest growth market. So in terms of new magazines that are opening up every day, I can’t even tell you… whether it’s regional bridal magazines, or regional type magazines that offer 12 or more different titles all around the country.

What this means is that the advertisers that pay for print (which trickles down to us writers) are still interested in paying for ads for these thing. So magazines like these niche trade areas are very interested in serving those small markets and so, these might be luxury wedding in different parts of the country, but they might also be esoteric things, like I was mentioning Cruising World which is a newsstand sailing magazine, but there are a lot of different water sports magazines. I think there’s like 12-14. So everything that you can think of as a topic has a great number of magazines, print magazines, in the US, but even more around the world that serve it. So if you’re thinking, “Oh, I have an article about tea. I have an article about water-skiing. I have an article about kayaking.” There’s probably not just one magazine that focuses on that thing. You have a lot of opportunities to place that article not just in magazines that serve that niche.

The other thing that I alluded to earlier is that companies are producing multiple magazines in various markets. So this works both ways. Companies are producing more magazines on a specific topic in different geographic areas and companies are producing magazines that might be trade and they might be custom for a lot of different markets. So Inc. which is the company that produces a lot of the airline magazines, they have probably 4 new titles that have come on just this year alone. And Amtrak’s magazine Arrive has been redone and it’s now call The National and it’s done by Inc. as well. And so a lot of companies on the hospitality side, whether it’s airlines or hotels, or things like that, are turning to these content companies that produce magazines to produce magazines for them as well. So for instance Inc. Magazines now has airline magazines not just for the Hemisphere of United and American Way of American, but they also do really beautiful and very long magazines for low-cost carriers all over Europe. The type that you would be surprised that they even have a magazine, but it’s really meaty and quite long.

The other thing that is changing a lot is that magazines that have really focused on storytelling have really gotten away from that type of content. And this is an interesting change, because there’s a whole slew, about 5 years ago, there’s Overnight Press, Wild Junket, there’s some different online magazines that all started up right around the same time.  And it’s a tough business model to have a digital only magazine that functions like a normal magazine. So then what’s happened is there was this whole new wave of indie or independently published magazines that make beautiful, stunning print versions that are really almost like books or collectibles that you can’t read the stories online at all.

There are a bunch of those in the Travel Magazine Database… off the top of my head, there’s an Australian magazine about travel, but there’s Avant, there’s Gourmet Traveler, there’s Fine Drinking out of Greece. There’s Alpine Modern. There’s just so many of the beautifully done magazines for niche markets. There’s two around cycling.  One called Peloton and one that’s called Ride Journal. I think they’re both annual, but they’re both just beautiful.  And the thing about those is that they might not have the best budget for writers, but sometimes they might. And even some of the more established ones that come out monthly. Or ones that are very posh. So there’s this one called eNest which comes out of the UK and it has a really hilarious description. It says, “For discerning people who might like to whittle.” That’s the type of magazine that has a budget because it’s been backed by somebody.

Sometimes they don’t have a budget, but they’re always going to be beautiful, beautiful books. And so particularly if you have gone on a trip and you have a story and it’s really great for the story itself and the people and how they belong and you’re having trouble finding a home for it, these magazines can be, I don’t want to say final resting place in a negative way, but a great place to finally get the right fit for those sort of things.

So I just have one more question over here before the next slide.

Kimberley has asked, “How do you pitch these magazines? Is it an LOI or a normal pitch?”

Of all the magazines I have mentioned just now, you’re going to pitch all of them like a normal magazine. Letters Of Introduction or LOI are essentially the same type of thing you would use if you were applying for a job online. You’re saying here’s who I am, here’s what my experience is, would you like to work with me? So, letters of introduction are primarily used for trade magazines. And not all trade magazines use them. I was just reviewing with someone over the weekend, a magazine called Plate, which is a trade magazine for chefs. And it’s got a lot of really basic types of content, basic features around 1500 words, 3-5 interviews and they’re very formulaic and easy to write about trends and topics in the restaurant world. And so we were looking up how you get into that magazine and that one you actually reach with a pitch. So with some trade magazines it’s going to be the letter of introduction and those are the ones that adhere very closely to the editorial calendar.

If you look at a trade magazine and it’s editorial calendar has mapped out the idea for every single article in every single issue, that means that you need to approach it with a letter of introduction. But, if you see a trade magazine with more of a loose sort of calendar where they say let’s do ___ and maybe they have topics, a couple features and the recurring columns. Those are going to be the ones that you need to pitch.

Alright, let’s go ahead.

I want to talk about five types of magazines that you’re not pitching, but should. And again, if at any point you have a question, or wonder what magazine I mentioned, or want me to talk about it more, just throw it over here in the chat box. So, I sort of alluded to these when I was talking about modern luxury:

One of the magazine areas that I think is most useful for travel writers that people neglect are these luxury titles that you just can’t find. So these are the type of magazine that are found for free for people who are in airline lounges or the small, private airport lounges or just arrive at their homes. And these are very, very luxury oriented, naturally.  But they also are primarily, if not 100% travel content. So there’s nothing about business, it’s really aspirational.  Because these magazines are being sent or left in the airline lounges for free because these people are big spenders.

Because of this, the content is really to inspire people to travel and inspire people to spend more. And obviously to get them to look at the advertisers. And the thing about these magazines is that unless you’re a very high net-worth individual, which I don’t think any of us are, they are hard to get your hands on. So obviously we’ve got a lot of these in the Travel Magazine Database. It was one of the things that I really focused on collecting early on because they tend to have great rates and they are hard to find. But you can also find them yourself.

Often these are private airlines, and we’re going to talk more, later in the call about how to find these magazines.  But, just in short, if you find one company, that makes one luxury custom magazine they probably make more. And so PrivatAir actually comes from the Inc. company that I was talking about earlier, that makes a lot of airline magazines.  Modern Luxury, which I mentioned before, they have one here:  Modern Luxury Manhattan. But there’s also titles all over the country. There’s also these luxury guide magazines that are very geographically dispersed and things like that.

For the airline lounge magazines, these are the type of things that I like to call travel adjacent titles. So there’s one that’s called International Property and this is going to be profiling destinations as well as properties that are for sale or very attractive around the country. And what I really like about including these magazines in your consciousness is that when you travel you see and hear things that you would have even thought to see before. For instance, even in the International New York Times has a section on properties that is open to freelancers and so, as you’re traveling around, let’s say you’re in Ireland and you see a castle with a for sale sign, you get some info on the house and pitch that. And it’s not the kind of thing you would necessarily do automatically, but now that you know there’s a home for that story, there’s a spot you can include in your trip. Likewise with a lot of these luxury wedding magazines.  And at the IdeaFest we had, someone said they had just gone to a wedding in North Carolina and it was this beautiful woodland setting that the owner said they are completely booked April through October, every weekend for weddings. And I said, “would you pitch that to a wedding magazine?’ And she said she hadn’t thought of that.

Anytime that you’re staying in a hotel that also has event space, that’s something you can be taking to these high-end wedding magazines or even just a normal wedding magazine and likewise you can also take that to a meeting planning magazine. And we’re going to talk more about those in a minute.

How many of you have know about Association magazines? Just say yes or no over here in the chat box if you do. So there’s a lot of different types of associations out there. Like I mentioned AAA which is the American Automobile Association and there’s the Canadian Automobile Association’s. But I’m sure for those of you who have worked in different industries, or might even know from travel writing, there’s a lot of different professional associations. Like for travel writing you have the Society of American Travel Writers and the American Society of Journalists and Authors, there’s the NATJA- the North American Travel Journalist Association. There’s the international one: IFWTA, International Food Wine and Travel Association. All these professional associations exist in other areas and they all have magazines.

There’s also other associations like we talked about AAA which is one you pay for, but there’s also affiliate groups.  So there’s a Italian-American Magazine, Greek-American Magazine, Irish American Magazine, there’s one for people who are in the NRA. There’s all sorts of affiliate groups, not that all of them have anything to do with travel, and almost always, as part of the membership, they also put out a publication. And that’s an automatic perk of membership. So you’re going to get that, without necessarily subscribing, automatically.

The same as if you’re a high net-worth individual, you’re going to get these magazines automatically coming to your home.  So in this case, there’s a lot of these that are really useful for travel writers. As I mentioned, there’s some affiliate groups, like the ones I listed here for Italian-Americans.  And you might think, “How many magazines are there for German-Americans? Italian-Americans? Or people who knit?” You’d be surprised. So I just mentioned here two that are for Italian-Americans but there’s actually several others. And these magazines, the ones for people who have a certain type of heritage, are often really great from a travel writing perspective because they really like to include those angles like a story about their country, someone who is a descendent who has gone back or just a straight travel story. Or sort of a profile of what’s going on in that country.

For example, I did one for Ambassador, that was a year after the big earthquake, a few years back in Emilio, which is region that produces the parmesan and prosciutto and red wine vinegar. Sort of checking in with the region the year after and as a traveler what you need to know. How you can patronize these business and help them recover. I did another one for them on Pompeii which was having some trouble getting funding for its restoration. So, they don’t have to be straight travel. And these can be some great things for to know about for research interest, like a press trip.  If you just have something that you’re just really intrigued about. For instance that time you just finished college and went to Japan. When I lived in Japan, I had gone to this festival that only happens once every seven years. And I was talking to somebody who had previously lived and taught. I think they were in the Peace Corp or something like that. But they taught in Japan and they were much younger and they had come back every 7 years with their friend that they had taught with to go to this festival.  And he said, oh, yeah there’s another one in the next town that happens every 4 years and this one over here that happens every 3 years.

I never knew that there was this thing about these Japanese towns having these religious festivals at these very odd intervals. So for instance, Tanya could decide that it’s something that she’s interested in and in order to find out more about it, be pitching magazine articles to these types of magazines to essentially, you know, find a different excuse to find out about these things. So these affiliate focused association magazines can be really great for things like that.

Now, the paid associations, and here I’ve listed AAA. But there’s a lot of other ones around this and I think people often forget, there’s this website World Nomads which takes a lot of travel blogs, but they are even an insurance company like AAA. Like Geico also has a magazine, there’s many odd and interesting paid association magazines that you will start noticing now that I’ve started mentioning it to you. Either that you get, or your parents or your friends get. You’ll just start seeing them lying around. And so AAA for instance has 23 different magazines and they’re all very geographically focused. And just as a warning, if you go try to look them up, you need to have the right zip code. So before you try to look up the AAA magazine in a specific area, look up the zip code for that area. So that you have it ready to pop in. If you put in your own zip code, it’s going to go back to AAA magazine that is specific for your area.

Then if you want to do this every hour, you need to clear your location history. So I mentioned VIA, the very highly paying AAA magazine, and they’re all based out of different editorial offices, which can be a good thing and it can be a bad thing, because it doesn’t necessarily mean that if you get in with one editor, that you’re necessarily going to get in with others. But it does help. But that also means you pitch different articles to different AAA titles. And so Via for instance is a very well known literary travel style title, and that’s part of why they pay well, but it’s also a really great clip to get.  And it’s interesting among AAA magazines, because it’s a very large geographic area and often they’re serving a very small slice. Almost like, half of Delaware, but something small like that.

Another thing that I just wanted to touch on are the magazines that come from professional associations. So I mentioned that a couple of the travel associations that you might know about, but there are literally professional associations for everything. And there’s pretty much two minimum for every type of profession because you need to have competition. And so I just put a couple of random ones in here: American Architects Association and Pizza Today. Because I wanted you guys to remember that as you travel, and you find business that really strike you as having a cool back story. Maybe they are doing some interesting marketing, or they are a restaurant that’s doing something really different with their menu or style of service.

I hear a lot of people come to me with pitch ideas around those things that are hard to sell as just a straight piece, like a short news piece for a magazine, because they’re not new. They’ve been around for 3 years or 7 years or something like that. So if you have something like that, that you find on the road, that isn’t new or news, a really good place to profile that business is going to be in one of these professional association magazines of the industry that business is in. And we’re going to get to some more in travel specific ones later. But I just wanted to point these out. The Architects one and also Pizza Today because there’s these things you come across all the time, there’s several trade magazines for hair stylists. There’s trade magazines for everything. And so anytime that you are finding a business that you think just has a really great story or technique or something. You should be trying to place the profile of that business and not just in the airline magazine that does a lot of business profiles or as a round-up of different brands of businesses but also as a profile or a how-to piece in the professional association magazine associated with that industry.

I just mentioned travel trade magazines, a few different types and as I said earlier, there’s lots of sort of classic ones like Business Weekly and Travel Age West. Which are about the industry as a whole association. But then there’s a lot of other ones that are sort of niche travel trade. And then there’s ones that are super niche travel trade. So I’ve pulled together a couple on this list that really caught my eye. And you’ll notice in the first section of these travel trades, they are quite tour oriented and that’s because there’s a very large market for them. People who do tourism of different types are always scanning these magazines to figure out what’s new. What they might include that they didn’t know about previously. Destinations that they’ve never thought of that might be a good stop.  There’s a lot of great regional tourism throughout the US, and some other countries, but especially the US. So they really benefit these people who do these bus tours.

Anytime you are on a road-trip of your own and you’re finding these little, tiny stops between point A and point B, those are great things to take to tour magazines. You have bus tours that are doing a similar thing to your road trip, but with a large group.

I was in the Macaba Region of Spain, outside of Barcelona and I ran into another travel writer doing a visit and it turned out the day we were there doing our visit, there was a little bus tour, and I want to say they were from Dallas, and there was about 8-12 well-heeled ladies from Dallas who like to shop and it was very interesting, many of them were in PR or had businesses of their own that they ran back home, and here they were kind of on this girls trip, some of them knew each other before, some of them didn’t, and so we did this cava? tasting with them and we had lunch and we were chatting with them about the type of tour that they were on. And the thing is there are so many of these little tiny tours around, like I was talking about the affiliate associations, there’s so many tours around so many different types of affiliations all over the place and people are looking for where to bring their little or 55-person bus groups.

It’s from these magazines. So, these are trade magazines and as I was saying in response to a question earlier, some of them you do pitch by letters of introduction. But if you do found something great like this on one of your trips, it’s certainly doesn’t hurt to write them and say, I found this thing that I really think would be good for your audience and then tell them who you are and ask them if you can write them a full-fledged pitch.

Another thing that I had mentioned was the travel adjacent that are very, very niche publications. And there are lots for hotels, and there are lots of meeting planners which I had mentioned earlier. And so, anytime you are in a place that is an event venue, whether it’s a hotel or museum, museums are very common venues for all sort of events.  Obviously a convention center, but there’s a lot of other great things that are venues. In San Francisco, they have the Masonic Center, which is a historic venue. There’s also historic homes that host events.

We were talking about when you go on press trips and you’re on this tour for an hour and a half and they tell you everything. And you’re able to walk around the hotel and see every single room and they are telling you the square footage… and what a waste of time.

The thing is, these are the types of things you can pitch to the magazines that are for meeting planners or in the hotel industry, without having to be somewhere super, super new. Because somewhere I was talking about pitching a trade magazine for people who are different type of niche industries around a business profile or an interesting marketing technique that someone is doing or something like that.

For instance, if you’re walking around the hotel, doing a hotel tour or a site visit as they often call it and they mention that they’ve got this neat in-room feature, I think it was The One Hotel from Miami. They’ve got this amazing screen in the shower that shows people their water usage in real time. How cool is that for a hospitality magazine? And so, there are different types of little kernels of ideas that often get sprinkled on you when you’re walking around on a tour or just doing research for a trip that you would not necessarily think about pitching if you didn’t know about all these little, tiny magazines.

I personally haven’t spent a ton of time with the hotel business ones like Hotel Business Review and Hotel Technology and Hotel Owner, but even now that I’m talking to you, I’m thinking I should go back to my notes and pull out all the little things like this.

Okay, so another thing that I mentioned earlier is English-language magazines in Non-native English-speaking markets. And I know we’ve got a couple people on the call who live in other places or non-English-speaking places or they have in the past. So if you have, let me know in the chat box, if there’s some market that you know of, so that I can share with everyone on the call.

I was recently in Indonesia, but I also spent a lot of time in Asia because my husband is from India. So India, is of course, not necessarily native-English speaking, but it’s a larger English speaking country and so there are a lot of publications in English in India, but you also usually find them in other markets where English is not one of the main languages spoken in that country.

I remember when I was in Singapore, also an English language market. But I went to the store and I was just shocked at the number of Asian magazines from different Asian countries that are English language that are beautiful, glossy magazines that pay quite well. And I listed a couple here, but this isn’t limited just to Asia where English is one of the primary languages.

I see a lot of these in Europe. And in particular I also see, this is another type of custom magazine. But often airports have their own magazines, and they might just come out once a year, but sometimes once a month and so they’re these little, short magazines and they usually focus on shopping and they have a lot of destination content for the types of places that people frequently fly from that airport.

That’s one example of types of English-language magazines. And there’s almost always an expat magazine in any given city. I know in Florence we have one, not even a huge city in Italy, but we do have one. They have one in Prague. They have them in a lot of different places that you want to look for. It’s not just the expat magazines, which are going to have a little travel content. But particularly for the magazines that are serving the well-heeled locals that also speak the language.

Because these are the types of magazines that are probably going to be paying better and also have editors that work more on a level of editorial process that you’re going to be familiar with. And another one that a lot of people forget is the equivalent of primary, English native language magazines. So I mentioned Conde Nast Traveler India here. There are a lot of Conde Nast Travelers and then they have others. They have Conde Nast Italia, but one in the UK, that we also have in the database. I don’t know how many of you use the database, but there’s also National Geographic Traveler in the UK as well.

It often pays when you are on the road, to just stop in the airport newsstand and the versions of the magazines you have at home have a completely different version abroad.  Lonely Planet, for instance, the company is based in Australia, but the magazine is primarily based out of London, they have 12 different versions all around the world. They have a US one, India, Australia, they have the UK and several other markets. I believe they have a Middle Eastern one as well.

Now something else that I mentioned earlier is these custom magazines. So the custom magazines that most of us are familiar with can be like the airline magazines. So drop a line over here in the chat box about other custom magazines you might know about. I think a lot of times with these magazines, we automatically think of the businesses we know. Stacy dropped in a great one here: Grocery Story magazines. Even Walmart was doing a magazine for a while, I’m not sure if they’re still doing it.

In the UK there’s some really, really nice grocery store magazines. And I first became turned on to these, not through travel writing, but through a car magazine. My husband had an Acura when we were dating and we were getting this Acura magazine. And I was like, “Oh my god!  They have some really great road trips in here!” And so I poked around and most of the car companies, and I’ve listed a few here, but another is Rolls Royce . But a lot of car companies not only have car magazines for the owners, they have different editions in different markets.

For instance, we went to Mercedes Benz and picked up a magazine and it turned out to be Canadian Mercedes Benz. And interestingly it’s a great magazine, with lots of great opportunities for freelancers, but it’s completely different than the US one. They have this section “Canadians Abroad”. So if you’re traveling, and you find a Canadian who is doing something interesting, who lives outside of Canada, and if you live in the US it’s obviously easy. But it’s also pretty easy in a lot of other markets, they want a profile. And there’s also, in the top of the press magazines, there’s also Nabuho? Who are also looking for people from the Philippines who are doing something interesting.

The car magazines aren’t’ necessarily just for road trips or car oriented content. You can find a lot of other really interesting profiles in there whether people or businesses.

Now another one that I think about is Cruise Company Magazines. They use these similarly to in-flights to have the information in the back of the magazine about the company and the amenities. But they have a lot of travel content and these come primarily through a company called the PPI Group. Which also puts out the Porthole Magazine, which is a newsstand, a consumer magazine. But then they do all these custom magazines for pretty much every different cruise company.

They’ve got Coast of Concordia which is an Italian company as well as MS Sea Cruises which is another Italian company. Cunard, Norwegian. They’ve got all the big hitters. And some of these magazines only come out annually. So me of them are more common. But what’s interesting thing about this because they are all in the same group, is that if you get an article in one of them, they might automatically use you in another one and pay you a reprint fee.

That’s one of the really nice things about working with magazines that are in the same group. And then another one related to the whole airlines and cruises thing… the next obvious one is hotels. Not every hotel has their own magazine. I see a lot of hotels that I go to where you get the local Dining Out Magazine or the local Time Out magazine. Or, for instance, I was in Colorado recently and there were a lot of really beautiful, glossy magazines in Aspen and different parts of Colorado that they were using instead in the room, but whenever you stay in a hotel, you should always check and see if there’s a hotel magazine there. Because some of the magazines these days are doing some very interesting stuff.

Auberge Hotels, which is a lovely hotel chain. Obviously luxury hotel chains, tend to have these more often than other hotels. But Auberge not only has their own branded of magazine, but they also have separate ones talking about food that you also find. And Marriott, which currently has a whole big content operation that works through, I believe, Contently, they’ve started their own content studio and they are also producing films. Marriott also has geographically specific ones. So, for instance, it’s publication in South Florida, and it’s found in both Spanish and English.

There are five different types of magazines that you might not have thought of, but you should start to factor into the thought process when you go on trips and plan your pitches. But here’s three more places that you can just hop on if you have five minutes each day to find more magazines all the time.

One of my favorites that I’ve mentioned a couple times earlier, is to play ‘follow the leader’ with the company. So I talked about Ink Global and how they do American Way and Hemispheres, but they also do magazines for a lot of smaller airlines that you wouldn’t even realize have a magazine and then there’s a new one coming out. So they’re now doing, I want to say Singapore, that’s called Soak Air, not that’s not Singapore. I can’t remember which airline… but they have a new magazine called Soak Air coming out which we found just hanging out on their company’s website, but there’s also others for private airlines, like PrivatAir. One that shows up in the lounges for private airports. And they have one for hotel chains as well. And so this doesn’t only work for custom magazines, this also works for consumers.

They also have a couple of Modern Luxury titles and you’ll see this for the affiliated titles, but you’ll also see this for the non-affiliated titles. So there’s the Hoffman Group, which is unusual because it’s a major company, but it’s based in Birmingham, Alabama. And they have a lot of really lovely glossy and well-paying magazines, especially about food and the Southern US. So they have Tea Time and Taste of Home and Cooking With Paula Deen and all these other things.  So whenever you find a magazine that looks legit and it looks cool. Check the masthead and see what publishing company publishes the magazine. And then look up the publishing company and see what other magazines they have. I remember I found, and I can’t remember which came first, Five Star Kids by Sterling Magazines, which is focused on super, super wealthy families and travel. And then I looked and they also have four other magazines which are also this sort of high-net-worth magazines that have a lot of travel content for a niche market that you wouldn’t know about otherwise.

Now a similar tactic is that once you’ve found the magazine, leaf through it, check the bylines and start looking up the writers. Because once you get on their website, you’ll see that they are being published (and depending upon how up-to-date the website is and how often it’s getting published), you can find often 10-50 good markets just on the portfolio websites of the writers.

And so like I said with the first one, when you find a new magazine go check out the publishing company and find some new magazines that way. But also, flip through the magazine and find a feature that you really like and then get on their website and see where else they’ve been published.

Now the last one isn’t necessarily something you can do 5 minutes a day, here and there. But this is something I really recommend. Even before I quit my job to become a freelance travel writer, I had all these friends that did all different types of business consulting that were on airplanes all the time. And they had a slew of business class magazines. And I had been collecting economy class magazines from all the different airlines I took on trips. Like when I went to Bali or when I flew a different airline and found the business class ones. And I had a friend show me, from Israel, the magazine Live. which is from Berlin.

This is a great way to not only get airline magazines, but specifically get those ones that I mentioned that you need to be on the list to get. So these car magazines that only go to particular people who have already purchased a car. Or the ones that are for associations. Like my friend who is an architect and gives me her architect association magazines when she’s done with them.

Or, you know, even, this came up the other day, another association that has a really, really great and well-paying magazine is AARP. And it was funny because at the IdeaFest this weekend, we had very disparate ages. We had somebody who is still in college and looking to get herself set up as a travel writer when she graduates. And I had some people who are almost done with their careers and I mentioned AARP magazine and there was this collective, I don’t want to say disgust, but, “Ugh. That’s not a fit for me.” And then I mentioned that it pays $2 per word and then everyone wanted to know all about it.

And so, AARP, which is the American Association of Retired Persons, I believe. Not only do they pay $2 per word, but interestingly, they have 3 completely different versions of the magazine that go out every month and they call them the A book , the B book and the C book, (which I think is really horrible designation). But the A book is for 50-59 year olds. The B book is for 60-69 year olds. The C book is for 70 plus.  And so they put different content in each version of the magazine every month. So what that means is that even if you get your hands on a copy from a friend or relative of one issue there’s another and you never know what it looks like.

As I was mentioning about AAA, that these come to you if you live in a certain geographic area and otherwise it can be difficult to see the ones in other geographic areas. It’s a great thing to have your friends or your relatives collect them for you. And obviously if they have to ship them to you, make sure you send them back the shipping money.  But, I highly recommend letting people know to be on the lookout for you. Because like I said about Geico earlier, I never would have thought about Geico having a magazine that had travel content even though it’s very similar to AAA because they sell insurance, until it showed up at our house one day.  So I’m sure now that I’ve mentioned this, you’re going to start noticing the ones that you have, but let your parents know. Let your friends know. And also, don’t just paw through their mail, but ask, “Hey are you using this, can I steal it?”

So, those are three ways that I like to have a constant, fresh source of magazines all the time. Every time you see one that’s new, check on the masthead to see the company that publishes it. Then check out the writers and see where else they’ve been published. And, also let your network do some scanning for you.

So that’s our call for today. If you have any questions, let me know over here on the side. As always, it was a pleasure chatting travel writing with you. Have a great week everybody.

How To Set Up An Individual Trip From Scratch Transcript

Download (PDF, 274KB)

This week we’re going to talk about how to set up an individual sponsored trip from scratch. Last week we talked about the different types of free travel for travel writers in terms of the difference between a FAM trip (or familiarization trip), a press trip, and the larger bucket of individual trips. Today I’m going to say sort of interchangeably individual trip or individual FAM.

Today we’re going to talk about a couple different things. Because when it comes to setting up a sponsored trip, there’s sort a season, a time and a place for doing individual trips and we’re going to look at when or why you shouldn’t try to set one up. First, we’re going to look at why people would even let you do these things in the first place. As in, given the world today in terms of shrinking magazine budgets, in terms of everybody being focused on their Google ad spend, their videos. Why are they spending money to spend one journalist or blogger anywhere? Then we’re going to look at a pretty crazy road trip that I took (I think it was two or three years ago now) that is a good case study for setting up lots of different types of individual things because there’s lots of destinations some that are different sizes, to let you see the answers to several different questions that I’ve seen that a lot of people had in advance of this call about how to set up certain things.

I’ve been on both sides of the desk about the magazine side of things, but as a travel writer, I was thinking about this when we were setting up the call, I don’t do a lot of funded travel (I feel like), but I guess it’s just because I’ve been doing this for so long. I have taken quite a few individual press trips and some group press trips over the years, but I don’t think I’ve ever had a single press trip request turned down. I know some of the folks that had sent me some things in advance of the call were having trouble getting various things done and I think it’s going to come down to a lot about who you ask and we’ll look at that in a second.

Before we get into the process of setting things up, it’s really important to remember why these people are giving you these opportunities in the first place. The thing is that the reasons have really changed, and we talked last week about this thing called the column-inch formula (if any of you guys were with us there you might remember, but I’ll just re-cap for the folks who weren’t.) The column-inch calculation is an antiquated way that people from tourism boards and PR firms used to decide how much money to invest in a writer who was coming for a trip. What it meant was that they would look at the physical space in a newspaper in terms of inches that an article that this person was going to write would take up, and compare the space of that article as an editorial feature to the price of an ad that was the same size as that article. Then they would say “ok if this ad cost $17,000 then we can spend up to $17,000 on this person’s trip or if what they’re asking for cost less than $17,000, then we should say yes.” So, because there’s so many different ways to advertise now, this has totally gone out the window. I often see people saying, “well I also have a blog and I’m also an influencer and I can offer this that and the other thing.” The thing is that sometime that doesn’t matter. It’s kind of a weird situation now because if you have a huge influence, even if you are writing for a very major outlet, it doesn’t always make a difference to them if it doesn’t line up with their goals. So what this means is that if you are pitching a CVB, a tourism board, a DMO, somebody high level that’s in charge of one whole destination, whether that’s large or small, statewide or countrywide, and what you pitch them might sound fantastic and it would be really great coverage, and it would be interesting stories, but they in their meetings with their bosses and their boss’s bosses and eventually the director of tourism for the whole region have other goals in terms of what coverage they are able to fund at that moment, it doesn’t matter how cool your thing is or how great your coverage is. They’re going to say “great! Go ahead and do that coverage, but we can’t help you with it.”

As we are thinking about how to send emails to these people, specifically who to target and what information we can use to hook them and make them interested in us, it’s really important that we always ground it with a very central and primary look at what is in it for this specific person that you are asking. What that means is that if you are asking the PR firm that represents a destination, you have to remember you’re not just asking the destination, you’re asking the PR person who has a job which is specifically to get coverage for this destination, perhaps a specific kind of coverage. In that case, you might look at the sort of you know success stories that that PR firm has on its website in terms of the types of coverage that they’ve gotten for other places, and that would allow you to know that that’s what they consider to be a win for their client (which is the destination). Likewise, you can go to a CVB and see what articles they’ve shared that journalists have written in the past, and you can see what is considered a win for them. When we say what’s in it for them, it’s not necessarily what’s in it for the it version of the destination, the gender neutral nameless thing of the destination, but specifically for the individual that you are trying to get on your side with this pitch, so that they help you take your trip for free.

Coverage alone is not always enough these days. This goes back to what we were talking about influencers earlier. In some cases, saying that you will not only be writing these print articles, but you will also be Tweeting it and Instagramming it and everything live while you are there, is very attractive. The other things that can be attractive are giving a good breath in terms of media in your coverage. So you can say that you’re going to be doing you know some videos that will be shared here here and there, but the other thing that you can do (and we talked about this a little bit in some of our other webinars on travel content marketing) is that you can be pitching to go to these destinations as an individual sponsored trip without any editorial attachment at all. So you’re not doing any stories, but you’re just producing content through an individual sponsored trip, for that destination. So, for a hotel company, for a tour company. If you’re more interested in getting on these trips and making cool trips and going to these places than specifically getting print bylines or online bylines out of these visits, this can be a really great way to do it. To create a partnership with the tourism board or the hotel company, with the tour company to create a big batch of content for them around the destination, through a trip that you go on.

I was just at TBEX in Jerusalem last week and this guy did a talk that was ostensibly about how bloggers can work with brands and it ended up being a lot about SEO (which was interesting in its own right), but one of the very first things he said was that brands are not looking to pay for trips for bloggers to write on their own blogs. They’re looking for people to write on the brand’s blog, not the blogger’s blog. Often when I have people come to me and say “oh I’d like to go on such and such trip and here’s my pitch” I look at it and it’s really all about their blog and them as an influencer. It’s failing the what’s in it for me factor from the first point because you’re not saying what you’re going to do for that destination or for that hotel through your background and through your experience. Also it might not be important to them for you to come and tweet about it or do an Instagram post about it because they might have much bigger influencers who are mommy bloggers or fashion bloggers or whoever who they already have doing that. So you need to look at where you can align with what they are looking to spend money on, what they already have a budget on. Because if they simply don’t have the budget for something, you’re not going to get anywhere.

A couple don’ts ok. So don’t try to set up an individually sponsored trip when you are traveling in high season. This is a huge one ok? Go ahead and drop in the chat box if you’ve ever tried to go to Europe in the summer or something like that and have just been completely shut out every time you tried to get as little as a tour set up or something like that. This is one of the biggest mistakes that I see people make. It’s newer because I think before blogs became big, all the print journalists knew you don’t travel in high season because their print deadlines forced them to write those stories earlier and take those trips earlier. For instance, I have only recently started doing travel for research in the spring or the summer. I used to always be in Europe like in February or October, or all these times when it was cold and kind of rainy and gray and basically kind of shitty to be honest. These poor tourism people like my tour guides and stuff would always be like “oh I’m so sorry you have to see it now” and I was like “but this is the only time to see it. Either this or I have to go an entire year in advance and then wait for my story to come out, which for me from a financial point doesn’t make sense.” I know a lot of you guys have voiced that concern as well about having a story assigned, but they don’t want it for two years because they want you to travel in the summer because it’s a summer story.

Another thing (and this is one of these places where there’s an exception to the rules for sure), but be very careful about looking to set up free trips and leaving or including in your pitch, that you’re looking for travel for somebody besides yourself. The main exception to this rule is if you are inherently a family travel writer, then you should be experiencing it with your kids because you want to be writing about what their experience is like as well. This kind of myth that you can take your spouse on all these great weekend trips because you’re going on press trips and you know it’s all paid has been perpetuated by some very specific people. In fact, I was looking at an e-book on the topic of setting up free trips (in preparation for this call) that’s written by somebody else, and he leads with talking about all these different lovely trips that he’s been on or other people that he knows have been on saying that he and his wife go here and had dinner here and a romantic weekend there. The thing is if you are writing specifically for the romantic travel market, then it’s often a given that you’ll be bringing your spouse, but it’s not something that you should ever assume. I typically let the tourism board take the lead in telling me if I should think about bringing somebody else. The funny thing that happens if often the times that you would travel and potentially they would ask you to bring somebody else are mid-week and it wouldn’t really make sense for you to bring your significant other or family. Always let the tourism board take the lead on that. Never assume that you can bring your significant other and never say that your friend or your significant other is your photographer, unless they actually are. This is another thing that I see a lot of couples try to do is say that one person is like the assistant or the photographer, but people can tell really fast if the other person has no ideas how to research or how to do travel writing.

The other thing (and I mentioned this last week, but I’m just going to give a little background again) is that if you’re traveling to do just one story for a small outlet or an online outlet that’s not say BBC Travel, that’s probably the only one that stands alone on its merits and is just online. If you’re trying to do just one story for one outlet that is not Travel & Leisure with a first-tier city or even the second-tier cities, that means New York, San Francisco, Seattle, maybe even Cleveland. Any of these cities that have a sports team say. If you’re trying to go there and get sponsor travel for one story, for a not household name outlet, they are going to offer you something worth like $20. I say the Seattle situation because for last week’s call, Maria had sent me something for us all to discuss together, which was that she had emailed and also filled out the form and sent a very nice cover letter, checked all the boxes, done everything she was supposed to do to the Seattle tourism board to get something set up for a trip that she already had an assignment. She had all the ducks in a row. She was doing it for the essentially Associated Press of Finland, but what happened was that they pulled a column-inch calculation on her. They said, “can you tell us the readership and give us the ad rates?” because they didn’t know her outlet and they wanted to calculate to see what was the equivalent for them to get an ad in that location. They looked at it and they decided that they only thing they would offer her is a sort of visit Seattle pass, those things that give you free public transit and entrance to museums, things like that. The thing about those passes is that they’re usually very easy to get. They’re like the baseline. If you can prove that you have a story and you’re going to a large city, like they just hand them out like candy from their desks at the tourism board.

That’s the kind of thing where you can take that one story that you have from one outlet that they might not know and add four others (that also might be from outlets that they don’t know) and then you’re starting to put together a case. You’re starting to put together a portfolio that shows that you actually do need media assistance because for the large tourism boards and it’s different for the small ones (and we’re going to talk about that when we go through the example) but for the large tourism boards, they call it media assistance for a reason. It’s really set up to be for media who have stories lined up who wouldn’t be able to complete those stories without the help of the tourism board.

One of the really great things that I recommend…how many of you by the way, I should have asked this earlier…how many of you drop in the chat box if you have been on a sponsored trip that was just you, so not necessarily with a group like a press trip, but a sponsored trip that was just you or that you have never been on a sponsored thing that was just you. This can be a tour, it can be a meal, it can be a hotel stay, anything like that. Drop over here in the chat box, just a yay or nay if you’ve been on an individual sponsored thing or not. Oh Stacy that’s great. Which newspaper was it? Yeah, some people are saying that they’ve been on group ones only. Yep, hotel stays. Oh great. The Tribune, great! So, we’ve got a good mix. I feel like one of things that I’m noticing from people that say yes, I have, is that it’s often been in connection with a story that was assigned.

This is the thing. If you are new to travel writing or new to sponsored trips and you know I’ve seen a couple people in here who say they’ve done it with their partner and one for instance is somebody who I know writes about family travels. Like I said, that’s definitely the exception to the rule about don’t ask for things for more than just yourself. If you write about family travel, then that’s a no-brainer that you should be asking to take your family as well. If you are new either to free travel or travel writing, one of the best things you can do is to start doing day trips. So, things near where you live in your own city if you live in a big city that are little chunks of sponsored things. So, you have a tour or a tour and a meal, or an overnight in a hotel, or something like that. Then what you do is you take those examples, so you go on the things, you write your stories, and then you put together these little case studies (and I’m going to do a whole webinar all about case studies, specifically for content marketing and things like that in a little while), but the way that you do these case studies for press trips is that, if you have a blog you might already be familiar with this because some people include it in their media kit. You just create a little one-pager or a couple page PDF, and you can do this in PowerPoint if you don’t have any sort of layout software. PowerPoint’s a good way to hack making a nice PDF. But you can say where you went, what you were offered, what was free, and the stories that came out of it and you know if they were stories that went online you can say how many social shares or if you have access to the Google analytics, you can say how many eyeballs they got or something like that. You can also just include the links and some of the nice little screenshot or scan of the article.

I’m not going to talk too much about how to set up your website to kind of impress people into giving you a free trip right now, because I don’t think it’s too important. I realized actually I was preparing this call that I get invited on all sorts of stuff. I use the example a lot of the press trip that I didn’t go on to Dubai. I get invited on stuff that has nothing to do with what I do that sounds really interesting and luxurious. My website, I don’t even have most of my clips on there. I don’t even think I have national magazine clips up there. Like I have very little stuff up there, but one thing I do do is I include the layouts of the article. If it’s a print article, I either get the digital version and I take a PDF if it has the spread of the article or if it’s something online I take a screenshot (as long as it’s a good-looking website. If it’s not a good-looking website, don’t worry about it.) I find that that displaying that your articles appeared somewhere nice that has a nice presentation (and I’ve heard this from both editors and tourism boards) that that can go a long way with people.

When you’re putting together this case study you’ll show who the tourism board was or who the tour company was or whoever, what you received from them, what the coverage was like, and it’s just, that’s all you really need to have. Just having that one bit of professional collateral so to say, can really go a long way setting up these trips. When you are emailing people (and we’re going to get to who to email in a minute), but when you are emailing people to set these things up, as you’re listing you know, I’m a full time freelance travel writer, I’ve been writing this many years, I write regularly for this this and this publication and I’ve put together some examples of trips that I’ve been on in the past and the coverage that those trips received. Then you just put like a drop box link or something to the document. That goes a long way because the people who work in these tourism boards and PR companies are used to these sly deck style things to look at you know it’s like brochures and what they give you as a press person. They respond to that because it’s what they’re used to giving. So you put together your own little press pack to give back to them.

I didn’t say this last week, so I want to make a small aside about when you should not travel for free in an editorial function. Go ahead and drop in the chat box if this is something you’ve been curious about, but because I live in New York I always get asked about the New York Times. It’s kind of like an inside joke with tourism people I think, that the New York Times says it doesn’t accept press trips and everybody knows somebody from the New York Times that they’ve been on a press trip with, and my answer is always “I go on press trips so I don’t pitch the New York Times” but the vast vast majority of publications really don’t care if you’ve been on a press trip, to the point where they will often tell you explicitly to feel free to drop my name if you would like to set up a press trip or would you like me to connect you to the tourism person to help set up your trip. A lot of this has to do with shrinking travel budgets on the publication side. However, there are some sad hold-outs and I say sad for this reason, like the New York Times that have very strict policies. So, the New York Times theoretically (I’m not sure how it works), but they do a background check on you and if you have taken any free travel in the last three years or have a history of accepting free travel before that, then you can’t write for them. So, for people who I know who write for them are so fastidious that they will be at cocktail parties at conferences and trying to make sure that people don’t tweet their name in connection to the party being sponsored by somebody. So, you have to be really really careful with the Times, but the problem is that these outlets don’t actually pay so much. For instance, the Times is known that it won’t pay your travel and it won’t let you accept any. So if you want to write about Kandahar for the New York Times, you have to already be there.

In some cases (and Joe just mentioned this in the chat box) there is a bit of a don’t ask don’t tell policy and so it’s a little tricky because there are some publications that will get angry if it was a sponsored thing and you didn’t tell them. By and large I’ve seen that the ones that are in that position will ask you right away. So if you pitch them and they like the article, and they care, so they it’s not that they totally don’t care and support free trips, and it’s not that they don’t have a don’t ask don’t tell policy, but they would get angry if you had taken a free trip. They will typically tell you when they’re interested in your article, like this looks good let’s talk about it a little bit, was this a sponsored trip? If it was then they’ll say sorry we can’t accept this story. Don’t worry too much about saying up front that it was a sponsored trip. I know a lot of people come to say when they’re pitching a story that they or if they want to go on a press trip, that they want to lead the pitch by saying “I’ve been invited on this trip blah blah blah”. Don’t do that. So, we’re talking about sponsored trips that are individual today, so this isn’t so much the case, but don’t put in a pitch and especially don’t lead your pitch by telling the editor that you are pitching them a story because it was a free trip. Editors don’t like that.

Yeah, so Lenora had mentioned that some people talked about being a lifetime ban at the New York Times and this is something that I haven’t personally tested, but in theory, if you’ve gone on you know more than a handful of press trips or had free lunches or whatever, then you might have a lifetime ban from the New York Times. I hope that one day that will open up because actually Conde Nast Traveler used to have a policy that was very similar, not about the ban, but about no free travel and they polled their readers and I actually sat in on one of these reader sort of survey sessions and their readers didn’t care. They didn’t really care if the travel was free or if Conde Nast had paid for it themselves. They’ve now loosened their policy.

Let’s get into how exactly we go about planning these things. So again, if you have a trip that you have coming up, that you want us to sort of tie in to this section of the call, please feel free to drop it in the chat box. This is a good time do that. There’s a couple that I had seen come in, so I’m just going to see if some of those people are on the call because otherwise I can email them back later. Great, so Lena’s here. Nobody. Ok guys. I can workshop your stuff if you want, but feel free to just drop it in later on if you think about it.

One thing that I had noticed with both the one that Lena had sent and also one that I had talked to somebody about who isn’t on the call but is probably going to listen to the recap, is setting up your own accommodations and your own travel and then doing the rest, so doing the activities and things like that through the local tourism office and I’m going to talk about that in the context of the attack order right now. This is essentially what I also use when I’m doing trips that are not sponsored, but it’s particularly important to go in this order when you’re doing sponsored trips because like I said before the number one cardinal rule of don’t pitch a press trip when, is if you’re trying to go in high season. If it’s really important to you to get the trip set up for free either because like Jill mentioned she wants to go on a cruise to Antarctica. If that’s something that is not in your bandwidth to paying for completely out of pocket and you want to do a media rate or you want to get it sponsored, then you need to think really hard about this point here. If you can be more flexible about your dates, you can often get a much better set up. I’ve been in situations where I needed to go somewhere and I was even going there last minute and they had like their biggest tourism thing of the year set up, and they were able to accommodate me, but only because I both had an assignment and I wrote about that destination once every three or four months. There are some exceptions to that high season rule, like I said there’s some exceptions to all those rules but they tend to be built a lot about relationships.

Start your trip planning (if you need the first two things which are transit and lodging) both early and by looking at the destination’s high season, particularly the destination’s high season. Not the region’s high season, but the destination because it might be that you’re going somewhere very very cold in January when you would think it’s not their big time of year, but they have their winter fest in January when they build a whole village out of ice and people come from all around. You might have already known about that and want to base your story on that or maybe you don’t. This can be a way to find out either if there’s good story angles that you don’t know about, but that might preclude you from getting a free trip, or if there’s good story angles that you could potentially research another time.

I talked about this a little bit last week, but the thing about a festival and I don’t think Kristin is here, but Kristin had asked last time about this festival in India that happens every October. If you want to cover a festival, this is really difficult for tourism boards because it’s when their hotels are the most expensive, but you as the writer can’t go any other time to get that. Any time you’re trying to cover something that really is like the highest season and a very busy time, that’s when you want to be planning very far in advance. When you look at when to go, that’s also combined with when to get in touch. I always think that you should draft off of press trips to get a sense of when to get in touch. What that means is that a lot of press trip invites kind of confound me, but they come out like six to eight weeks before the trip would go out, or maybe like maximum twelve weeks really really maximum. So that’s kind of the time frame that people are looking at to fill these spots. Then you have to back track right, because before the press person put that trip together, put together the list of people to invite, put together their writers, then they’ve been organizing that internally. So maybe three to four months, I would say is the really common window when people would be organizing these things. Generally, three to four months off of when you would want to go is when you should start to get in touch because that can also give you leeway that if the specific week you’re looking at has you know the International Association of Swine Doctors I don’t know in town that week (which is not something that you would have ever found out about on your own), they can tell you and say look we have a big convention, but I can accommodate you the week after. If you’re looking at doing something that’s really like a once-in-a-lifetime, once-in-a-year something, start looking at least one year in advance. So as soon as that festival finishes for the year this year, get in touch with them about how you can make it work to attend it the next year.

We’re going to talk about a little interesting hack that you can use to get invited places that’s really good for these festivals in a little bit, but I’ll just give you a little tease here. When you write a round-up about something and a round-up is when you have (we also call it a basket of kittens a lot here), but a round-up is when you have several different things around a theme together in one call or in one article. That’s a little bit different than a listicle because they tend to be more tightly focused around one theme, but very diverse geographically. What you can often do is you can write a round-up about something and do interviews by phone to get some information on that round-up and in doing so, build a positive relationship with that tourism board, that destination, that tour company, whatever and have them say at the end “oh we’d love to show you around some time. Let us know when you can come.” That’s actually one of the best ways to get invites for individual press trips is actually through doing an interview about the place for a different article by phone, that you can then leverage into more articles. It’s also really helpful in terms of pitching because you’ve already got some background on the destination.

I’ve got a couple questions over here I just want to look at quickly. So Jill had a question that goes right into my next point. So how to get there. This is like the elephant in the room when people talk about free trips because it’s such a pain in the butt. I was in a Facebook group that I’m in, I think it’s the Travel Plus Social Media group. Somebody was posting that she’s setting up something with an airline for the first time. I honestly just don’t even approach airlines. I have in the past and they’re just such a pain in the butt to work with that I have always found it’s easier for me to just get to accrue points and miles through credit cards and pay for my flights whether I need business class flights or crazy flights or one-way flights between Japan and Reykjavik, Iceland (which is seriously an itinerary that I just booked the other day) that it is so much easier for me to do those on my own by using points. So, I’m still not paying for them, but I get the actual flights I want and I don’t have to spend weeks courting some variety of airline officials. I do have friends that get a lot of airline things set up, but the thing is because they write with the airline industry. People who get airline trips set up that don’t write about the airline industry tend to be looking for regional flights. It can be really hard to get international flights from the airlines directly set up for a big long-haul flight.

Another interesting hack (which is not completely relevant to what we’re talking about today but) if you have any friends who work for airlines, they have a certain number of friends and family passes that you can usually buy off them for some negligible amount of money and then you just have to pay the taxes and fees on your flight and then they can book you a basically free flight to South Africa or whatever.

If you want to get your flight sponsored, the best way to do that is actually to go to a third party. That third party is either the tourism board (which Jill mentioned here) or a hotel. This is a really weird way of looking at it, but (I’m going to talk more about this in a minute) but hotels are really where the money for sponsored trips is these days. They’re the ones who are putting together these really flashy itineraries, they’re flying people across the world. I had somebody in the Philippines for an Eco Lodge say that they wanted to bring me the other day. The thing about these trips is that they’re really nice if you have a lot of time.

So hotel trips are great for writers who are doing travel writing part time capacity, like they like a good way to pay for their vacations or to take their family interesting places, or for people who are doing travel writing as like a second, third, fourth career and it’s kind of an interesting retirement and you don’t care so much about the income. For instance, I could never go to a hotel for five or six days to basically just be at the hotel and do the amenities nearby. I just don’t have the time. I have too much work. That’s been the case for pretty much the whole time I’ve been a travel writer. This gets back into deciding how much of your travel writing you want to be doing to earn a good amount of money versus that you just like traveling. I find that hotel trips can be not just the most luxurious because they have the hotel, but because they have the budget, they’re setting up crazy meals for you at their property and otherwise, they’re setting up tours for you, they’re doing the flights, they’re doing all sorts of stuff. So when Maria in the Seattle case mentioned earlier that she got sort of turned away by the tourism board because they didn’t know what the Finnish media were, in that case I said go to the hotels. There’s a couple different ways to go to hotels, but just getting the name of the local PR person (which you can do online for any of the big chains) is not very hard. However, the thing about big chains, just like tourism boards, is that they have their quotas, they have their priorities and it can take a lot of you know journalist bling (so to say) to impress them. However, boutique hotels, especially new boutique hotels, and especially boutique hotels that come from a backer, which is pretty common. In Italy for instance, where I used to do a lot of work, these are often former noble families who have turned their family estate or their family villa or something into some sort of tourism, either it’s like a mini village, where everyone has their own house, or it’s a hotel, or something like that. These are the people who are putting on the cool trips because to them it’s part of the brand. The whole experience is part of the brand. Just like this Dubai press trip that I mention pretty often.

The reason we go in this order (when to go, how to get there, whatever) is that we’re starting typically with the tourism board with when to go. We’re letting them know that we’re looking at coming, but they’re not necessarily the one that we’re looking at getting to pay for the rest of this or to put it together. We’re often using them to see what we can get, but also to get more information about who is better able to support our trip because they’ve got a lot of people coming to them. In the case of Maria’s Seattle trip, she was actually referred to a set of hotels that do have media rates or that do comp stays in conjunction with the tourism board to get in touch with or the tourism board said that they would get in touch with them for her.

In terms of how to get there (like Jill mentioned) you can often get some more leverage with the airline by going to the tourism board, but if you’re traveling regionally, I find that going to the train company or the person that does train passes, like Eurail is really great in Europe about working with journalists and bloggers. Amtrak also has a new program. Bus companies can be good for this. Bicycle companies can be good for this. Can give you more options and also more interesting stories than just having the tourism board try to set it up for you.

Where to sleep is an interesting thing because a lot of people these days I’ve noticed, and in fact Lena even mentioned in her email about the trip that she had a question about that she had already set up her hotel. A lot of folks, myself included, just go right ahead and set up an Air B&B without even reaching out to hotels. What can actually be interesting if you have the tolerance for it, is to sleep in a different hotel every night and that can be much easier to set up than asking a single hotel to give you five nights, three nights, whatever because then each property doesn’t have to pony up so much. They don’t have to make a case to their boss about why you need to be there so many nights. You don’t need to come up with so many stories to explain why you’re going to be there so many nights, and when you’re writing a story about a place, you’re often going to end up getting multiple lodging options anyway. So you would say “for a luxury option this hotel has recently opened started by a couple that’s an interior designer and a craft brewer from Brooklyn blah blah blah. For a budget option, blah blah blah. For families, blah blah blah.” So staying in a different place every night (if you can stomach it personally) can be easier to set up and also better for your stories.

Now what to do. So now these bottom parts of what to do and where to eat, we’re going through on timeline here, so this is three to four months unless you’re going somewhere crazy, then we’re looking at one year out. How to get there, this is also going to be three to four months. Where to stay, this can be two to three months. You can even do it one month out. What to do. This is stuff you can be doing one month out or even two weeks out because when you’re looking at getting into attractions, it’s typically just a matter of letting them know you’re coming. The one thing (I have on another slide, but I just want to mention) is this is a bit different in the US than in other countries. In the US if you’re media and you want to come and you want to come for free, you typically just need to be contacting them in advance and then they put your name on a list at the door, then you’ll have a kit waiting for you when you come and typically also somebody there to guide you around.

What I really recommend, because one of the big differences between a group tour and an individual tour is the tour guided-ness of it. When you’re on a group tour (a good group tour), you should have individual tour guides in all the places that you go to that are able to unpack the hidden stories, the anecdotes, the background, and give color and depth to the destination for you. That’s something that I like a lot of us (myself included) skip out on when we travel on our own. We think oh I just need to get the hotel sponsored and I know I want to go to this this and this and I want to profile this business and I want to eat at this place, but you would be astonished. I’m sure most of you (and drop over here in the chat box if you haven’t had this experience) but most of you have probably at some point in your various traveling journeys gone a trip and experienced how even a place that you think you know, you can learn so many things from a tour guide. I’ve taken a couple tours here in New York and New York is a place that I’ve only lived for the last seven or eight years, but they’re always fascinating. In a city like this, somebody can give you a tour of two blocks and just come up with so so many stories.

My favorite sort of anecdote about the power of going on a tour, is that I used to ghost write for an Italian concierge tour planning company. So they’re job was to put together tours and itineraries for people around Italy. So they had to know things. They had to know the area, they had to know what was good. They had to know what would be a match for their clients. They somehow had done this for several years without going on a tour, even though they were putting their clients on tours with tour guides. Then one day they went on a tour of the city where they actually owned their home in Italy and they were just blown away.

So if you have not been on a tour like that, I will tell you that doing that tour one-on-one versus doing that tour in a group is a such better experience. What happens is tour guides always tailor the tour to their audience. So if it’s just you, you get to really dig in to what you want to know about the destination and they go through their catalogue of stories and their catalogue of anecdotes and they highlight ones for you that they usually don’t do on their group tours or public tours. You can ask them even deeper questions and they’re able to answer you because they’re not neglecting other people on their trip.

In terms of the what to do category here, I really really recommend when you’re setting up sponsored trips on an individual basis that you also make sure to include some tours. You can do them differently. You can do some food tours of course, you can do some historic tours. In the National Park Service (which I’ve actually worked with a lot) it seems like it would be hard to do press stuff with the National Park Service, but they’re actually quite organized about it. They have some really great tours. Joe’s got a point over here. It’s even more interesting when you visit a destination with non-national tour guides based there i.e. in the UAE there are very few Emirate tour guides. You learn so much from these people because they’re also discovering the place themselves. What I really love about Joe’s point is that those people (especially if they’re from the country you’re from or even if they’re not) know what it is interesting to visitors about that destination. I find often locals, they know some interesting stories but they don’t know what is new to you and they don’t highlight those facts. Tours can be very very easy to set up. Either by going through the CVB or going directly to the tourism board. Setting up tours, like most tour companies owners are just happy to set them up for you. I’ve never had any problem doing that, whether it’s an individual tour or not.

The next thing that is harder is where to eat. Obviously, I imagine most of us (because it’s something we spend a lot of our waking hours doing, and also probably write about) care about where we eat on our trips and it might even be the reason that we travel, but this can be one of the more difficult things to get sponsored actually. Even if you do get it sponsored, you get into this weird situation where you might be eating places that the tourism board has sent you to that are not actually the most interesting places, because they’re trying to guess what you would want to cover. While you can certainly get your meals sponsored and to do that I recommend going through the tourism board and not directly to the restaurant, unless it is a restaurant group. If is a restaurant group, then you go directly to the PR firm that represents the restaurant group and then they will take care of it for you. If you want to get your meals sponsored, just be very very careful that you don’t just give the tourism board carte blanche to set them up for you if you have specific places that you want to eat.

We’ve covered a couple of these points already, but we went through the attack order. Now the specific set up process. Like I said, we want to start with the CVB. We’re starting with them too see what we can get, but also what we can get sponsored, but also to see what other information we can get from them. (I was going to flip over to my web browser to show you a couple things, but I won’t do that now because we’re getting short on time.) Pretty much every CVB (especially the large cities) has they call it like a “what’s hot” list. This is where the mention new places that are opening, renovations that are happening, all sorts of people who want coverage. So what’s really brilliant about these lists, is that they are tailor-made lists of who you can contact to set you up with free stuff because these people currently have a marketing budget and they are looking to get more coverage for whatever their new thing is. So whether that’s a hotel that’s just about to open, a restaurant that’s just opened, a new tour offered from an existing tour company, something like that, these things are in the market for coverage. They are like a ready-made sponsored thing and I highly recommend starting with those. The caveat is they tend to have very updated what’s new lists from large cities where (like I said it can be a little difficult to get things done) so when you see the what’s new list, you can ask the CVB if they’ll connect you, but you might be better off just finding the information of the particular hotel, restaurant, tour company, whatever and just reaching out to them yourself.

You can also go for press releases that are not so specifically curated by the tourism board to a variety of wire services (and I’m not going to list them all because there’s really a lot but) PR Newswire is pretty good for travel and also Media Kitty, which has listing of press trips that are open and things like that are a couple travel specific places to think about it. If any of you guys have some that you like to use, that as a journalist you’ve used successfully in the past to find press releases, drop them in the side and I’ll mention them to the group.

Somebody had a quick question. What does CVB stand for? CVB is the industry word for tourism board. It means Convention and Visitors Bureau. DMO, which is another abbreviation (Oh thank you. TravMedia. I forgot TravMedia. That’s another really good press release service for travel stuff). So DMO is similar to tourism board except that it tends to be a private entity. It’s called the Destination Management Organization, but they all accomplish the same purposes of the functionality of the tourism board in various cities. So sometimes when you’re Googling who to contact, you might need to try the name (and I always start with CVB for Google because that’s usually how they’re listed). I Google the name of the destination and CVB. These days almost everybody has changed their websites and sometimes even the name of their nonprofit or the company, whatever to be visit whatever, so Visit California, Visit Indy, you know whatever. That also works if the CVB query doesn’t come up. You can also search for the name of the location and DMO.

I mentioned briefly Media Kitty. There’s a couple sites that aren’t going to be necessarily useful for press releases of who you can reach out to cold, but you can just put up a thing that says “I am coming to blah blah blah. If you have a new tour, a new restaurant, a new hotel, whatever. This is the kind of stuff I’m looking to cover. Get in touch with me.” The two main places to do that are Media Kitty (which is more travel-specific) and HARO, which stands for Help a Reporter Out. I believe with Help a Reporter Out you used to have to tag it to a specific destination, but that might not be true anymore. If anybody has some updated information on that. I haven’t used it in a couple years myself.

Lena is asking is there a good site that publishes press releases when major airlines launch flights to new destinations? Those will definitely be on both TravMedia and PR Newswire for sure because I always see the airline ones on that stuff all the time. You can also set a Google alert for those as well. If there’s something like an airline that you want to know about, you can set Google alerts so you don’t need to pawing through the sites every day, but also on PR Newswire and TravMedia you can set something so that you get all of the travel press releases in just link title form in your email every day.

We talked about how tours are the easy part and flights and meals are not. I want to touch on how free attractions work very differently in the US than abroad. I’ve had some really hilarious instances (I think in part because I have a press pass and in part because I speak so many languages) with rants from museum officials in different countries about these Americans who come in and think that they can just walk in by showing a business card and they’re like “anybody can print a business card” and I’m like “well anybody can print a press pass. Actually, the newspaper offices just print them themselves.” Here’s the thing – in the US you cannot go up to a museum and just show them you’re press pass and get in, but that’s how it works in Europe. If you are primarily writing with the US, then it’s really easy. You just write to the PR or marketing person in advance. However, if you’re looking at writing about Europe (and I don’t have as much experience with this in Asia because I don’t usually try to get free things when I’m there because I’m with my family) but if you are trying to go places in Europe, they will usually say very plainly on the entrance to the museum you know EU citizen price this, seniors price this, media this and media is free with valid media card. So how do you get a valid press card? If you write regularly for a publication that is a newspaper, you can often get them to make one for you. I’ve seen some websites that do them also. The primary way is to be in an association. There’s a few and if you’re new to travel writing, you do need to have a certain number of clips usually to get in one. There’s a couple that are a little easier. I’m going to send out an email when the reminders go out after the webinar. I’m going to drop those names in there so you can see them. The one caveat I will tell you is there’s one that’s run by another company that sells travel writing courses, which is not actually a travel writing association, but they do make press cards. They essentially say like “oh you know pay us $200 and you get this press card.” I’ve seen that one get denied some places, so I will say if you’re trying to get a press card specifically to get in museums and things like that in Europe or other places that are a bit more stringent, Lena had mentioned NATJA- I think I can just chat this on to everybody. So NATJA is a pretty easy one. This is the National uh North American Travel Journalists Association. SATW is the Society of American Travel Writers. That one is a bit harder. There’s another one that I’m probably going to botch, but it’s International Food Wine and Travel Writers Association. This one (like NATJA) is also a little bit easier, so if you have some background and you’ve written online, you can probably get into IFWTA and maybe to NATJA. NATJA I will say is privately owned and run, so it’s a for-profit company. While that totally works as a press card and it’s a legitimate travel writing association, it’s not kind of as well editorially regarded as SATW. I’m not really sure the standing of the International Food Wine and Travel Writers Association in the battle between NATJA and SATW.

I’ve titled this slide “Blah Blah Networking Blah Blah” because how many times have people told you “oh if you want this, you should go network. You should go to events. You should meet people. It’s so easy to get gigs, to get free travel, if you just do that.” The thing is like yeah I could just tell you to go to events. You can probably meet people there, but there’s easier ways that are more direct to network, specifically to get on trips like this that are better use of your time. So in particular, I really like calling the tourism board. That is really underrated. I mean I think in general phone calls are really underrated, but the people who work in tourism boards or parent companies are used to being on the phone. They’re phone people. So, they’re really happy for you to call them and say “hey I’m thinking about a trip to blah blah blah. What would you recommend?” I’ve actually had people who I emailed to set up a trip be like “oh I’m going to call you!” and I was like “Actually I’m in Turkey” or something like that. They really rely on the phone. So if you are trying to get in touch with the tourism board and either you’re having trouble or you feel like you don’t have enough of an in, sometimes sending them a sort of cold email where that’s all they have to go on, bring your personality into it, show them that you’re legitimate and that they can trust you by calling them and building a connection that way. You don’t have to meet the PR people at an event to do that. You can do it through just picking up the phone and building these one-on-one connections.

The other thing is that a good way, besides going to generic networking events to build those connections, is to go to these lunches. Some of you might have gotten these before (and I probably get more invites than most because I’m in New York, but I also get invited to these things in San Francisco and Dallas) but if you live in a city, the PR firms in your city are regularly bringing in people from tourism boards that they represent to have meetings with people in the city. If you just write to the PR firm and say “hey I cover travel and blah blah blah. Can you let me know when you have related events going on?” They will put you on these lists and you will start getting invited to these lunches. This (like the interview trick that I mentioned before) is a really good way for people to just casually be like “oh yeah we’d love to have you come check it out” and boom, there you go. That’s your opportunity to set up an individually sponsored trip to that destination.

You can do the same thing that these tourism boards are doing by stopping in to say hi yourself. You can do this either with PR firms or with tourism boards, but if it’s a place that’s far away, obviously that’s difficult. You can go to the PR companies in your city and write somebody and say “hey can I come in and chat with you about what I cover and see what clients you have that might be a fit?” This can also be a really great way to just start getting those invitations for individual things coming to you without it having to be based solely on your publication track record or finding you online.

We talked about interviewing for a round-up to get the invite for the next trip and how hotels are the real money and so we’re getting a little low on time (oh in fact it’s 4:30 already) so if any of you have to go, I’m so sorry we started late and I really appreciate you sticking around with us already a little longer and I’m going to start going through planning a specific trip on your own and I’m going to try to wrap it up in the next ten or fifteen minutes. So if you can stay, I’m going to go through these next couple slides a little quickly. If not, you can catch the remainder of the call on the replay which will go out after the call today.

This trip over here is something that I set up like I said, two or three years back and it was a very complicated itinerary. This was a case where I had somebody traveling with me also who was a travel writer, well travel writer/photographer as well and so she had her own outlets. So between the two of us, we split up (because it was such a hefty trip) who was contacting who about what. In some destinations like Asheville, I got us a stay at the Biltmore, which is the estate of the Vanderbilts which now has a bunch of different hotels on it. It costs like it’s like Disneyland. It costs $60 just to get in. If you don’t get that sponsored you’re probably not going to go as a travel writer. She was working on some other things because she wrote hotel reviews for some other luxury travel sites. In this case, like I said, this is a really large itinerary so we’re not going to go through exactly every single piece of it. I’m going to go through the attack order. In terms of when to go, you might notice the timing here is horrible. This was Labor Day weekend actually right here in the middle. This was one of those things that it was the only time we could go, there was nothing we could do and so we planned quite far in advance in terms of getting in touch with people. I also was very careful with these days where the actual Labor Day weekend, we were doing things (as much as possible) were either going to be completely on our own self-guided or we were going to be in places where it would be easier for us to get stays.

Going through these cities you know to start with, Charlottesville and Asheville are relatively big cities, but they’re not on the level of Nashville. So for Nashville, I have worked with the tourism board there before and they’re not necessarily like intransigent but they can be hard if you don’t have a big story. They have attractions there like the Country Music Hall of Fame, some really great historic houses and things like that that are really lovely to work with and a lot of new hotel chains and new restaurants are opening up. In this case when we were trying to go to Nashville, this was a case where I essentially bypassed the CVB for the purpose of this trip in order to more efficiently and effectively get things set up.

However, in the case of the previous two ‘villes so to say, Charlottesville and Asheville, I was able to go to the CVB, let them know I was coming, as well as go to some attractions directly that I wanted to go to. So, in Charlottesville (well actually outside of Charlottesville) is Monticello, which is Thomas Jefferson’s former home and as I mentioned in Asheville there’s the Biltmore. In those cases you know I could go to the CVB (and I have actually since) gone to the CVB and said “hey I’m coming. Make up some stuff for me” and they did all the stays. But because it was a busy time, I did my own legwork about where I wanted to go (and I’m going to show you some more about that on the next slide) and then I reached out to those places individually. I did that both in terms of the attractions we wanted to go to as well as the places to sleep, as well as the restaurants. In Asheville for instance, which is a really big foodie town, there’s a guy who has gotten national coverage (and I have written about him several times, but I haven’t gone on his tour) who does a foraging tour in the Blue Ridge mountains. So this was a case where it was really easy for us to just write them and say “hey we’re coming. When do you have a tour that we can join?” They said “great.” They actually moved the tour to a different part of the day for us to go on, to make sure that it would fit into our schedule. Like I said, the tour operators (even a guy who is a big tour operator in a very foodie city) they’re always very happy to accommodate you because especially if it’s not just a single person tour company, they can always bring in another guide.

And again, I mentioned this previously, remember the ethics of free travel. If you are going on a free trip, it’s not free. Someone else is paying for it and if it’s a small company like a tour company, that owner is either giving you the tour himself so that he doesn’t have to pay a guide or he’s paying a guide out of his pocket so that you can go on the tour for free. Especially with tours, always make sure that if the tourism board hasn’t covered it for you, that you’re tipping your tour guides, ok?

The next thing we did on here (and now we’re starting to get into the holiday weekend) is I went to this place called Eureka Springs which I had researched a couple times for some stories. It’s this really weird wacky place in Arkansas and I had never even been to Arkansas before and this trip completely changed my conception of Arkansas to be honest, in terms of a tourism destination. What I did here was that, coming from Nashville to Eureka Springs, there were quite a few other stops of interest in Arkansas actually. So I reached out to the CVBs because they’re not even second or third tier cities. They’re really excited to help you and get you out and roll out the red carpet for you. I had meals set up for me. I had people give me (because we were doing a driving tour and we were short on time), I had somebody from the CVB hop in the car with me or drive me around and give me a little tour of their city. If you’re looking to do the kind of thing where you have really one-on-one attention, especially if you’re new (and this is what I mentioned starting with day trips) going to smaller destinations and going to the CVB directly will be a really great way to have somebody set up a whole itinerary for you and give you a lot of trip story idea options that you wouldn’t (because you’re newer) have known to find on your own. In the case of these two places or this leg here, I really didn’t know about a lot of these cities. I had gotten in touch more generally with the tourism board of the state and was referred to some of these destinations and I had a really really great experience and it taught me some things that I was able to use in some other stories.

In here, now we’re at like the Friday of Labor Day weekend and it’s Atlanta and there’s a big football game and we wanted to go to the new College Football Hall of Fame, which was doing some new innovative things in terms of design, but there was a football game and there was nowhere to park. So the person at the museum though knew all these things, so if we had just gone on our own to check out this museum during the football game on a holiday weekend, we physically never would have got there. There would not have been anywhere to put our car. So this is one of the reasons that I really like to start (like I said) with the tourism board because they know the whole schedule of their destination and they know all the tricks. So because we did that, we were set up with a parking pass that somebody gave us as we drove by the museum and then we put our car away and we were able to go even though it was a very very busy time.

The other thing, especially if you’re on a road trip, and you go to the state level tourism board first, so I mentioned up in Arkansas they were able to connect us with some different cities to stop in, and in the case of Georgia that was definitely apparent. I had written some stories previously in a round-up format about Athens which is really big for its music history and there’s several other small cities that have Antebellum heritage between Athens and the coast or between Atlanta and the coast. They’re the type of things that are right on the way and very easy to stop in, but if we had been driving ourselves we wouldn’t necessarily have known how to make the best itinerary in terms of what exactly is going to be open when, where you have to stop for lunch versus where it’s good to stop for breakfast, and all those things. By reaching out, they were able to help me schedule the best use of my time.

I have another slide that I don’t think we’re going to get to, but the thing about time that (like I mentioned with the hotels) people always want you to stay longer, they want you to stay for a lot of time, unless it’s a big city and very expensive hotels. Most small tourism boards, most boutique hotels, they just want you to stay like forever. They always think you know that you’ll get more by being there you know five days, three days, however many days than one day or a half day. The thing is if you have that time, that’s really great, but I’ve also found that if you don’t have a lot of time, going to the CVB can be the best way to make sure you really maximize it.

Last week I showed you an itinerary for an individual FAM that I had taken that was actually to Macon, Georgia and she put in, not even a whole day, between maybe 8:30 or 8:00 and 3:00pm like ten different things and like masterfully. That’s one of the really best reasons if you are traveling on your own (even if you’re not looking to get things paid for) to reach out to the CVB. They will not only set those things up for you, but they will make the call so that the owner of the restaurant knows that you’re coming and even has the meal ready for you when you get there and is ready to answer some questions for you and things like that.

Some of the other things on here to take note of, the Georgia Islands. This is another thing where because it’s a holiday weekend and we’re looking at the islands, things get really hairy. But what I found was that on the coast of Georgia (so that includes Savannah and also Charleston) as long as you are reaching out to these CVBs far enough in advance, and you are very clear about what you need, they will set you up with the right things. In Charleston, I arrived at my hotel and I had a lovely welcome bag from the CVB person and I had all of my passes for all of my attractions there. Even though it was a holiday weekend and she wasn’t going to be around, and she wasn’t going to be guiding me, she was able to set those up. I had some theatre tickets, I had some historic home tours that we were going to be doing. She was able to set all of those up in a nice schedule for me in advance.

The next thing that I did was a little crazy, but I basically drove from the entire Outer Banks (which is probably like an eight or nine-hour drive) by myself after the other folks with me had left, and I did it in part because I needed to get back for something, but also in part because it was going to be just a really great day because all the tourists had just left at the end of the weekend and I really wanted to be able to get photographs in that environment. What happened was that I had this really long drive and there was this tiny little town in Virginia, on the coast of Virginia that’s the peninsula side, so not the main Virginia coast, and it was this B&B and I had been really interested in this town and I reach out to this person and we had everything set up, but I knew I was going to get there really late. So I felt really bad because here I am doing this free stay and I want to chat with her and everything, and I know I’m going to get there really late. What ended up happening was that not only (similarly to what I said about Charleston) was she super super gracious about it and took care of it, but she also gave me suggestions of things to do along the way before I got there, knowing that it was going to be late. She told me “don’t forget to stop at blah blah blah because it’s the last place you’ll be able to get food or gas before you get to us in the evening. If you get to us and you’re having trouble finding a parking spot, do this this and that.” Obviously if I had been a revenue guest, just a paid guest at the hotel or at the B&B, she still would have been very gracious, but the fact that she knew I was coming, I was a journalist, and she wanted to make sure I had the best experience possible, really made what was a very long day on that trip, because I had this very warm person, I had her cell phone number if I had any problems to help with things even that weren’t related just to the stay. That goes back to what I was saying that often the people who are going to take not the best care of you (because I have great relationships with tourism boards) but the people who are going to be thinking really about your user experience are the people who come from a hotel background, because that’s what they do with all of their guests.

Then another thing here that’s in terms of doing a day trip. So Alexandria is a place that I write about relatively regularly and I usually go to in a non-work-oriented capacity because I have friends there. This is the kind of thing where I knew I was going to be there for a little bit in the afternoon and I reached out to the CVB and we just had a lunch. They said “ok you’re going to be here for lunch, great.” So they set up a reservation for us, they had a place for me to put my car, they brought a bunch of stuff that they wanted to talk to me about, they asked me what stories I have coming up, and we essentially had like a private version of these PR lunches, that I was saying that you can set up, but just because I was in town. This is the kind of thing where even if you’re on a road trip and you’re just passing through somewhere, just stopping off in that town and building that relationship can then open the door for future stories.

Something that I had mentioned was that because we wanted to make sure that we weren’t putting too much onus on the tourism boards because of the timing of our trip and everything, we made a really comprehensive list of restaurants, small businesses we’d be interested in profiling, attractions that we wanted to check out , and so every time I reached out to a CVB, I was already armed with these lists of different things that I knew that we were interested in. So, I wasn’t just going to them and saying “hey I write about food and wine, like what would you recommend I do?” I said “here are some things we’ve looked at” and then they can come back to you and volley and say “well that’s great but it’s going to be really busy then or the leaves will have already fallen, so you can’t get great pictures, but maybe you want to try something else.”

I already mentioned that once you’re in, folks always have more things that they want to show you. This can be a really great thing when you go on an individual trip, is that you’re going to be on the list for all other group trips, or that as long as you do the coverage that you talked about, they’re going to want to have you back. So I have a lot of places that I go to maybe not every year, but every year and half to two years or something to update my research. The thing about these individual trips is that because you’re having those meals, because you’re having those one-on-ones with people, those tours, you’re going to become somebody that they know as a person and that they think about when they’re putting things together.

Now something that came up last week that I just want to make sure that we touched on is the chicken-and-egg problem of the assignment letters. What I really recommend about this (and I’m going to do a whole slide on this soon) is what I call the Pitch Portfolio. What this is, is that you’re not promising any specific stories, but you’re saying “hey I’m starting to set up my trip and these are the places I’m looking at pitching. These are the stories I might do. Let’s talk about what’s going on in your destination.” This is a way where you’re showing them the potential coverage that they could get by working with you, but without making any specific promises.

This is really important because I have a little list here that I just want to go through of the things to not do when you are writing people to set up individual trips. One of them is do not sound like you are writing from the 1800s. Do not sound so formal that you sound like an alien who has just learned English. I’m not saying if like your English is a second language or anything like that, but I have seen these form letters that get passed around between people that they use to set up sponsored trips and they are just really weird. Then I see some of the responses that people get and they’re like “oh I don’t know if this person is interested in sponsoring me” and I look at their letter and I’m like “why did you say this?” These are people. Talk to them like people. Don’t use lowercase hi to start your email, but build a relationship just like you’re chatting with the barista at your coffee house ok?

Also, don’t superlative drop unless it’s true. Don’t say you are the most influential, the most loved by CVBs, the most prolific (and I actually saw some letters that said this the other day, so I’m not making this up) unless you really are because they can check.

Don’t promise publication unless you edit a website, unless it’s your blog that you have control over or another website that you write for. Never make a promise about publication because as a freelancer you just never know what’s going to happen. And relatedly, be very careful not to say that you are asking for a hotel night in exchange for coverage because even if you’re not presently in one of these associations that we talked about that specifically forbids these things, you might be in the future, and this is a big ethics faux pas. Don’t say anything that implies a quid pro quo relationship between you getting something sponsored (whether it’s a meal or a tour) and the outcome of the story that you’ll publish because that can often be an issue with your editors as well.

On the topic of editors – don’t say that you write for a publication that you have not written for in the past or that you have a relationship with an editor that can publish a story in that place if you actually do not. I say this (again) out of actual experience. I’ve seen people say because they’re friends with the editor from BBC Travel that they’re going to publish a piece there or something like that. So when you use the pitch portfolio, you’re being very honest that this is what you’re thinking about pitching, that this is your plan, but you’re not saying in any way shape or form that you write for these places. That you will definitely write all of these articles.

Thanks so much everybody. Have a great night!

Putting Together A Pitch Portfolio To Support A Big Trip Transcript

Download (PDF, 294KB)

This week we’re going to be talking about how to put together a pitch portfolio to support a big trip. And what we mean by a pitch portfolio in this context is instead of just saying “Oh, I’m going to go on this trip” whether it’s a press trip or a trip you’re organizing yourself or it could just be a trip that is more of a fam attached to a conference or anything like that. So when you have a trip coming up what putting a pitch portfolio together means is lining up a very deep and impressive list of places that you’re looking to place articles about the trip and we’re going to talk about whether you should be looking to place them before the trip or after at the end of the column when you get to the FAQ.

So today specifically we’re going to talk about five specific viewpoints or frameworks to use for breaking your trip into different article ideas and then I’m going to take those frameworks and apply them to the three different trips that you have there in the handouts. And then I’m also going to look at some questions that I get a lot from people about how to implement this process depending on where they are in their writing or blogging careers.

Before we talk about specific viewpoints for examining your trip itineraries to turn them into pitch portfolios, I just want to talk about some of the things that hold people back from even doing this in the first place.  So myth number one: I think that we often think when we look at a press trip, especially if it’s a really interesting, awesome one, we think that they would never take me.  They would never take me because this isn’t my geographic background.  They would never take me because I don’t have huge publishing clips, but the real actual situation for the press people and the hotel marketing people and the tourism board marketing people is that they are looking to bring people on this trip that are going to get coverage, that are going to as much as humanly possible ensure that they have a return on their investment in this trip to show the people that are above them, their bosses or if they’re a tourism board, the city officials, to show that these programs makes sense and to achieve their goals for their job which is to get coverage for their destination.

Even more than someone who is established, what they’re really looking for is somebody who is going to help them with what they need to do which is get coverage. So if you have more secure lines of publication. If you have a regular column or something like that, that’s certainly helpful, but I think that we often think that just because this person might have been around the block for longer than us that they’re more likely to be accepted.  But it really comes down more to providing coverage and so we’re going to look at how to show that you can provide a wider reign of coverage in a bit.

The second thing is, I think that we also are afraid if we have no background in terms of magazine publishing or publishing on sites other than our own site and our own blog doesn’t have a big reach. I think that we’re afraid to apply because we think that they wouldn’t consider us and this is why this pitch portfolio approach can be really useful.  Because rather than focusing on where you’ve been published in the past, you’re going to focus on where you’re going to be published in the future. And I actually find that for newer writers, getting themselves on a trip ad feeling that pressure to pitch and that pressure to follow through and make sure you get published can actually be a great way to get your career off the ground because otherwise it’s really easy to just sit around and say you’re going to pitch tomorrow and then you realize that you thought that in October and now it’s nearly May and what has happened?

I think another thing that holds us back is the idea that people only want major national coverage and one of the trips that we looked at last week in our call about how to get on press trips we took some actual open calls for press trips from a couple of different places and looked at how to apply for them. And one of them specifically said they wanted national coverage, but then they backpedaled a little bit and they said or airlines, or major regionals, or this or that. And I thought that was really indicative of the situation because I see often people on press trips say they only want someone from a major top-tier travel-specific magazine and how many of those are there?  There’s like three.  And then what happens is because they are putting out an open call and not necessarily specifically reaching out to writers from those publications, they don’t end up getting anybody on their trip that actually fits that criteria and then they’re trying to fill those spots with other people who may know or other people who haven’t had time to pitch who are just coming on the trip as more fam and they’re just hoping that the story works out in the end.

What the situation is more commonly, especially with PR people who have more experience, is that rather than looking just at “Oh, this person contributes regularly to Travel and Leisure” they are looking at the people who can get them the best bang for their buck.  So that means that if you have a variety of outlets, especially if it’s a mix of online and print, that they’ll go out over a different time frame.  For instance, you might have six articles that drip out over the course of the year.  That’s actually better for them than one piece that may or may not happen perhaps in a year and a half in a major magazine.  And they’re going to look to balance those two things.  They can have one person on the trip that might eventually do a piece for ((unintelligible)) traveler, and several other people that they know are going to be filling in other stories that are going to come out in the meantime.

Don’t worry about the things that you don’t have to offer.  That’s the moral of this myth section is that you are a different travel writer than the other travel writers who are pitching to get a spot on a trip and you need to highlight that rather than play up your negative points. I see a lot of times people write in pitches “Oh, I don’t do this. I don’t have a lot of coverage for my blog. I don’t have a strong publication history. I don’t have this.” Don’t tell them that, just find the things that you can do and talk those up.

One of the things that I’m hoping you all can do because you’re here listening to this is that you can hustle because that is what you really need to do to put together these pitch portfolios. You need to do the work to put together the places to pitch in the first place and you need to get the pitches out there. So how do we do that? I’m going to show you five different criteria that I use to blow up of an itinerary from just an experience or hotel or something like that into 20, 100 story angles just from one part of one trip.

The first one and I think that a lot of people tend to view this as sort of not a binary thing as if it’s a yes or no equation, but there’s two different ways that they can look at their ideas. People look at them as topical or geographical. So I had a coaching call recently in which somebody said that they had just gone on a trip and I don’t think she’s on the call today, but I don’t want to highlight her trip anyway, but she had just gone on a trip that was somewhere in the U.S. and she was looking after the trip at where to pitch the articles that she wants to write based on that trip. And it took place somewhere in the Heartlands which is not the Midwest exactly, it’s kind of a little west of the Midwest. So this is the Kansas, Missouri kind of area.

It’s not necessarily an area with a lot of regional magazines that we all know about and not exactly the Midwest and not exactly Midwest living territory. And she was saying “Well I’m trying to find some regional magazines that I can pitch this to and I’m thinking maybe people from Texas would also go there, but I’m not sure.” And then she was also looking topically, so she was looking at road trips. She wanted to do a road trip piece around some things on Route 66 and so she was basically just looking at her whole trip or like some major sections of her trip through these two lenses; the geography or the topic. But what I want to do when we talk about topic just now in this slide and also on the other slides is give you some more ways to slice, not just your whole trip, but individual sections of your trip.

In terms of topic, I want us to think of this in two ways. Not just topic in terms of the specific things that you do on your trip like you might visit a horse farm or you mind go to a car racing track. Those are topics that you could take to a specific publication that specializes in people who love horses or people who love racing. But in terms of topic, I want us also to think of that slightly more grandly in the concept this style of travel because this is another way to slice your ideas.

For instance, in the case of this Route 66 thing that I had mentioned, she might look at that from the lens of on a budget as in how to do this, spending as little money as possible, maybe even from an RV perspective. So you’re not even paying to stay somewhere, you’re traveling in your own RV. So you could do it from the RV perspective, you could do it from the budget travel, and the you could also do it in the doing it up luxury fashion, and then you can also take that same thing and look at it from the vantage point of people who are doing that trip on their own as independent travelers or people who are doing that in a tour group. And I think group travel is one of the things that we so often forget about when we’re putting together pitches for our stories.

We think about the way that we travel. We think about the fact that we’ve gone on these trips on our own or perhaps in a small group of other writers, but we don’t often think about this very large section of the market which is people that are going on group tours. And when I say group tours I don’t necessarily just mean the people who are taking bus tours that are 50 – 60 people altogether being herded around and they’ve got, you know the person who’s got the little flag that they wave in the air and they’ve got their headset and everybody else has their little ear piece and they’re listening to their guide on headset. I don’t just mean that when I talk about group tours. There’s a lot of small group tours out there that are very specialized and they’re specialized both in terms of where that audience comes from and also the types of tours they do.

There are people who offer tours around wine. I just met someone when I was speaking at the Food Traveler’s Association Conference last week who is starting a tour company based around spirits and not wine, and not beer, but alcohol that’s made in the U.S. and she has tours around these. But then there’s also tours that I think most of us don’t even know about so a lot of you may have gotten, Ian knows about this, but my college has alumni tours. The Smithsonian offers tours, we all know National Geographic offers tours, but also banks offer tours. There’s these very interesting little niches of people who offer tours and so there’s a lot of publications out there that cater to the people who offer these types of experiences.

Really often when you’re on a trip and you find something that’s not newsy. So it’s not something that just opened yesterday, it’s not something that has a very strong time peg in terms of anniversary or renovation or something like that. That can be a better fit for these other types of markets. So not the individual types of consumer magazines. So that brings us to the next point which is trade versus consumer versus custom. So if you don’t know what these three terms mean, drop that over here in the chat box and I’ll explain a little more widely, but when I talk about the group tours whenever you’re pitching a publications for group tour operators, that’s going to be inherently a trade magazine because trade publications are publications that are for people who have a particular type of job.

For instance, a tour operator is a person who would get a trade publication, but also somebody who owns a hotel or somebody who owns a restaurant.  Whereas con singular publications are going to be the ones that we are able to buy on the newsstand versus custom publications which are the things that we would see in an airplane. The things that you get from AAA or perhaps from your own car company. Sorry, this is so loud in the background. I hope you guys can’t hear it, and I’m not getting any questions or comments so I hope this isn’t bothering you, but if it is please let me know.

Now other things in terms of the travel style or topic are something that I mentioned earlier which is these highly specialized niches. So I think that we sometimes consider too narrowly things like niche travel. So I know some people for instance who write about beer and when they go to pitch their trips they just look at the three or four major beer publications that are out there, but they aren’t thinking about the fact that a luxury publications like Robb Report or Mercedes Benz or Cigar Aficionado is also going to be covering those topics from a luxury angle.

When we talk about niche travel publications you can look at the ones like I was saying that are going to be the beer advocate or the wine enthusiast of the world, but there’s also specialized niches and we’ll get more into the ones that are specialized by audience. But there’s also specialized travel niches that might include things on the trip that you’re taking that are not niched specifically for that activity. So another type of niche publication that I think a lot of people overlook, especially people who do outdoor travel, I don’t hear this pitch so often is the single sport focus publications.

We’ve got 30 or 40 of these in the database and I couldn’t believe how many there were when we started looking, but there’s like five different publications on rock climbing, there’s enumerable publications on different types of hiking all over the world. But there’s even five or six just on back country camping and things like that. So if you are on a trip that has an outdoor angle it’s really easy to say “Oh we went on this hike. What do I do with this hike? It’s obviously not new, it’s not like this hike just opened yesterday. It doesn’t have a time peg. How can I pitch that?” And the thing is to take that to these scores publications because even if you went on something as a hike it might be a fit for a trail running magazine or a back country camping magazine or something like that.

Now lifestyle publications of travel sections this is another area, a topical area that I think a lot of people overlook. There is a lot of varying niched lifestyle publications. Ones that focus on being eco-friendly or ones that focus on a specific type of female traveler or a specific type of male traveler. And they often have travel sections, very specific two, three, even sometimes more sections that are about travel. I mentioned earlier Cigar Aficionado, which was about cigars, tends to be more of an upscale male publications which also includes travel. Another one is Darling which is a young female focused publications.

Another thing that is the explosive part of breaking your trip out into different pitch ideas is to look at it by the type of article. So there’s seven that I mainly think of, but I’ve included nine for you here because when we go through the handouts later and we go through the different types of trips, I really want us to be able to be very thorough in terms of vetting all of the different types of articles that we could be producing. So in terms of news briefs, this is something that you can say “Oh well this place that I’ve gone doesn’t have anything new”, but so often there’s things that are new in a destination that we just overlook. Either because they’re not Mai Tai or they’re not in the topical area that we typically focus on, but if you go to the Tours and Boards website you can often find that there’s a hotel that’s been renovated, there’s a new exhibit at the museum. There’s always different slices of things that are new that are going on that we can not only use as time pegs for our article, but we can also use as the basis for a news brief about a destination.

There’s a lot of big magazines. Bon Appetit has this, a lot of the airlines have this, where they look at a destination as an upcoming destination for a specific thing. And sometimes that’s food or sometimes that’s boutique hotels or different things and you really just need one to peg that, to make it newsy and then you can talk about other things that are going on in your trip. Now interviews seem like an easy one, but I think that we very often forget when we’re on trips to grab the business cards of the individual business owners that we’re meeting on those trips. And this is really key because, particularly for those trade magazines that I talked about in the last slide and we’re going to look at this when we go through the trips in a bit, but there’s so many article opportunities around interviewing these people who have successfully started these businesses all over the world in different markets for trade magazines as well as for the consumers.

AFAR has a section that I bring up a lot in different workshops, not necessarily because I’m saying go pitch AFAR, but because it’s a very interesting example of where these interview pieces come in. So they have a piece called Wandering Chef where they take a chef, but they don’t talk about the chef or his food or even his local city or her local city. But they profile the chef’s favorite places in a city that they visit often. That’s a hard, hard thing for an editor of a magazine section to be coming up with every month, but if you are collecting these things along the way in your trip it’s very easy for one out of the ten different chefs that you might visit on a trip to ask them this food theme to be somebody that you can pitch for that type of interview.

The business profiles and the person profiles are very similar to what I was saying about interviews here. There’s some surprising opportunities to do them in national magazines like airline magazines, but also there’s a lot of homes for them in trade magazines. So with round-ups this is something that I hear people mention to me a lot. I think that people who are coming, especially from a background of having their own blogs, gravitate towards not necessarily because we do a lot of round-ups online, but because they’re easy to conceptualize. So if you’re newer to writing for magazines and you’re a little scared about putting together a narrative or putting together a profile, a round-up is a much more approachable thing to do. But there’s two ways to look at a round-up and this is really important as we’re breaking out our trips because there’s the round-up where you’re rounding up things in the destination that you are in and the destination that you’re writing about, but then there’s also the round-up where you take something on your current itinerary and then you make a basket of kittens, and I’ll explain this in a minute for those of you who don’t know, but you make a basket of kittens with different but similar things in other destinations.

This is really key because with a basket of kittens and this is a term that I heard from an editor at every day with Rachel Ray who had been a freelancer for several years and then went back to the editing side, but a basket of kittens as she’s described it is something where you have one thing that’s awesome on its own, but then you find several other things that are similar. So they’re all kittens, but they’re all different but they’re all adorable. And you put them together in this basket and you present them to the editor and how can you say no to a basket of kittens or puppies or bunnies or whatever you love?

Each of these things needs to stand on its own, but be united. And the reason that these can be such an easier sell in terms of round-ups for editors is that editors need to have geographic distribution in their publication. So particularly if you’re pitching a national or international magazine, it’s a tough sell for an editor to cover one quirky thing in one out of the way destination. That’s going to be hard for them to do, but if you give them five quirk things around the world that’s much easier for them because it’s hitting many more sections of their audience.

Narrative features we’ve talked about before, narrative structure and things like this, but these are one of the things that you can actually do quite a few of these from one trip and I think people think when they’re conceptualizing what pitches they’re going to do from a trip or when they’ve gotten back from a trip and they’re look at what to do, that the feature is just a one-off thing. That they’re going to do one feature from a trip. But this is the kind of thing where you can be slanting it based on topics and based on audiences we’re going to get to in a minute and you can be doing quite a few of these for each trip.

Likewise with postcards which are kind of an atmospheric, short version of the feature and personal essays. Now services pieces, services means advice-oriented content. Service pieces are not as common in publications as they used to be, but they still exist and they still exist a lot online obviously as online as sort of swallowed up that how-to market. But this is something that also you can really slant by audience. So let’s look at how to look at different types of audiences.

In terms of age group, there’s certainly publications that are catering to different age groups of course. And a lot of the national publications and the international publications like airline magazines fall into this category, but I think that we really forget that no matter general we think a publication is, its editors don’t think that way. So this is why in the magazine database we have a whole tab on the demographics of the publication because when you as a writer are making sure that your idea is a tight and solid fit for publication, you need to make sure that it’s write for the people that they consider their primary readers.

With some publications it’s really easy to figure out. For instance, Get Lost is I believe Australian or Canadian publication which is really adventure-oriented and it’s for individual travelers and primarily younger folks, but younger with money. So it’s going to be maybe high 20s, but more like 35 or mid-30s. Whereas a Condé Nast Traveller is really more for people who are in their 50s or so and so even though these might seem like relatively large buckets of travel, the particular travelers that they’re targeting are often quite a bit more specific.

As we’re looking at different experiences on our trip within reason we can look at how to take that one experience and write it and angle it and slice it and pitch it different markets that have a different age group in mind. So I talked really briefly earlier about airline magazines, but in terms of audience this is another important thing to consider, is the mode of transportation. Because you can pitch a very, very similar news brief. So something which is new that you’re going to write a short piece about to a large number of publications by just tweaking the audience.

Particularly major national, international magazines tend to have a very healthy sized front of book. Front of book which is the beginning of the magazine which has a lot of short pieces. I mean EasyJet Traveller has I want to say 23 different types of articles just in its front of book which are all open freelancers. This is a huge territory here and all of these magazines do them slightly differently and like I said, that all have a slightly different audience. And so when you’re going on a trip or when you come back from a trip or when you’re trying to put together a portfolio of pitches from a press trip, you want to look at that destination from the viewpoint of how you can get there.

I often forget the destinations with cruise ports, but if there’s a cruise port you can be pitching that to the cruise magazines of the individual cruise lines which are custom magazines. You can pitch that to a consumer magazine about cruising. There’s Port Hole Cruise in the U.S., there’s several different ones in Australia.  Likewise with trains. Amtrak has a lovely new magazine called The National which is covering local destinations in the U.S. In the U.K. there’s Escape which is for The Great Northern Railroad. So anytime you are looking at a destination besides just thinking about what is on your itinerary, you have to also think about where the people who are going to that destination are coming from and how do they get there.

In terms of where they’re coming from, this is also really important to consider because like I was mentioning, the person that I had a coaching call with who was looking for some markets for her Heartlands articles. She was trying to think “Do people come here from Texas?” and this is important to consider. So as I mentioned when we were talking about topics, I think we tend to say “Oh let’s see. What are the regional magazines that focus on the destination that I’m pitching and how can I pitch this piece to them?”, but you’re up for quite a bit of competition if you’re pitching it to the regional magazines in the area where you have traveled because those editors have probably been offered first dibs on the trip that you went on or on the stories that you’re trying to pitch.

You’re often much better off looking at other local markets where the people in that market might be traveling to the market that you have gone to, that you’re trying to pitch. So in this case, that would be people from Texas going to Missouri. It can also be people from Washington State going to Hawaii. That’s a huge, huge market for Hawaii visitors and it’s funny because living in New York we have people from the Hawaii tours and more here every other week. I swear every week I have an invite in my inbox from some Hawaiian tourism board or another inviting me to lunch and I’m just kind of like “People, we don’t go to Hawaii, we go to the Caribbean. This is not a good market for Hawaii.” Everyone that I know who lives here thinks “Oh, Hawaii that’s nice, but the flight is 11 hours or I’d have to a layover somewhere and it would take me two whole days to go there and come back.

It’s not a good market here so when you’re thinking about what other regional magazines to take your pitch to you have to think not just of the driving regions, the people who are near that destination who would go there for a day trip or the weekend, but also people who have good transit routes to get there. So another take on geography that’s really important that I want to make sure that we don’t forget is distribution internationally because these are other English language markets that don’t cross over from a rights perspective with the pieces that you’re going to be selling in the U.S. or the U.K. or Australia or wherever you’re based.

The main markets for English language travel content of course are the three I just mentioned: the U.S., the U.K., and Australia. However, I think that we also often forget India, Southeast Asia by which I mean a Singapore sort of area, and also China and Japan which both have English language content focused on travel. So in the tour zone industry as opposed to the travel writing industry people are crazy focused on China and Japan and even India in terms of inbound travel. So travels from China, Japan, India, to their destination, but as travel writers we’re not looking at that so much. So this is really fertile area for placing a lot of different stories, especially stories about locations that are kind of “done” in terms of the American media or the British media. Things that have kind of been played out.

So in these other developing tourism markets, these stories are new and very interesting. So if you’ve joined us a bit late which I think is a good number of you, head to the handouts section and download the itineraries that are worksheets here. This is a PDF and we’re going to use it go through the next section of the call. So what I’m going to do as you’re downloading those, I actually have to pull it up on my phone because it doesn’t let me have two things open on my laptop while I’m doing the slides for you.

We’re going to look at some of these itineraries from the five different angles that I just talked about and we’re going to look at how to take one portion of that itinerary and break it out. So just let me know over here in the cha box if you’ve got your handouts and you’re all ready to go. So for the first itinerary as you guys are doing that just for some background. So this is an itinerary that I shared with you guys in our newsletter because I had gotten it via calling out from a PR person that I didn’t know and I’m not able to go because it’s actually coming up quite soon and it’s a really, really packed itinerary.

I’m not going to go through the entire itinerary because it’s got a lot going on, but I pulled out a couple things for us to focus on. So this is just a little quick chart that I made and I actually when I’m doing this myself I use something quite a bit longer, but I recommend that — oh, some people are having trouble opening it. Jill I’ll read as much as I can about the sections that I’m going to talk about for folks who are having trouble opening the itinerary and let me also see if I can put up the word version in the meantime.

Okay I’m putting up the Microsoft Word version so if you’re having trouble with the PDF, try using that. Now I’ve got to get the slides back. So let me know if you are able to see the slideshow now and I’ll get us back to the same slide. As my lovely music plays in the background. All right, great. So we should be back on the blue slide now. So with this itinerary like I said, it’s a really, really packed itinerary, but something I’m going to mention later is that I really recommend that when you do for your trips you actually do it for every single stop. Right now I’m just going to do it for a handful of stops from each itinerary for the sake of time, but especially if you’re stuck. If you’re feeling like you don’t have enough trip ideas, that you don’t know who to pitch, doing this depth of breakout on each stop on your itinerary is the answer and it’s also the answer to putting together a very impressive compilation of pitches that you’re going to be sending out to support a trip.

For the first itinerary, this one is around a prominent architected league or maybe interior designer and her view of Texas in line with some hotel openings and some hotel renovations that are happening. So in the itinerary if you have it in front of you, you’ll often see “Shop with Lauren” or “Tour with Lauren” and that’s who this Lauren is, she’s got interior designer. So the first one that I have on here is the River Oaks District which is a new $500 million development which is in uptown in Houston and it’s got restaurants, stores, it’s got a waterfall park, it’s got a residential area near the district in the River Oaks neighborhood, and like I said, it’s got a lot of restaurant opportunities as well.

It seems like this River Oaks District in terms of travel style is a natural fit for luxury and I think this is an assumption that we often make. We see something and we say “Oh yeah, so this is a high-end itinerary. So let me pitch this to luxury markets”, but it’s always really great to try to do the reverse. So if something says it’s for a luxury market, always think how can I pitch doing this expensive area on the cheap? Those articles are super online, but also in print and so anytime you see an itinerary that’s explicitly luxury, you should also think about how to do that from the reverse, from the other side. And so also in terms of topics. So this itinerary like I said is obviously very architecture-focused, but here in this section the River Oaks district has a great shopping angle.

We can also look at shopping round-ups and Endless Vacation magazine has a great one on those. A lot of the lifestyle on major travel publications like Travel and Leisure, Condė Nast Traveller, lifestyle things like Darling, women’s magazines that feature travel. Those are also a great place for shopping round-ups. So that would be the travel style. So now in terms of type of article, I started to allude to this just now when I was talking about the shopping round-ups, but obviously because this River Oaks district is relatively new we can look at this from the news brief perspective. And so what if you’re going to a place where the development itself might be two or three years old.

It’s often the case that even if these things have been around for a little while and they opened with some anchor restaurants or they open with some anchor shops, they’re still adding new things. So you can always find a news brief peg, take one thing that’s newer, and use that to talk about the rest of the district. Or if it’s been open for a little while, you can also use a statistic that’s new. For instance, now it’s been open for a year and so now they have the visitor statistics. So now you can peg it as 4 million people come here a year or something like that. So that’s a news brief.

In terms of profile, anytime you have a whole neighborhood or a development or something like this, this is a really rich area for interviews and profiles because you have multiple shop rumors, you have the person who premiered the project, you have quite a few people who have done something exemplary that you can profile either in a consumer magazine. And one of the best areas in consumer magazines to look at for these is the airline magazines almost always and especially in their upper class publications which would be Rhapsody for United, Celebrated Living for American. I just thinking of one and now I’ve forgotten it. I don’t know that Delta has one, but in the upper class publications Business Life for British Airways that’s the other one I was thinking, they have sections typically in the back of book rather than in the front of the book. But they have sections that are about business, but from an international mindset and they often have quite a few of these interviews or profiles in different formats which are a really great place for these things where when you see an itinerary we’re meeting with the head of such and such or the founder of this or the president of blah. And you’re like “Okay well what am I going to do with that?” This is the place for those.

Also in trade magazines. For instance, there’s quite a few trade magazines that are aimed at hoteliers or restaurant owners that have things in the front of the book which are interviews or are service pieces or how-to pieces based on the success of a particular individual. So that’s another place that you can take those types of articles. Now I don’t know that this lends itself very well to a narrative feature obviously. Or even necessarily a postcard piece. It could be for a magazine that was very lifestyle shopping-focused, but it definitely lends itself to a round-up. And again, this is the kind of thing where you want to look at the round-up from two ways. Want to look at the round-up not only around the places that you need to visit in the River Oaks district, but also a round-up of over things like it.

I did a piece for a shopping section in a magazine a few years ago that was on outlet malls, but not generally outlet malls that were doing something a bit different and how to visit them as a group. So this is the kind of thing where you can say “Wow, this is an interesting mixed development that has residents and shopping and dining and a park that’s public use”, say “Well what other things are there like this?” or “What other things that have a similar architecture style?” And then you can even take that to a trade magazine. Either a trade magazine from the architecture perspective or a trade magazine from the city planning perspective.

That leads us into the audience. So we’ve talked about you can go luxury and how you can go trade, but what other different types of audiences might this be a fit for? So I mentioned that in terms of audience we have to also look at how people get here, right? Houston is a major, major airline market, so this is type of thing where knowing that I would automatically go and look at the different airlines that use it as a hub or that fly there, particularly international airlines. Because there’s a lot of international routes that are opening between Houston and Asia and different places like this.

I would go to the airline magazines for those airlines and figure out where I could place a news brief or where I could place a business profile. Now in terms of geographic regions, this is the case where obviously we’re going to look at what there is around Texas, but they might have already done this. So where else can we take this? You can look at driving markets. So particularly in that part of country, people are accustomed to driving four or five hours rather than hopping on a plane or just driving somewhere one hour away like in the east coast where the cities are a lot closer together.

You can really look outwards into northern Alabama and to even parts of Mississippi, Kentucky, and Louisiana and look at these other markets. And then, it’s hard to steer my slides, in terms of the international distribution we talked about how this is a really rich area for airlines, but that also means that you can look at where those roots are going and then find the local publications there. So for instance, the South China Morning Post is a great English language outlet for travel content and that would be a really good fit for anything going on in Houston, but particularly for high-end and particularly for shopping.

The next thing I’ve got on here for this Texas trip is the Moody Center, so if you have the itinerary open and you go down this is the 7:45 p.m. stop on the first day. And this is that the Moody Center is $30 million 52,000 square foot facility designed by an architect who I assume is famous, but I don’t know him, to serve as a cross-disciplinary teaching, collaborating, and performance space that will house multiple art galleries for exhibition and experimental works, studio classrooms, and a studio theater for live performances.

That’s a lot in terms of the travel style and the topic. You can see how this would have a lot of opportunities for visiting groups who might want to take in a show. You can also look to take this to a corporate travel area because they’ve got studio classrooms and experimental art and things like this that would be a really great option for a team-building outing for a corporate group.  You can also look at taking this to an architecture publication as a profile. So this is the type of thing where anytime you see something listed on your itinerary that in and of itself knocks off a lot different topic areas.

Here we have art, we have theater we have architecture. That really helps you with both the travel style and the audience sections, but in terms of the geographic regions. So I want to look at this from that perspective for a second because I think because this center is in the university, I think these kind of things often go overlooked. And so this is the type of thing that unlike the shopping area which the local and regional publications have done to death, it’s a great market for drive-in because it’s got the art galleries and the theaters. So you would be looking at other Texas publications from other markets. So markets in Austin, markets in Dallas because this would be a really great fit for people who are looking to come and visit for the weekend. I realize I just moved my microphone a bit, so let me know if I screwed it up.

The next thing I’ve got on here on the Texas trip and I want to move on to the others, so I’m just going to get through these other ones quickly, is if you go down to I believe it is the second day. So on Saturday, April 29 we are meeting Lauren in the morning. So Lauren again, is the interior designer/architect who’s sort of a focus of this tour. So you got o her office and then there’s an hour-long neighborhood architecture walk with the preservation Houston director of special projects and this is also going to be a hardhat tour of a new hotel.

Hardhat tours are really interesting opportunities to get an exclusive on a place that hasn’t opened yet. So obviously this is going to be a luxury hotel, so in terms of travel style for this I would be looking at the preservation walk as an interesting experience either for the group tour or the individual traveler market for someone who’s interested in history. But then I’m also going to be looking at luxury for the new hotel that’s opening and that naturally leads to a profile of the hotel I terms of the type of article, but also the walking tour and the fact that you get to visit the office of a local architect could make this into a narrative article.

I just want to highlight this for a second because I had mentioned earlier how you can go a lot of different narrative features in one itinerary and this is a really good example of that. So when I’m working with people about setting up a pitch for a narrative article or writing a narrative article, I say to take one part of your trip that was really a highlight. Not necessarily just it was a highlight and that it was interesting, but it was a highlight because you had a moment of transformation. So really it changed your perspective about a place and often when we’re traveling outside of the country that might be that you thought that a place was a very developing country and then you were shocked to find that it was very much just like back home. Or that you had a revelation about something that you have always accepted at home as being normal and found that people do it very differently somewhere else.

In this case, this is a historic walking tour of Houston. How many of us think of Houston from a historic perspective? I think we mostly think of it as a place where lots of new things are happening, new things are being built, there’s lot of oil money fueling development. I was talking about the new airline routes. But this would be an opportunity to pull out and make some interesting parallels about the history of Houston versus its current status and that could make a nice narrative feature from just one half-day portion of this very, very long seven-day itinerary.

Skipping ahead quickly so we can get to the other itineraries, I’ve also mentioned two things on here; the Buffalo Bayou Park and The Menil, and I’m probably not pronouncing that correctly, but I just want to highlight like I said, when we started doing this breakdown that you can really do this with each singular stop or singular item on a trip. And these little two things that I pulled out here are still only from the second day of what I think is a seven-day itinerary. So let’s move on to the next itinerary.

This I believe is on page 6 or 7 of the PDF handouts. So this itinerary, very different because it’s international. So this is somewhere in Spain. This is actually somewhere in Catalonia and I have been to Catalonia numerous times before this trip. This is a trip that I went on and I really didn’t know anything about this region. And this is a region where there’s a lot protected or semi-protected area that is a big marsh salt flat. So for people from the eastern U.S. we have a lot of marsh ideas. A lot of the coasts around the Carolinas, Georgia by Jekyll Island, and Saint Simons. A lot of these areas are marshes, but I personally haven’t visited too many of these coastal marsh type areas in Europe and this is one in norther Spain that’s very, very under appreciated.

The trip started with the opportunity to swim with tuna. So this from the travel style perspective, is immediately polarizing because I think a lot of people are against the way that tuna are treated when they’re being fished. And we had some people on our tour in fact, who write for a very prominent green travel website and I thought it was really interesting that they were there. And that opened up the opportunity to discuss with the people who were doing the fishing and the people who were leading our tour how the tuna are treated. Not just if they’re being treated well, but how different areas of Spain and different areas of the world proceed with their tuna fishing.

This is the kind of things in terms of talking about travel style where you might just think “Oh, tuna, tuna tour, or swimming with a tuna. Well that’s like adventure travel, maybe it’s kind of nature travel”, but it also can lead into a very interesting personal essay or thought piece or narrative feature that incorporates the morality of tuna fishing, house center on the world, the history of how they do it in Spain where they’ve done it for ages in a very sustainable content and what that means about the future of tuna fishing. All from this one little two hour swimming tour that we had.

Likewise, swimming with tuna is something where you naturally have to be an adventure audience. So in terms of travel style, is this something that you would take to a luxury outlet? Possibly, but it would have to be more adventurous at the luxury outlet, right? Now I think we often get a little stuck on this because I think that people often think that adventure or hardcore or getting down and dirty travel is more of a budget, more of an independent traveler activity. But the fact that this is inherently a type of a tour that you’re going out in a group on the water means that it can be a really great fit not just for the group travel markets that I mentioned earlier, but also for a higher end audience. Because anytime something is inherently a tour means that it can be done in an individual capacity.

For instance, a very wealthy family who wanted to do this with their kids could probably rent out the whole boat which means that it might be a fit for something like Five Star Kids which is a publication out of Australia which is for very, very exclusive family travel experiences. So that gets us into the type of article. So if I was doing this for Five Star Kids I would do as a narrative feature from a first person perspective, but it would be different than the one that I mentioned would be a fit for the eco publications which would be more about the ramifications of tuna fishing and how they do it in different parts of the world.

Is this something that you could a news brief on? It doesn’t seem like it because it’s been around for a while. However, you can often a tiny piece of news that fits into something like this to make it fresh for different audiences. So that might be something about the price of tuna going up and you can say “Do you want to know why? It’s because this type of fishing is actually very intensive and blah, blah, blah” and talk about the opportunity to swim with tuna. This is also the kind of thing where you would profile the operators of the tuna tour and how they do it in a very sustainable way either for a consumer travel publication or for a trade. And this can be for a trade that is four people who operate group tours in terms of how to take an activity that’s slightly controversial and use it as an education perspective.

In terms of audience again, this is one of these ones that’s a little tricky because it’s very off the beaten path. You need to be somewhere not very central in Spain, not super close to an airport, and then take a boat for a few hours in order to even get there. So this is the kind of thing where you might be like “Well I don’t know if I could just take this to regional magazines because they would be in Spanish. So what do I do for this in terms of the audience? It’s not really near airports, it’s a little bit near a cruise port, but it would be too far of a day trip for cruise people.” So when you’re looking at the audience for something like this, it’s important again, to focus on the age groups and the types of travelers because that’s where you’re going to find the fruit for something like this that seems a little trickier. And in terms of the geographic regions like I said, this is the type of thing where you have to look a little further.

As I said, you’re not going to be pitching this to local magazines in Spain, but who is local that would take this type of experience? So it would be a great fit for a lot British publications because a lot of British travelers have traveled to Spain extensively enough that they’re looking for something different when they go there. So this is the kind of thing that you could do as a first person narrative feature for the independent which is one of the major British newspapers.

The next one I have on here, the Apiarian Center, is going to be also on the first day there. And I put this on here because it’s actually the example that I used in the six figure travel rating roadmap, the print book about how to break up one part of your trip into a lot of different articles. And I think in the print book I have maybe seven different ways that you can spin this visit to this Apiarian Center which means bees by the way. So it’s a place where you have the opportunity in a museum type setting to learn about the culture at the culture, but also you have the chance to go out with the bees. And in the book I broke this up from the perspective of giving specific types of articles that you could do.

For instance, I said you could do a personal essay about how you grew up allergic to bees and how that’s informed your travel ever since and how when you went to this thing you really wanted to take advantage of the experience, but you were afraid and how you overcame that fear, and it ends with a lesson. So that could be a personal essay, but you can also take it and you can interview the folks that run the Apiarian Center and turn it into a food article based on their favorite Spanish recipes incorporating honey. You can also use it to write a piece for a more nature-focused magazine that is more of a round-up in terms of the types of honey and why there’s different types of honey and that how they’re actually all made from the same bees who just frequent different flowers in different times of year.

The next thing I have on here, the Ebro Delta, I had mentioned when we first started talking about this itinerary that this Delta is a place that I didn’t know about and I travel to Spain often. The Spaniards that I know had never heard of it when I was telling them that I was going on this trip. And I have it on here because it’s not an activity per se, although on the itinerary I believe it’s on day two. We have the whole morning, it’s about visiting the natural park and exploring the Delta. So it’s a specific activity on here, but it’s also a destination and this is the type of thing that you’ll also see very often on trip itineraries where you have something listed as your morning or your afternoon or a couple hours as a tour, but they don’t give you a lot of information. They really just tell you a place or that that’s a park, as in this case, or a city, a small town that you’re going to stop at for a couple hours.

What do you do with that? So this is the type of thing where we can really run through the different sections that I showed you earlier in terms of the type of traveler, the type of article, and we can do a very, very in-depth breakdown for each one. So this is the type of thing where how do you visit this as an individual? How do you visit it as a group? How do you visit it if you are traveling with a family? How do you visit it if you are elderly? How do you visit it if you are on a bike tour? So you can really take a destination like this and go through every item on the previous slides and spin it for that audience.

What would you do for this as a profile or as an interview? You would interview one of the guides, one of the rangers of the national park and have them talk about that the place, their experience being there, what it means to Spanish culture to project this place, so on and so forth. What about a business profile? You would profile this more on a tour that they mentioned here which is actually the sort of minnie museum there and they sell the local honey, they sell chocolate with the local honey, they have all sorts of other things based on products from the Delta. You would profile being honoring that business and you can put it either in a consumer magazine, you can put it in a trade magazine as a profile on how to highlight a local area which isn’t known through the shop and the visitor center. There’s a lot of different ways that you can spin it for any of these types of article ideas.

Lisa has a question that I’m actually going to get to in a couple slides and since we’re already at 4:30 I’m just going to skip ahead to those and I’m going to come back later and do the last trip. But I just want to make sure since we’re at the end of our time, that I get to those questions. So frequently questions from making this work for you. Can you do this with any trip? So sometimes you’ll get an itinerary that’s really, really developed like the ones that I tried to share with you so that we can have some good talking points for this thing and say “Oh yeah, well I can see how you can break this down into different things”, but what about this very flimsy one that I have and our trip’s coming up in a week they haven’t given me anything better? Or what about this trip that I’m going on myself and I haven’t done too much research or put together my itinerary for.

You can really do this not just for any trip, but I recommend you do it when there’s less stuff on your trip because it forces you to dig around and find what are the different things you can cover and it’s important to that in advance because otherwise you might go there and miss things that would make great story ideas and then only learn about these things after the fact. But what if you’re having trouble filling up the charts?

This is the kind of thing where obviously I can sit here and spin 20 story ideas about each thing, but you especially if you’re newer to this, might have trouble doing that. That’s the point of the chart. Let the char that I showed you or any type of way that you want to do that yourself and the different types of article ideas, the different types of article ideas. Just makes lists of either of them and force yourself as a brainstorm exercise to try to twist each item on your itinerary into one of those things, even if seems silly. And by forcing yourself to do that exercise a few times, it comes more and more naturally. And especially if you’re having trouble, you might be taking too wide of a lens. You might be looking at the whole destination whereas if you looked at just on piece of it, that would come much more easily.

And I say this because I think that writer’s block, which can also be pitch brainstorming block, is never a factor of it not being possible so much as a factor of not having enough information. So if you’re trying to do one of those charts with an entire destination, an entire trip, you’re not going to know where to start. But if you take the bee center and you have to say “Okay, how could I do this for a food magazine?”, “How could I do this for a beer magazine?” then you’re going to have to really dig in and get the information that allows you to fill in those gaps and come up with those ideas?

Now where do you find the magazines to fit these story angles? This is a huge one. I was on a call yesterday with somebody who has a coaching plan and she has access to the travel magazine database and she was telling me she was trying to come up with story ideas for a trip that she just went on. And I said “Well you have the database, right?” and she was like “Yeah, but I wasn’t really seeing anything”, and I was like “Oh well this can be for that and this can be for that.” The thing is that there’s so many magazines out there. We have more than 300 in the database right now and there’s tons that I want to add that we don’t even have in there yet.

There’s so many magazines. There’s regional magazines, there’s single sport magazines, there’s magazines in Australia for specific things like high-level kids adventures that we don’t have here. There are just so many magazines and if you’re having trouble finding one for what you need, first of all, there’s always Google. You can ask a magazine about expensive kids’ tours, magazine about eco-friendly travel in Africa. The travel magazine database has tons of them, but even if you don’t have that you can still find magazines for super specific areas to super specific types of travel, super specific audiences because they’re out there.

How do you find the time to do such a deep analysis of an itinerary? This is one that I think people who are really struggling with putting their pitches together ask me. They’re like “Well, I don’t know. I really want to pitch this trip, but it takes me so long to write pitches.” Part of the reason that it takes a long time to write pitches is because you don’t know what you’re pitching. So if you feel like the pitching process is taking you too long, I really recommend doing this exercise because what’s probably happening like what I said earlier about writer’s block, is that you’re trying to pitch something too big, too amorphous, and too diffuse to be an actual single article idea. And so doing this process of breaking out each little section, each stop on your trip is actually going to make that easier because then you’re going to have specific, package-able, place-able, article ideas that you can write up very quickly because you know what they’re about.

What if all of my clips are in a totally different geographic area? When it comes to putting together a pitch portfolio for a trip, the reason that I love this is that you’re going to say to the PR person “Hi, I’m so and so. I’m interested in this trip that you have coming up. I’m not going to get confirmed assignments until I have a place on the trip, but here are the different places that I’m looking at pitching this trip and here are the things that I’m looking at pitching.” And then you have your little bullet points and the whole thing here is that you can say where you’ve been published I the past. But like I said I the beginning of the call, the most important thing to those PR people are what you are going to be publishing in the future, what you’re going to be publishing about this trip.

If all of your past clips are on Morocco and you want to write about Miami, you put together a pitch portfolio on Miami and it doesn’t matter that your past trips are on Morocco. Okay, should you pitch the stories before or after your trip?  This is really important. I have a whole article on this and you can find it on the “Start Here” page on our website, but this really depends on the individual. And I say this because it depends on how 100 percent certain you are that you can get the story that you have promised the editor that you’re going to get. And the thing that I most recommend if possible, even if you’re experienced, is to set up one anchor story. So one story that you know that you have that you know that’s assigned and then go on the trip and then come back and pitch the rest afterwards. Not only because then you’re sure that you have the stories and you’re sure that you have the information, but because you’re also going to have other things that you find on the trip when you’re there that make good stories.

How much of a story needs to be different when I pitch the same concept to a different distribution market? So this was Lisa’s question, but hers was just slightly different. Hers was about pitching the same article to different magazines, so I want to look at it both ways. So when you’re pitching a story to a different rights market. So for instance, if you sell a story to the LA Times you’re selling North American first serial rights and you’re selling web rights, probably not exclusive web rights and perpetuity which means forever. They have the right to keep them on their website as long as they want.

What this means is that you still have the first rights to that same text to sell in another market. However, it’s already been published online for the LA Times so that’s going to clash with the first web rights if you try to sell it to the South China Morning Post or to the Sydney Morning Herald. So these days what I recommend is even if you’re selling essentially the same article to a different market because everyone is going to put it up on their website, to make the articles different for everyone. And oh my God, I know that’s so annoying and there’s this rule of 60 percent or something that people talk about, but the real fact of the matter is today everyone wants the article to be different.

How do we do that? I tend to only use a couple quotes out of a long interview or a long tour that I’ve been on in each article. So you use different quotes. You use slightly different facts. You open your story with a different read, with a different anecdote. You can still right basically the same story using just different pieces of information from your research without too much extra effort. Now if you’re pitching two different magazines, the same story, but they’re not fully different distribution markets. They’re more like you’re pitching a magazine that’s about Teen Universe is a magazine that’s about cars.

Naturally the pitch should be different and it should be a different article and the reason for that is both of these places have different markets and also because they have different sections. So every pitch should be telling the editor that you know which section of the magazine this article is focused for and the pitch and the idea itself should be tailored to that section. So if enRoute has a section that’s a round-up of how to do a destination on the cheap and expensively, but Delta has a first person story on an outdoor adventure in that destination, those are going to be different pitches.

There are very few opportunities apart from newspapers where you should be sending the same pitch to different places because especially with magazines, the sections are very, very different and it’s part audience and it’s part format.

For this last itinerary, this is one that I chose specifically because it’s got a lot of attractions and I think attractions are often a really hard thing for us to find a way to pitch because we get an itinerary and there’s just a list of museums or a list of places. So I wanted to make sure to talk about this because I think those can be really hard and there are some sneaky ways to place those. So for those of you that can hang out, I’m just going to talk quickly about how to place a couple attractions and this is a trip that I actually went on, but I’m going to try to hue pretty closely to what is on the itinerary that we got in advance of the trip to show you how I would have pitched these even before I went on the trip.

So for this Long Island itinerary. If you pull it up, it’s on page 8 of the PDF. I’ve started here with the first stop that we had which was the cradle of aviation museum and this aerospace museum commemorates Long Island’s part in the history of aviation. It’s located on land once part of the Mitchell Air force Base. There’s over a 150,000 square feet featuring 75 air and space craft from a hot air balloon to an actual Apollo lunar module and you can learn about Long Island’s role and why we’re called the Cradle of Aviation.

There’s over 30 hands-on exhibits, half a dozen cockpits to climb into, and many short films throughout the exhibits. So anytime you have something like this where it’s a very focused topical museum, it’s a little bit of a gift in terms of press trip itinerary because it’s really clear who might be interested in this sort of coverage. So a lot of the very specific topical magazines whether it’s aviation, military history, things like that that tend to be focused on in attractions. How to section for a report specifically on a place like this?

For instance, I know one writer who does a lot of military history coverage. Some of you might know who I’m talking about and he really got his start by going to different museums like this and just doing a walk-around and essentially writing a first person article of what he did there or a third person profile just of the institution. But one of the things that I really like about this is while we can obviously look from the singular interest claim of who would be interested in aviation and take it that way or who would be interested in space travel, you can also really take this into what I was talking about the group market. Because this is the kind of place where it’s probably great for kids.

Who is taking kids on group tour? Is it people from schools? So then you can go and you can look at trade magazines for educators, trade magazines for teachers, and do a profile on this as an excursion for their class. Another type of travel that I mentioned earlier in passing was corporate travel and anytime you see a museum that’s 150,000 square feet, they tend to do events there where non-profits or corporations can rent out the whole facility for a dinner or for team building activities.

Museums are great for things like that both from the events prospective and also from the team building prospective. So this is really one of the things that I think a lot of us miss when we see these museums and we’re just like “Well, what do we do with this?” I had on the previous slide that I skipped the end of it for the Spain trip, there was a basket weaving museum. Again, great opportunity both for school trips, for the history and hands-on content, as well as for corporate team building.

This is the kind of thing where for the type of article obviously we could look at doing a profile or a first person feature. You can also look at doing something that’s more interview-oriented because this is the kind of place where, I know this from being there, but this tends to be true so you can look into this. Often the tour guides are volunteers and anything with a historic angle like this and I know this is the case with the World War II museum in New Orleans as well, they tend to have volunteers who have personal ties to the subject matter who are fascinating.

At the Cradle of Aviation museum they have a bunch of old Air force guys who are in their 80s and 90s who are super passionate and have great first person stories who are doing these tours. So that’s the kind of thing where you can do a profile of those people. For the Alumni magazine at the university for their local rotary club, for all sorts of different places.

Okay, now I don’t want to take too much time so I’m going to go through the next couple quickly. So Oheka Castle. This is another kind of place where you’re like “Okay we’re going to visit some pretty big thing. What is this?” So the description is this magnificent gold coast museum resting majestically on the highest point of Long Island emanates the elegant refinement of a chateau in France coupled with world-class service and a rich history that’s distinctly American. Oheka has been celebrating the art of entertaining since 1919 when financier and patron of the arts, Otto Hermann Kahn, commissioned celebrated architects to design his palatial country residents to accommodate the Kahn’s fondness for lavish parties.

Again, this is a big thing that jumps out to me; parties. They probably still host parties. They probably still host events and sure enough, if you look up, they do have a place for how to rent the space. Now anytime it’s a place like this which is just plain beautiful, not necessarily a historic museum, you’re in prime wedding territory. So wedding publications I want you all to be writing for them. Every time you are going press trips, anytime you go to an interesting hotel or an interesting attraction like this, you should be pitching it to wedding magazines. There are so many of them, so many. There’s regional ones that pop up every day. I keep seeing publishing companies that have 25 wedding magazines for specific local regions. And there’s also the national ones and all of the regional magazines like Boston magazine, 5280 in Denver, they all have wedding supplements that they do like a specific wedding issue once a year.

Any time you are finding a place like this which is beautiful and open for rentals don’t look just at the corporate market, but also look at the wedding market for this. And this is type of thing again, to get into the type of articles where you can be looking at a profile of a wedding planner who’s done an event there or of a couple who’s had their wedding there. There’s a lot of wedding magazines where they have a “real wedding section” where they profile weddings that have happened in this places in the past and all the designers they use as well as the location.

Now the next one is another case where here’s an interesting place that’s pretty, The Vanderbilt Museum. So this isn’t one of the lesser Vanderbilts, so to say. One of the ones who’s not quite so famous and as the description says: this remarkable mansion offers an intimate look at the life of a privileged family from the jazz age through the Second World War. The rooms are as William and Rosamund Vanderbilt left them, filled with priceless art, furnishings, and personal possessions. When visitors walk through the Vanderbilt mansion, they encounter a living museum, an enchanting time capsule of a vanished era.

The fact that this description is so focused on what life was like at the time, naturally it leads me to think that this would be a great first person article. So this would be a great narrative feature or perhaps a personal essay, but probably just a narrative feature of profiling your tour there. And so that again, going to the travel style as well as the audience, we can say “Who goes there? It’s kind of close to New York. Would this be good for some airline magazines or perhaps for some cruise magazines? And what would be the age group for this? Who would be particularly interested in Jazz age and Second World War era things? Is this going to be more tour groups who are taking historic tours? Is this going to be more people who are interested in that upstairs downstairs sort of experience?”

This is the kind of thing where even though it does look like a straight tour of a location, it’s got a story to tell that makes it really easy for us to be pitching stories about that story that they’ve already come up with for us. Now speaking of stories to tell, the next thing I have on here is this Jedediah Hawkins Inn. Surrounded by 22 acres of fragrant gardens and farmland, the Jedediah Hawkins Inn is a luxurious boutique hotel on the North fork of Long Island. So usually when people write about The Hamptons it’s the South fork of Long Island, so the North fork is an area that’s quite a bit less told about.

This is a location that won a New York State Preservation award. So anytime you are visiting a place that has a prestigious history in terms of its preservation that means there’s a story to be told. Who preserved? Why? So this is natural fodder for profiles of the person who actively did the preservation as well as the geography and you can also take it to a magazine conveniently named Preservation which is by the National Preservation Society and is always looking for profiles of these exact types of locations, in terms of the story of the person who saved the area. And you can also take this to other regional magazines both in the New York area and further afield in terms of a hotel profile because it’s got that story. It’s got the preservation story in the modern sense and it’s also got the history that led to it having such a great preservation.

The last thing on here I put because agritourism is getting really, really big and I want you guys to know how to handle these stories because I think when it comes to touring a farm we feel a bit limited in terms of what we can do with that. Like it has to go to a nature publication or maybe an edible magazine or a food publication and those are all true, but I want to highlight the fact that this is, I’m trying to see if it says on here, that this is a historic farm that’s been operating since 1661. So this is older than the country that this farm has been going on. So this naturally means that these business owners are savvy. They have weathered world wards, they have weathered depressions, they have weathered civil wars. They’re clearly doing something great.

In additional to being prime location perhaps for weddings as well as for tours and for family travel, taking kids apple picking, and thus for a round-up of different places on Long Island or more generally, where you can take kids apple picking or pumpkin picking in a historic setting. This is a great opportunity to be doing a profile and service pieces for trade magazines on this business owner. And this is really one of my favorite ways to fill in things on a trip that are high-paying and also that use those great connections that you’re making with local business owners. Because these trade magazines, they often pay $0.50 – $1.00 a word and they’re much less editorially onerous meaning you’re not going to have to go back and forth as many times with the editor because they don’t have 25 editors above them to get that article published. So they’re a great use of your time.

This farm here, and you can read through the profile on your own, has got so much stuff going on in addition to its history. So you can look at it from the location, from the preservation, from the tour, from the service element of the owners.

So thanks so much for joining us and for putting up with this construction that is killing me and making it really hard to talk to you and I look forward to seeing many of you in person soon either at our events or at some of the conferences coming up.